Kennewick High School - Kennewick School District€¦ · 17.05 / Kennewick High School 00 0110 - 1...

Permit Construction Document Specifications (Volume 2, Divisions 09 - 14)

For

Kennewick High School Kennewick School District

500 S. Dayton St. Kennewick, Washington 99336

February 14, 2019

Project Number: 17.05

TABLE OF CONTENTS

17.05 / Kennewick High School 00 0110 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 DIVISION 00 - INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00 0107 SEALS PAGE 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 1113 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00 2113 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 3100 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION 00 4100 BID FORM 00 8002 WASHINGTON SUSTAINABLE SCHOOLS PROTOCOL The following documents are incorporated by reference, and are available for download here: https://app.box.com/v/KSD-Kennewick-High-School

AGREEMENT FORM AIA A101-2007 GENERAL CONDITIONS AIA A201-2007 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION REPORT BY GEOPROFESSIONAL INNOVATION HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SURVEY EXISTING KENNEWICK HIGH SCHOOL DRAWINGS

The following document is incorporated by reference, and is available for download at http://www.lni.wa.gov/tradeslicensing/prevwage/wagerates/:

PREVAILING WAGE RATES FOR BENTON COUNTY DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 SUMMARY 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2100 ALLOWANCES 01 2200 UNIT PRICES 01 2300 ALTERNATES 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4100 AIR BARRIER REQUIREMENTS 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6100 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 9113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4100 DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3511 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES 03 4500 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

TABLE OF CONTENTS


DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 04 2001 MASONRY VENEER 04 2900 ENGINEERED UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 2100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 3100 STEEL DECKING 05 4000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5100 METAL STAIRS 05 7000 DECORATIVE METAL DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND PLASTICS 06 1000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1600 SHEATHING 06 1800 GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 06 2000 FINISH CARPENTRY 06 4100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 8316 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELING DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 1113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 1900 WATER REPELLENTS 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION 07 2119 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 2500 WEATHER BARRIERS 07 4113 METAL ROOF PANELS 07 4213 METAL WALL PANELS 07 4213.23 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 07 4646 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07 5400 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 7100 ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 7200 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 8100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 07 8400 FIRESTOPPING 07 9100 PREFORMED JOINT SEALS 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS 07 9513 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES DIVISION 08 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1700 INTEGRATED DOOR OPENING ASSEMBLIES 08 3100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 3223 SLIDING/FOLDING GLAZED DOORS/WALLS 08 3313 COILING COUNTER DOORS 08 3323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 3326 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08 3513.23 ACCORDION FOLDING FIRE DOORS 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS 08 4313 ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08 4413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08 4500 TRANSLUCENT PANEL ASSEMBLIES 08 5113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

TABLE OF CONTENTS


08 5659 SLIDING SERVICE WINDOW UNITS 08 6300 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE 08 8000 GLAZING 08 8836.16 ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED SWITCHABLE GLASS VOLUME 2 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2236 LATH 09 2400 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 3000 TILING 09 5100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 5423 LINEAR METAL CEILINGS 09 6466 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6551 PERFORMING ARTS SPECIALTY FLOORS 09 6566 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 6613 PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING 09 6813 TILE CARPETING 09 6816 SHEET CARPETING 09 7200 WALL COVERINGS 09 8430 SOUND ABSORBING WALL AND CEILING UNITS 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 1101 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10 1400 SIGNAGE 10 1400.13 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE (Not included in this Submittal) 10 1453 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE 10 1500 VIDEO DISPLAY SYSTEMS 10 2113.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 2123 CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK 10 2212.13 INTERIOR CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 10 2239 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS 10 2601 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS 10 2800 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 4400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 5100 LOCKERS 10 5500 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 10 5613 METAL STORAGE SHELVING 10 7113.43 FIXED SUN SCREENS 10 7500 FLAGPOLES DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 3013 APPLIANCES 11 3013.10 APPLIANCE SCHEDULE 11 4000 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11 5100 LIBRARY EQUIPMENT 11 5213 PROJECTION SCREENS 11 5300 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 11 5313 LABORATORY FUME HOODS 11 6143 CURTAINS AND TRACKS

TABLE OF CONTENTS


11 6623 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 2000 WINDOW COVERING SCHEDULE 12 2113 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12 2400 WINDOW SHADES 12 3583 SPECIALTY CASEWORK 12 4813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 6113 FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING 12 6613 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12 9300 SITE FURNISHINGS DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 3100 FABRIC STRUCTURES 13 3425 ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS & GATES 13 3500 FABRICATED WELDING BOOTHS DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 2400 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS VOLUME 3 DIVISION 21 - FIRE PROTECTION 21 1313 FIRE PROTECTION DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 0000 PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0516 PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING 22 0523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT 22 0550 PLUMBING SEISMIC CONTROLS 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0700 PLUMBING INSULATION 22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1120 NATURAL GAS PIPING 22 1123 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 22 1316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 22 1319 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1413 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 22 1423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 3400 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 - HVAC 23 0000 HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0523 VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0548 MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS 23 0550 MECHANICAL SEISMIC CONTROLS

TABLE OF CONTENTS


23 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 0700 MECHANICAL INSULATION 23 0900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR HVAC 23 0926 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 23 2113 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2115 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES 23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2300 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 23 2500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 3100 HVAC DUCTS 23 3300 DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3423 POWER VENTILATORS 23 3519 FUME EXTRACTION EQUIPMENT 23 3600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 3713 AIR OUTLETS 23 3723 GRAVITY VENTILATORS 23 4100 AIR FILTERS 23 4192 DUCTWORK SYSTEM CLEANING 23 5100 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS 23 5216 CONDENSING HOT WATER BOILERS 23 6426 ROTARY-SCREW AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS 23 7200 OUTDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 7213 OUTDOOR HEAT RECOVERY VENTILATOR UNITS 23 8127 DUCTLESS SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 23 8226 ELECTRIC HEATERS 23 8239 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS VOLUME 4 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 0010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS EXTRA MATERIAL LOG (26 0533) 26 0535 FLOOR BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0573 SHORT CIRCUIT DEVICE COORDINATION & ARC FLASH STUDY 26 0923 DISTRIBUTED LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 0961 PRODUCTION VENUE LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 0962 PRODUCTION VENUE DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 26 0963 PRODUCTION LIGHTING FIXTURES – THEATRE 26 0999 ELECTRICAL WORK FOR THEATER EQUIPMENT 26 2200 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 2413 SWITCHBOARDS 26 2416 PANELBOARDS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES EXTRA RECEPTACLE LOG (26 2726) 26 2813 FUSES 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 2820 ELEVATOR POWER MODULE

TABLE OF CONTENTS


26 2913 MOTOR CONTROL 26 3213 GENERATOR 26 3600 TRANSFER SWITCHES 26 5100 LIGHTING FIXTURES DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 0010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 1500 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE EXTRA MATERIAL LOG (27 1500) 27 4100 LOUDSPEAKER PERFORMANCE SYSTEM 27 5101 AUXILLARY GYM SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM 27 5102 COMMONS SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM 27 5116 INTERCOM AND CLOCK SYSTEMS 27 5117 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND

SECURITY 28 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND

SECURITY 28 3100 NETWORKED FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXTRA MATERIAL LOG (28 3100) 28 3113 INTRUSION ALARM & ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS 28 3173 DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM TECHNOLOGY COMPONENT SYSTEMS MATRIX DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 1000 SITE CLEARING 31 2000 EARTH MOVING DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING 32 1293.10 ARTIFICIAL GRASS TURF 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING 32 1373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 1823.33 RUNNING TRACK SURFACING 32 1823.53 TENNIS COURT SURFACING 32 3113 TENNIS AND BALL FIELD CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 8400 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING 32 9200 LAWNS AND GRASSES 32 9300 PLANTS 32 9301 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 1000 WATER DISTRIBUTION 33 3000 SANITARY SEWER 33 4000 STORM DRAINAGE 33 4600 ARTIFICIAL TURF SUBDRAINAGE 33 4601 TRACK DRAINAGE

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


SECTION 09 2116


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.

B. Metal stud wall framing.

C. Metal channel ceiling framing.

D. Acoustic insulation.

E. Gypsum wallboard.

F. Joint treatment and accessories.

G. Acoustic (sound-dampening) wall and ceiling board.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing.

B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.

C. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.

D. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls.

E. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing acoustical gaps in construction other than gypsumboard or plaster work.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AISI S100-12 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel StructuralMembers; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2012.

B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) orZinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

C. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for FinishingGypsum Board; 2015.

D. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014.

E. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to ReceiveScrew-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2017.

F. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2017.

G. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum PanelProducts or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2015.

H. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2016.

I. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and GypsumVeneer Base; 2014a.

J. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant GypsumBacking Panel; 2013.

K. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014a.

L. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface ofInterior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2016.

M. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne SoundTransmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016).

N. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2016.

O. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2016.



P. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015.

Q. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals.

C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishingsystem.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showingcompliance with requirements.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation andfinishing, with minimum three years of experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.2. SCAFCO Corporation: www.scafco.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of sizeand properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximumdeflection of wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf.1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces, 20 gauge.2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.3. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped.4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch depth, for attachment to substrate through both legs;

both legs expanded metal mesh.

C. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and propertiesnecessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements.1. Products:

a. SCAFCO Shaftwall I-Stud with J-Track or JL-Corner.b. ClarkDietrich CT Stud with J-Tabbed Track.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.

E. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices thataccommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventingrotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition.1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity

required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12.2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped

galvanized coating.

2.03 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:1. American Gypsum Company: www.americangypsum.com.2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.



4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle.5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes tominimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Thickness:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.b. Ceilings: 1/2 inch.c. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings.

C. Impact Resistant Wallboard:1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. Type: Fire resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed.4. Thickness: 5/8 inch.5. Edges: Tapered.

D. Backing Board For Wet Areas: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds and

shower ceilings.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. Glass Mat Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel as

defined in ASTM C1178/C1178M.a. Standard Type: Thickness 1/2 inch.b. Fire Resistant Type: Type X core, thickness 5/8 inch.

E. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTMC1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas.2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly;

if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.4. Regular Board Thickness: 1/2 inch.5. Edges: Tapered.

F. Ceiling Board: Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.3. Edges: Tapered.

G. Acoustical Sound Dampening Wall and Ceiling Board: Two layers of heavy paper faced, highdensity gypsum board separated by a viscoelastic polymer layer and capable of achieving STCrating of 50 or more in typical stud wall assemblies as calculated in accordance with ASTME413 and when tested in accordance with ASTM E90.1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.2. Long Edges: Tapered.3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.

H. Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, beveled long edges, endssquare cut.1. Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM

C1396/C1396M; water-resistant faces.2. Products:

a. American Gypsum Company; M-Bloc Shaft Liner.b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Shaftliner.c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Fire-Shield Shaftliner XP.



d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced.1. Thickness:

a. 3 1/2 inches thick at acoustical wall assemblies up to 5 ½ inches thick.b. 5 1/2 inches thick at acoustical wall assemblies greater than 5 ½ inches thick.

B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not usesolvent-based non-curing butyl sealant.

C. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500.

D. Beads, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, aluminum, unless noted otherwise.1. Rigid Corner Beads: Low profile, for 90 degree outside corners.2. Expansion Joints:

a. Type: U-shaped.b. Products:

1) Fry Reglet; DRM 50-50 2 PC: www.fryreglet.com.2) Flannery Inc.; DWSM 625-625 with DWL 50.3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Decorative Metal Trim:1. Material: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5 temper.2. Finish: Anodized, clear.3. Reveal Trim:

a. Products:1) Fry Reglet; DRM-625-625: www.fryreglet.com.2) Flannery Inc.; DWR 625-625: www.flannerytrim.com.3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

4. Molding:a. Products:

1) Fry Reglet; X Corner Molding XCM 625-625: www.fryreglet.com.2) Fry Reglet; J Molding FCM-50; www.fryreglet.com.3) Fry Reglet; T Molding: www.fryreglet.com.4) Fry Reglet; H Molding: www.fryreglet.com.5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer forproject conditions.1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise

indicated.2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.

G. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed totake the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.

H. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033inch in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosionresistant.

I. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch inThickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant.

J. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size tosuit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.



3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION

A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.1. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements.

B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between specialfriction studs. 1. On walls over sixteen feet high, screw-attach studs to runners top and bottom.2. Seal perimeter of shaft wall and penetrations with acoustical sealant.

3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.2. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

C. Studs: Space studs as scheduled.1. Space 3-5/8" studs at 16 inches on center.2. Space 6 inch studs at 24 inches on center, minimum.3. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.4. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.5. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance

between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanicaldevices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of studconnections; do not leave studs unattached to track.

D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using notless than double studs at jambs.

E. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints overframing members.

F. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of:1. Wall mounted cabinets.2. Plumbing fixtures.3. Toilet partitions.4. Toilet accessories.5. Wall mounted door hardware.

3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and aroundelectrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.

B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt endjoints, especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends andedges occurring over firm bearing.

C. Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furringmembers, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Use glass mat faced gypsumboard at exterior walls and at other locations as indicated. Place second layer perpendicular toframing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.

D. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements ofassembly listing.



3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.2. Control joints are to be installed in place of reveals as required, even when indicated as

reveals on drawings.3. Install reveals and control joints, even when not indicated on drawings. Confirm locations

with Architect, prior to installation.

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.

C. Decorative Trim: Install at locations shown on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

3.07 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas

specifically indicated.2. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise

indicated.3. Level 3: Walls to receive textured wall finish.4. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish.5. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the

completed construction.

B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready toreceive finishes.1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.

C. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surfaceafter joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.

3.08 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feetin any direction.

END OF SECTION

LATH


SECTION 09 2236

LATH

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Metal lath for cement plaster.

B. Furring for metal lath.


A. Section 09 2400 - Cement Plastering.


A. ASTM C841 - Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring; 2003(Reapproved 2013).

B. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2014a.

C. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum PanelProducts or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2015.

D. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application ofGypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2016.

E. ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interiorand Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2018a.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on furring and lathing components, structural characteristics,material limitations, and finish.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with at leastfive years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Metal Lath and Accessories:1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Furring Channels: Formed steel, minimum 0.020 inch thick, 3/8 inch deep by 7/8 inch high,splicing permitted; galvanized.

2.03 LATH

A. Diamond Mesh Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized; self-furring.1. Weight: To suit application and as specified in ASTM C841 or ASTM C1063 for framing

spacing.

B. Beads, Screeds, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: Depth governed by plaster thickness, andmaximum possible lengths.1. Material: Formed sheet steel with rust inhibitive primer, expanded metal flanges.2. Casing Beads: Square edges.3. Corner Beads: Squared corners.4. Expansion Joints: Accordion profile with factory-installed protective tape, 2 inch wide

flanges.5. Base Screeds: Bevelled edges.

LATH


6. Control Joints: Accordion profile with factory-installed protective tape, 2 inch flanges.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchorage: Tie wire, nails, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; torigidly secure materials in place, galvanized.

B. Fasteners: Self-piercing tapping screws; ASTM C1002 or ASTM C954.

C. Tie Wire: Annealed galvanized steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that substrates are ready to receive work and conditions are suitable for application.

C. For exterior plaster and stucco on stud walls, verify that water-resistive barrier has beeninstalled over sheathing substrate completely and correctly.

D. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

E. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactorypreparation before proceeding.

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install metal lath and furring for Portland cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C1063.

3.03 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wall furring by directly attaching to existing walls.

B. Install furring channels horizontally; secure with fasteners on alternate channel flanges atmaximum 24 inches on center.

C. Space furring channels maximum 16 inches on center, and not more than 4 inches away fromfloor and ceiling lines.

3.04 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Locate joints as indicated on drawings and comply with ASTM C1063.

3.05 LATH INSTALLATION

A. Apply lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.

B. Lap or nest ends of metal lath in accordance with ASTM C841.

C. Attach metal lath to metal supports using tie wire at maximum 6 inches on center.

D. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath returns 3inches from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only.

E. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only.

F. Place base screeds at termination of plaster areas; secure rigidly in place.

G. Place 4 inch wide strips of lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials, andsecure rigidly in place.

H. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door frames to 6 inches aboveceiling line.

I. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly inplace.

J. Place additional strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place.

END OF SECTION

CEMENT PLASTERING


SECTION 09 2400

CEMENT PLASTERING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Cement plastering for repairs, exterior.


A. Section 09 2236 - Lath: Lath, furring, beads, screeds, and joint accessories for plaster base.

B. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.


A. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016.

B. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006(Reapproved 2011).

C. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2018a.

D. ASTM C1328/C1328M - Standard Specification for Plastic (Stucco) Cement; 2012.

E. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;2016a.

F. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials and trim accessories.

C. Samples:1. Submit two samples, 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating finish color and texture.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section withminimum five years documented experience.

1.06 MOCK-UP

A. Mock-Up at a patch location, minimum 12 inches by 12 inches, illustrating surface finish.1. Mock-up may remain as part of this work.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Exterior Plaster Work: Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is 40degrees F or lower, or when temperature is expected to drop below 40 degrees F within 48hours of application.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FACTORY PREPARED CEMENT PLASTER

A. Premixed One-Coat Base: Mixture of Type I Portland cement complying with ASTMC150/C150M, hydrated lime complying with ASTM C207, fibers and other approved ingredients;install in accordance with ASTM C926.1. Manufacturers:

a. Amerimix, an Oldcastle brand; AMX 750 FBC: www.amerimix.com/#sle.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Premixed Textured Coating: Polymer modified acrylic coating, integrally colored, and trowelapplied to substrates prepared in accordance with manufacturer's written installationinstructions.1. Color: To match approved sample.2. Manufacturers:

a. Parex USA Inc; AquaSol Sand Fine: www.parex.com/#sle.

CEMENT PLASTERING


b. Parex USA Inc; Optimum DPR Sand Fine: www.parex.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Lath: As specified in Section 09 2236.

B. Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: As specified in Section 09 2236.

C. Reinforcing Mesh: 4.5 oz/sq yd alkali-resistant mesh.

D. Acrylic Sealant:1. BASF, MasterSeal NP 520: www.master-builders-solutions.basf.us.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions are acceptable prior to starting this work.

B. Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface perimeter accessories are properlyin place.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Sand down edges of cracks.

B. Thoroughly clean extraneous material such as dirt, loose chips and dust from surface. Ifcompressed air is used, it should be free of oil.

C. Cut damaged corner beads up as required for a quality finished product.

D. Reinstall any damaged lath, insulation or corner bead material.

E.

3.03 MIXING

A. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.

B. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.

C. Protect mixtures from frost or freezing temperatures, contamination, and excessive evaporation.

3.04 APPLICATION

A. Apply plaster in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and comply with ASTMC926.

B. Base Coats:1. Apply base coat(s) to fully embed lath and to specified thickness.2. Follow guidelines in ASTM C926 and manufacturer's written installation instructions for

moist curing base coats and application of subsequent coats.

C. Leveling Coat:1. Apply leveling coat to specified thickness.2. Fully embed reinforcing mesh in leveling coat.

D. Finish Coats:1. Primer and Acrylic Coatings:

a. Remove surface contaminants such as dust and dirt without damaging substrate.b. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.c. Apply finish coating in number of coats and to thickness recommended by

manufacturer.

3.05 REPAIR

A. Patching: Remove loose, damaged or defective plaster and replace with plaster of samecomposition; finish to match surrounding area.

END OF SECTION

TILING


SECTION 09 3000

TILING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Tile for floor applications.

B. Tile for wall applications.

C. Tile for shower receptors.

D. Ceramic accessories.

E. Ceramic trim.

F. Non-ceramic trim.


A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between tile work and adjacent constructionand fixtures.

B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Tile backer board.

C. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Shower receptor.


A. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in theWet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2014.

B. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on aCured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999(Reaffirmed 2010).

C. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in theWet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a CuredPortland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

D. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withOrganic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised).

E. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withDry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

F. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withChemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (Reaffirmed2010).

G. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withChemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

H. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile withModified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

I. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework;1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

J. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (ExteriorGlue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

K. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded,Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed2010).

L. ANSI A118.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2012(Revised).

M. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, WaterCleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive;2013 (Revised).

TILING


N. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar;2012 (Revised).

O. ANSI A118.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant FuranMortars and Grouts for Tile Installation; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016).

P. ANSI A118.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Standard Cement Grouts for TileInstallation; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016).

Q. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded,Waterproof Membranes For Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installation; 2014.

R. ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes forThin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2014.

S. ANSI A118.15 - American National Standard Specifications for Improved Modified Dry-SetCement Mortar; 2012.

T. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2017.

U. ANSI A137.2 - American National Standard Specifications for Glass Tile; 2013.

V. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016.

W. ASTM C373 - Standard Test Methods for Determination of Water Absorption and AssociatedProperties by Vacuum Method for Pressed Ceramic Tiles and Glass Tiles and Boil Method forExtruded Ceramic Tiles and Non-tile Fired Ceramic Whiteware Products; 2016e1.

X. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2016.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work ofthis section; require attendance by all affected installers.1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required

with related work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctionswith dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, andsetting details.

D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches in sizeillustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stainremoval methods.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Tile: 1 percent of each size, color, and surface finish combination, but not less than

10 square feet of each type.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of productsspecified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum offive years of documented experience.

1.07 MOCK-UP

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.

TILING


B. Construct tile mock-up where indicated on drawings, incorporating all components specified forthe location.1. Minimum size of mock-up is indicated on drawings.2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.

B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortarmaterials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.1. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com/#sle.2. Reflections in Glass: www.reflectionsinglasstile.com .3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Glazed Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.1. Edges: Cushioned.2. Surface Finish: As scheduled.3. Color(s): As indicated.

a. T-6: Daltile, Rittenhouse Square, 3 x 6 inches, Biscuit K175.b. T-7: Daltile, Rittenhouse Square, 3 x 6 inches (S-4369), Biscuit K175; Bullnose on 6

inch side.c. T-8: Daltile, Rittenhouse Square, 3 x 6 inches (S-4639), Biscuit K175, Bullnose on 3

inch side.4. Trim Units: Matching bead, bullnose, cove, and base shapes in sizes coordinated with

field tile.

C. Porcelain Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.1. Thickness: 3/8 inch.2. Edges: Cushioned.3. Surface Finish: Matte glazed.4. Color(s): As indicated.

a. T-1: Daltile, Volume 1.0, 12 x 24 inches, Sonic White VL75.b. T-2: Daltile, Volume 1.0, 12 x 24 inches, Amplify Black VL70.c. T-3: Daltile, Volume 1.0, 3 x 12 inches (P-43C9), Sonic White VL75; Bullnose.

5. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove shapes in sizescoordinated with field tile.

D. Glass Tile: ANSI A137.2, standard grade.1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.2. Edges: Square.3. Color(s): As indicated.

a. T-4: Reflections in Glass, 1 x 6 x 6mm thick, mosaic, Florida Orange (Custom);Contact Chuck Hill, Daltile (206) 999-6890.

b. T-5: Daltile, Color Wave, 2 x 12 inches, Nine Iron CW19.

2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; samemanufacturer as tile.

B. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin natural anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions to suitapplication, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive.1. Applications:

TILING


a. Open edges of floor tile.b. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.c. Thresholds at door openings.d. Expansion and control joints, floor and wall.e. Floor to wall joints.

1) Basis of Design: Schluter Cove Base, Dilex-AHK, Light Anthracite (TSLA);Provide accessory pieces as required at corners.

f. Borders and other trim as indicated on drawings.2. Manufacturers:

a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com/#sle.b. Genesis APS International: www.genesis-aps.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:1. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com.2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.3. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com.4. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com/sle.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4.1. Applications: Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of bond

coat is indicated.

C. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.1.

D. Mortar Bed Materials: Pre-packaged mix of Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water.

2.04 GROUTS

A. Manufacturers:1. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com.2. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.3. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com.4. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com/#sle.

B. Standard Grout: ANSI A118.6 standard cement grout.1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is

indicated.2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less

than 1/8 inch wide.3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.4. Products:

a. Custom Building Products; Polyblend Sanded Grout: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle.

b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 1500 Sanded Grout: www.laticrete.com/#sle.

c. Mapei; Ultracolor Plus: www.mapei.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water-cleanable epoxy grout.1. Applications: Locker rooms.2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.3. Products:

a. Custom Building Products; CEG-Lite 100% Solids Commercial Epoxy Grout: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle.

b. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout: www.laticrete.com/#sle.

c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

SHOULD WE USE EPOXY EVERYWHERE?

MelissaH

Cloud

heidi

Re: Typewritten Text

heidi

Re: Cloud

We can. All toilet rooms, locker rooms....anywhere else?

TILING


D. Grout Color Schedule:1. Laticrete 45 Raven: At all toilet rooms.2. Laticrete 25 Natural Grey: At all drinking fountains.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12; notintended as waterproofing.1. Type: Fluid-applied.2. Thickness: 20 mils, maximum.3. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/16 inch gap, minimum.4. Products:

a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane: www.laticrete.com/#sle.

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Waterproofing Membrane at Showers and Tiled Tubs: Specifically designed for bonding tocementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10.

C. Mesh Tape: 2 inch wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding ofsetting materials to sub-floor surfaces.

D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moistureemission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommendedby tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect surrounding work from damage.

B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptableflatness tolerances.

D. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer'sinstructions.


A. Install tile and thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSIA108.1a through ANSI A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB)recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and basesneatly. Align floor joints.

D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make groutjoints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.

E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.

F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.

G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

TILING


I. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.

J. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.

K. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.

L. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with eitherbond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.

3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS

A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, dry-set orlatex-Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.1. Where epoxy or furan grout is indicated, but not epoxy or furan bond coat, install in

accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F115.

3.05 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS

A. At tiled shower receptors install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method B415, mortar bed floor,and W244, thin-set over cementitious backer unit walls.

B. Grout with standard grout as specified above.

3.06 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE

A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244,using membrane at toilet rooms.

B. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) MethodW245.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

END OF SECTION

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


SECTION 09 5100

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.

B. Acoustical units.


A. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Placement of special anchors or inserts for suspensionsystem.

B. Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.

C. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.


A. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficientsby the Reverberation Room Method; 2017.

B. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing ofMetal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.

C. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems forAcoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013.

D. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2014.


A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work iscompleted, tested, and approved.

B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.

C. Samples: Submit two samples 4 by 4 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acousticalunits.

D. Samples: Submit two samples each, 4 inches long, of suspension system main runner.

E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.


A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing theproducts specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing theproducts specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percentprior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acoustic Tiles/Panels:1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.3. USG: www.usg.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Suspension Systems:1. Same as for acoustical units.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Acoustical Tile: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type III, with the following characteristics:1. Size: 12 by 12 inches.2. Thickness: 5/8 inches.3. Joint: Kerfed and rabbeted.4. Edge: Square.5. Surface Color: White.

B. Acoustical Panels: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type III, with the followingcharacteristics:1. Size: 24 by 24 inches and 24 x 48 inches.2. Thickness: 3/4 inches.3. Light Reflectance: 86 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.4. NRC Range: 0.65 to 0.75, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.5. Edge: Angled Tegular.6. Surface Color: White.7. Suspension System: Exposed grid.8. Products:

a. Armstrong Cirrus.b. CertainTeed Symphony M.c. USG Mars.

C. Acoustical Panels: Plastic faced mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type IV, with the followingcharacteristics:1. Size: 24 by 48 inches.2. Thickness: 3/4 inches.3. Edge: Square.4. Surface Color: White.5. Suspension System: Exposed grid.6. Products:

a. Armstrong Ceramaguard.b. CertainTeed Vinylshield A.

2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)

A. Metal Suspension Systems - General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut andinterlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold downclips as required.

B. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty.1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.2. Construction: Double web.3. Finish: White painted.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismicrequirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.

B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of

grid.

C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

WHERE ARE WE CALLING THESE CEILING TYPES OUT?

MelissaH

Cloud

heidi


On the RCPs?

MelissaH


ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximumdeflection of 1:360.

B. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with otherwork.

C. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Wherecarrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearestaffected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

E. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead loadto exceed deflection capability.

F. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, orsupport components independently.

G. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.

H. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions withother interruptions.1. Use longest practical lengths.2. Overlap and rivet corners.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental toappearance and function.

C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.

D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.

E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.

F. Cutting Acoustical Units:1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION

LINEAR METAL CEILINGS


SECTION 09 5423


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Linear metal ceilings.

B. Suspended metal support system and perimeter trim.


A. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Execution requirements for placement of attachment anchorsto structure above.

B. Section 21 1313 - Fire Protection: Sprinkler heads.

C. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures.


A. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems forAcoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013.

B. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems forAcoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2016.


A. Coordination: Coordinate work of this section with installation of mechanical and electricalcomponents and with other construction activities affected by work of this section.

B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Furnish for component profiles, materials, and perimeter and integral trim.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate reflected ceiling plan, location of mechanical and electricalcomponents, and points of suspension.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 8 by 10 inch in size illustrating color and finish of exposed toview components.

E. Installer's Qualification Statement.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Linear Panels: One, standard length.


A. Accept factory-finished products on site in manufacturer's unopened factory packaging only;reject opened packages.

B. Protect factory-finished products from damage to appearance by storing products inmanufacturer's unopened factory packaging in dry storage area.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty; include coverage for corrosion resistance anddiscoloration of surface finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Linear Metal Ceilings:1. Basis of Design: Arktura; Vapor - Trail: www.arktura.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.



2.02 LINEAR METAL CEILINGS

A. Linear Metal Ceiling System: Panels, suspension members, trim, and accessories as requiredto provide a complete system.

B. Performance Requirements:1. Design to support imposed loads of indicated items without eccentric loading of supports.2. Design for maximum deflection of 1/360 of span.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Linear Metal Panels:1. Type: Torsion spring panel; downward accessible flat panels.

a. Size and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.b. Perforations: Perforated pattern, 20 percent open area.c. Finish: Powder coated; Architect to choose from manufacturer's standard colors.

B. End Caps: Formed metal; same color and finish as sight-exposed surfaces of linear panels.

C. Accessories: Stabilizer bars as required for suspended grid system; sight-exposed surfacessame color and finish as sight-exposed surfaces of linear panels.

D. Suspension Members: Formed steel sections, with integral attachment points; galvanizedfinish; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatnessrequirement specified.

E. Suspension Wire: Size and type as required for application, seismic requirements, and ceilingsystem flatness requirement specified.

F. Touch-up Paint For Concealed Items: Zinc rich type.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Shop cut linear panels to accommodate mechanical and electrical items.

B. Factory-form internal and external corners of same material, thickness, finish, and profile tomatch exposed linear panels; back brace internal corners.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.

D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Suspension Components:1. Install after above-ceiling work is complete in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,

ASTM C636/C636M, and ASTM E580/E580M.2. Hang carrying members independent of walls, columns, ducts, light fixtures, pipe, and

conduit; where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face panelswith adjacent panels.

3. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearestadjacent hangers to span the required distance.

4. Locate suspension system for linear panel layout on room axis according to reflected plan.

B. Linear Metal Ceiling:1. Install linear panels and other system components in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

DO WE WANT TO JUST SAY WHITE HERE?

MelissaH

Cloud

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed



C. Maximum Variation From Dimensioned Position: 1/4 inch.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean polished surfaces.

B. Replace damaged or abraded components.

END OF SECTION

WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING


SECTION 09 6466


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wood athletic flooring.

B. Subflooring.

C. Sleepers.

D. Resilient cushioning.

E. Sheet vapor retarder.

F. Floor finishes.

G. Surface finishing.


A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete subfloor surface; recessed.

B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Formed depressions for deep floor sockets andinserts.


A. MFMA (SPEC) - Guide Specifications for Maple Flooring Systems; current edition.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide complete system by an approved manufacturer meeting 1991 DIN - Part 2 performancerequirements.

B. Systems meeting only EN 14904 performance requirements are not acceptable.

C. Flooring systems shall have been independently tested, by a DIN testing laboratory recognizedby MFMA, and meet or exceed all performance requirements.

D. Independent DIN testing laboratory shall have Scientific Body Membership in the InternationalAssociation of Sports Surface Sciences (ISSS).


A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section; requireattendance by all affected installers.1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required

with related work.

1.06 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for flooring, floor finish materials, and resilient cushion.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate floor joint pattern and termination details.1. Indicate provisions for expansion and contraction, wall base, and game insert or socket

devices.2. Indicate size and type fasteners and anchors.3. Indicate location, size, design, and color of game markings.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating floor finish, color, and sheen.

E. Installation Instructions: Indicate standard and special installation procedures.

F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures and recommended maintenancematerials.


A. Perform work of this section in accordance with MFMA (SPEC).



B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection.1. Minimum three years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing products specified in this section.1. Minimum three years of documented experience.


A. Deliver materials and store off the floor in a well-ventilated, weather-tight space.


A. Do not install wood flooring until wet construction work is complete and permanent heat and airconditioning is installed and operating.

B. Maintain room temperature between 55 degrees F and 75 degrees F and relative humiditybetween 35 to 50 percent for a period of seven days prior to delivery of materials to installationspace, during installation, and after installation.

C. Acclimate wood flooring materials to installation space a minimum of 48 hours prior toinstallation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wood Athletic Flooring:1. Connor Sports Flooring: www.connorfloor.com/#sle.2. Robbins Sports Surfaces: www.robbinsfloor.com/#sle.3. Horner Flooring: www.hornerflooring.com.4. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING

A. General: Wood strip flooring, MFMA (PUR) compliant for application indicated; systemcomponents provided by single manufacturer.

B. Application: Gymnasium.

C. System Description:1. Fixed, cushioned sleeper system, wood strip flooring.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Wood Strip Flooring:1. Species: Northern hard maple, kiln dried; tongue and groove edges, end matched.2. Grade: Second and better.3. Cut: Flat grain.4. Moisture Content: 7 to 9 percent.5. Thickness: 25/32 inch.6. Width: 2-1/4 inches.7. Length: Random, minimum of 9 inches.

B. Subflooring: One layer of 15/32 inch thick plywood, APA rated, exposure 1, minimum spanrating of 32/16.

C. Resilient Cushioning: Manufacturer's standard rubber pads, factory-applied to bottom side of sleepers.

D. Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, 6 mil thick; 2 inch wide tape for sealing sheet seams.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Floor Finishes: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer and conforming to MFMAspecifications.1. Sealer: Oil based urethane.2. Finish Coats: Oil based urethane; high gloss.



3. Game Marking Paint: Compatible with sealer and finish coats; colors as indicated ondrawings.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Ventilating Base: Molded rubber, 4 inch high with a 3 inch toe, pre-molded outside corners;black color.

B. Game Socket Devices: Cast aluminum type, with anchors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting this work.

B. Verify that concrete subfloor surface is smooth and flat to plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

C. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrate to receive wood flooring in accordance with manufacturer's and MFMAinstructions.

B. Vacuum clean substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Place vapor retarder over concrete surface, overlap seams a minimum of 6 inches and seal withtape.

B. Sleepers with Plywood Subfloor:1. Place sleepers at 90 degree angle to direction of finished floor; space 12 inches on center.

Stagger end joints a minimum of 24 inches.2. Fasten plywood subfloor over sleepers at 45 degree angle to direction of finished floor.

Allow minimum 1/4 inch between plywood subfloor edges.

C. Wood Flooring:1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's and MFMA instructions.2. Lay flooring parallel to length of main playing area. Blind nail or staple to subfloor.3. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates.4. Provide 2 inch expansion space at walls and other interruptions.

D. Install base at floor perimeter to cover expansion space in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions. Miter inside corners.

E. Install floor sockets and inserts to a depth sufficient to ensure flush top surface with floorsurface.

F. Finishing:1. Mask off adjacent surfaces before beginning sanding.2. Sand flooring to smooth even finish with no evidence of sander marks. Remove dust by

vacuum.3. Apply finishes in accordance with floor finish manufacturer's and MFMA instructions.4. Apply first coat, allow to dry, then buff lightly with recommended pad to remove

irregularities. Vacuum clean and wipe with damp, lint-free cloth before applyingsucceeding coats.

5. Apply last coat of finish.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean floor surfaces in accordance with floor finish manufacturer's instructions.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Prohibit traffic on finished floor for 72 hours after installation.

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

DO WE CALL OUT THE LOGO IN THE PAINT SECTION OR HERE?

MelissaH

Cloud

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed



B. Place protective coverings over finished floors; do not remove coverings until Date ofSubstantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

RESILIENT FLOORING


SECTION 09 6500

RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Resilient sheet flooring.

B. Resilient tile flooring.

C. Resilient base.

D. Resilient stair accessories.

E. Installation accessories.


A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concreteslabs and floors.

B. Section 03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Moisture mitigation system.


A. ASTM D6329 - Standard Guide for Developing Methodology for Evaluating the Ability of IndoorMaterials to Support Microbial Growth Using Static Environmental Chambers; 1998(Reapproved 2015).

B. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne SoundTransmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016).

C. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Usinga Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.

D. ASTM F150 - Standard Test Method for Electrical Resistance of Conductive and StaticDissipative Resilient Flooring; 2006 (Reapproved 2013).

E. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;2011.

F. ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile; 2013a.

G. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).

H. ASTM F2034 - Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering; 2008 (Reapproved2013).

I. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Usinga Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.

J. UL 2824 - GREENGUARD Certification Program Method for Measuring Microbial ResistanceFrom Various Sources Using Static Environmental Chambers; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.



with related work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performancecharacteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plans and floor patterns.

D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 4 by 4 inch in size illustrating color and pattern foreach resilient flooring product specified.

RESILIENT FLOORING


E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Wall Base: 20 linear feet of each type and color.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring withminimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring with minimum threeyears documented experience and approved by flooring manufacturer.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing concrete slabmoisture testing and inspections of the type specified in this section.


A. Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and thecorrect style, color, quantity and run numbers.

B. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space.

C. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.

D. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.

E. Do not double stack pallets.


A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at atemperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditionsabove 55 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET FLOORING

A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring: Color and pattern throughout wear layer thickness, with backing.1. Manufacturers:

a. Altro, Operetta: www.altrofloors.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested inaccordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.

3. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.027 inch minimum.4. Total Thickness: 0.080 inch minimum.5. Seams: Heat welded.6. Color: As indicated.

a. RSF-7: Quintet OP2114.

B. Vinyl Sheet Flooring: Color and pattern throughout wear layer thickness, with backing.1. Manufacturers:

a. Altro, Serenade: www.altrofloors.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.


3. Total Thickness: 0.15 inch (3.9 mm) minimum.4. Seams: Heat welded.5. Color: As indicated.

a. RSF-2: Metronome SE3914.

C. PVC Sheet Flooring: Flexible PVC sheet containing silicone carbide, colored quartz andaluminum oxide granules for enhanced slip resistance.

MelissaH

Cloud+

MelissaH

Cloud+

ENCORE SE3929

MelissaH

Line

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

RESILIENT FLOORING


1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested inaccordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253., Class 1.

2. Thickness: 4.0 mm.3. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by SCS Floorscore: www.scscertified.com.4. Manufacturers:

a. Altro Safety Floors: www.altrofloors.com; Style: Atlas 40.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

5. Color:a. RSF-5: Anvil 4094.

D. Linoleum Sheet Flooring: Homogeneous wear layer bonded to backing, with color and patternthrough wear layer thickness.1. Manufacturers:

a. Forbo Flooring, Inc: www.forboflooringna.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F2034, Type corresponding to type specified.3. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.4. Backing: Jute fabric.5. Thickness: 0.080 inch, minimum, excluding backing.6. Seams: Heat welded.7. Pattern: Marbleized.8. Color: As indicated.

a. RSF-6: Real, Graphite 3048.b. RSF-8: Fresco, Red Copper 3870.

E. Welding Rod: Solid bead in material compatible with flooring, produced by flooringmanufacturer for heat welding seams, and in color matching field color.

2.02 TILE FLOORING

A. Vinyl Tile (LVT): Printed film type, with transparent or translucent wear layer.1. Manufacturers:

a. Patcraft: www.patcraft.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1700, of Class corresponding to typespecified.


4. Plank Tile Size: 7 by 48 inch.5. Total Thickness: 0.197 inch.6. Color: As indicated.

a. LVT-1: Patcraft, Crossover 1439V, Haze 00590.b. LVT-2: Patcraft, Crossover 1439V, Nightfall 00500.

2.03 STAIR COVERING

A. Stair Nosings: 3 inch horizontal return, 2 inch vertical return, full width of stair tread in onepiece.1. Manufacturers:

a. Basis of Design: Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company; RCN-XX-B: www.johnsonite.com/#sle.

b. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com/#sle.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Material: Vinyl.3. Nominal Thickness: 0.125 inch.4. Texture: Ribbed.5. Color: To match rubber base.

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

(FIELD COLOR)

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

(ACCENT COLOR)

MelissaH

Line

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

00500

MelissaH

Line

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

00590

MelissaH

Cloud

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

RESILIENT FLOORING


2.04 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove.1. Manufacturers:

a. Basis of Design: Johnsonite, a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com.b. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Height: 4 inch.3. Thickness: 0.125 inch.4. Finish: Satin.5. Length: Roll.6. Color: Burnt Umber 63.7. Accessories: Premolded external corners and internal corners.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.

B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seam Sealer: Waterproof; types recommended by flooringmanufacturer.

C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.

D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks thatmight telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilientflooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.2. Obtain instructions from Architect regarding use of moisture mitigation system, per 01

2200 - Unit Prices.

D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.

B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and otherdefects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.

C. Prohibit traffic until filler is fully cured.

D. Clean substrate.

E. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through" or interference with adhesion by substancesthat cannot be removed.


A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.

D. Fit joints and butt seams tightly.

E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.

RESILIENT FLOORING


F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminateflooring under centerline of door.

G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and whereindicated.

H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to producetight joints.

I. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers, maintaining floor pattern.

J. At movable partitions, install flooring under partitions without interrupting floor pattern.

3.04 INSTALLATION - SHEET FLOORING

A. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimumnumber of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns atseams.

B. Minimal seams in bathrooms, kitchens, toilet rooms, and custodial closets.

C. Cut sheet at seams in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Seal seams by heat welding.

E. Coved Base: Install as detailed on drawings, using coved base filler as backing at floor to walljunction. Extend sheet flooring vertically to height indicated, and cover top edge with metal capstrip. Required at bathrooms, kitchens, toilet rooms and custodial closets.

3.05 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT WAINSCOT

A. Install flooring with joints and seams perpendicular to the floor. Use the minimum number ofseams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns at seams.

B. Cut sheet seams in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Seal seams by heat welding.

3.06 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING

A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unlessotherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install plank tile with a random offset of at least 6 inches from adjacent rows.

3.07 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE

A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.

B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, usepremolded units.

C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.08 INSTALLATION - STAIR COVERINGS

A. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely.

3.09 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

I'd like to add an anodized 'j-mold' to cap edge of all linoleum wainscot

MelissaH

Cloud

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

PERFORMING ARTS SPECIALTY FLOORS


SECTION 09 65 51


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. (SFF-1) Sprung flooring system, wood construction, for theater stage environment.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete for concrete floor slabs

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wood sports-floor assemblies.

1. For installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.

2. For field-applied finishes, including printed statement of VOC content.

B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details including location and layout of floor assembly and accessories. Include expansion provisions and trim details.

C. Selection Samples: Manufacturer's color charts showing colors and glosses available for the following:

1. Resilient wall base.

2. Floor finish.

D. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MRc4.1 and Credit MRc4.2: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a) Include statement indicating material costs for each product having

recycled content. b) Use LEED Material Content Form.

2. Product Data for Credit MRc5.1 and Credit MRc5.2: For products and materials with regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. a) Include statement indicating material cost for each regional material and

the fraction by weight that is considered regional. b) The extraction point for recycled materials is the location of the raw

material prior to the manufacturing of the final building product (recycling facility, scrap yard, depository, stockpile, or any other location where the material was collected and packaged for market purchase prior to manufacturing.)

c) Use LEED Material Content Form

3. Product Data for Credit EQc4.1: For adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (inside the waterproofing system), including printed statement of VOC content. a) Use LEED Low-Emitting Materials form.

4. Product Data for Credit EQc4.3: For flooring systems used on the interior of the building (inside the waterproofing system), indicating that products and materials comply with the LEED requirements a) Use LEED Low-Emitting Materials form.

MelissaH

Cloud+

MelissaH

Cloud+

should we call this Auditorium?



E. Mockup: Provide a 3’ x 3’ mockup of SFF-1 assemblies for review, including the caulked and painted hardboard surface abutments, upper floor, finish floor, building paper, sleepers and pads.

F. Qualification Data: Installer shall provide documentation of sufficient experience providing site-built sprung wood stage floors similar to the system specified herein. Substantial experience with sports floors is not sufficient.

G. Maintenance Data: For assemblies and finish systems to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Employ an installer who is regularly engaged in the installation and finishing of the type of floor specified. Installer shall have successfully completed similar installations and have at least five years’ experience. If requested, installer shall provide a list of completed projects the name of the owner, a contact person, and a telephone.

B. Pre-approved Stage Floor Fabricator / Installers are:

1. A-Game Courts – Gervais, OR

2. Soriano Floor Finishing – Boise, ID

3. Brandsen Hardwood Floors – Portland, OR

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver materials to stage only when stage is clean, dry and protected from the weather. Place in an area to allow for inspection. Store all materials for a long enough period to allow all materials to acclimate to room temperature and humidity. Spread and separate materials to allow thorough acclimation. Do not stack in concentrated amounts.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with installation of floor until stage has been enclosed and the approximate humidity and temperature of the stage has been achieved.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Contractor and installer shall submit a warranty agreeing to repair or replace the floors or any of their failing component parts for a period of two years after the date of Substantial Completion if the floor: shrinks, warps, peels, deteriorates excessively, experiences paint failure or in which voids in the vinyl, hardwood, plywood or hardboard appear. Said warranty shall not include normal wear and tear or demonstrable abuse.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 (SFF-1) STAGE FLOOR MATERIALS

A. SFF-1 flooring system shall be completely site-built using the materials and assembly methods defined herein. Pre-fabricated sports or dance floor systems are not acceptable.

B. Vapor Barrier: ASTM D 4397, polyethylene sheet, 6 mils minimum thickness.

C. Pads: Acceptable kinetic pads shall be one of the following: 1. Action Floors, AirTech II pad, 3/8 inch thick, 2.25 inch x 3.0 inch, 50 durometer 2. Connor Duracushion pad, 3/8 inch thick, 2.25 inch x 3.0 inch, 50 durometer 3. Mason “Mini-SuperW” Series, 3/8” thick, 2 inch x 2 inch, 50 durometer 4. Adhere to bottom face of sleeper, with spacing not greater than 16 inches o.c., by

means of permanent construction adhesive rated for bonding neoprene to wood or 4 heavy staples, per pad manufacturer’s best method recommendation. Support portion of pad shall be not less than 2” x 2”.



D. Sleepers: 2 x 3 kiln-dried (KD) Douglas Fir, #1 or BTR, solid, true and flat without defects. Minimum length per segment shall be 96”, and ends shall be rabbeted 50% sleeper height by 4” of sleeper end run for overlap and joining. SPF or engineered multi-layer OSB sleepers are not acceptable.

E. Plywood: All plywood APA standards with backstamp indicating grade mark on back side. Specifically not allowed are sheets with luan or mahogany face and inner plys.

F. Fasteners: Use Philips head corrosion resistant deck screws (black) for attachment of sub-floor to sleepers and upper floor/finish floor sandwich to sub-floor. Do not use nails or staples. Do not glue sub-floor to sleepers. Do not glue upper floor to sub-floor. Finish Floor shall be glued and screwed to upper floor.

G. Adhesive: Type recommended by installer to suit application, suitable to develop not less than 150 PSI slip and/or lift resistance between Finish Floor and Upper Floor, when roller applied evenly and pressure set for not less than 24 hours. 1. DAP Weldwood, UPC #25330, #25332 or #25336 or functional equivalent. 2. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 3. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that

comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. b. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

H. Sub-Floor: 3/4" CDX 24/48. Best condition, no voids, no water or storage damage.

I. Building Paper: 30 lb. building paper.

J. Upper Floor: 3/4 inch AC exterior, Douglas Fir, No. 1. Provide all sheets from same manufacturer and same lot, fully dried and flat. Install with “A” side up. No voids are allowed in face or interior. Best condition, with no water or storage damage.

K. Finish Floor: 1/4 inch thick tempered hardboard, S2S, wet process, Signature Series “Industrial Premium Hardboard” as manufactured by Decorative Panels, Inc. of Ohio. Contractor shall confirm that the hardboard supplied shall have exceptionally high resistance to surface fiber failure when painted. Determination of suitability shall be established via a “Tape Test”. 1. Tape Test shall consist of burnishing a strip of 2” wide x 12” long Vinyl Dance Floor

tape (Tapeworks #AT07 or equal) onto a sample piece of hardboard after light sanding and painting of 3 coats of the paint specified herein. Tape shall be left in place for 3 days, then quickly removed. A successful test will result in no paint or surface fibers adhering to the tape and no visible disruption to the paint or the floor.

2. Ship sample to Theater Consultant for Tape Test. 3. Cost of shipping shall be included by Contractor.

L. Finish: Sherwin-Williams “ArmorSeal TreadPlex" Color: Black. 1. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:

a. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:

b. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings.

c. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

d. Sheen shall have gloss level NO higher than minimal light reflection or eggshell. True ‘flat’ is not acceptable.



M. Rubber Base: Rubber, 4 inches high, 3 inch base, Johnson "Vent-Cove" or approved, type B-2 per Finish Legend in Section 09 00 01. Provide outside corners where applicable. 1. Color: Black.

N. Threshold/Expansion Joint: Balco #1120 gymnasium floor cover, vinyl insert color black. CRITICAL NOTE: concrete pour at expansion joint requires slight slab recess so that offstage portion of expansion joint is flush with concrete and with upper face of wood floor. Advance coordination is required.

2.02 (SFF-1) LEXAN LIGHT SLOT AND COVER

A. At stage edge, provide a regressed slot as shown in detail on “A” series drawings for a stage edge warning light. Light fixture is provided under Division 26. Edge of slot shall have holes drilled at 8” o.c. to allow for heat expansion of air. Interior surfaces of slot shall be finished with the black stage paint, same coverage and coats as floor surface.

B. After installation of light fixture (under Division 26), provide a ¼” thick, full width Lexan strip shield (as shown on ‘A’ and ‘TL’ series drawings) to cover the stage edge warning light. ½ of the shield (the edge toward the audience) shall be painted black to negate glare toward audience. Prior to painting, the top side of the entire Lexan strip shall be lightly scuff sanded to remove all reflective sheen, and to make surface more amenable to being painted. Attachment to floor slot shall be via countersunk wood screws at not more than 16” o.c. Lexan strip shield shall be fully flush with surface of stage floor.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

3.01 SFF-1 STAGE FLOOR INSTALLATION

A. Install as shown and detailed on drawings. Stage area shall have been heated, dried out and normal temperature and humidity conditions shall have been in effect for at least one month. If moisture remains present, then work on the floor shall be stopped and remedies made. Transitions from finish floor to concrete floor shall be level, smooth and even; refer to details. 1. Concrete Slab: Slab shall be depressed, level, trowel smooth, clean, free from all

moisture. In addition to any other vapor barriers under the slab, lay down a vapor barrier on top of the slab.

2. Sleepers: Lay in direction shown at 16 inches on center across stage. Do not attach (nail or glue) to concrete. Shim under neoprene pads so top of sleeper is level and at correct elevation with reference to adjacent concrete floor. Also provide at perimeter of stage and around floor pockets and access holes and at unsupported edges of sub-floor.

3. Sub-Floor: Lay down with face grain perpendicular to sleepers. Screw to sleepers, 16 inches o.c. on the perimeter and in the interior shown, with countersunk Philips head (or Reed & Prince). Top of screw heads shall be 1/32” below the top surface of the sub-floor. Leave expansion space at all perimeters, approximately 3/4 inch. Clean top surface of sub-floor; vacuum clean as needed to be free of debris.

4. Building Paper: Lay down over sub-floor. Do not overlap edges of adjacent runs or ends of paper. In all cases, butt joint the paper. Staple tight to floor for flatness without buckling. Staples shall be tight to paper and paper tight to subfloor. Top of paper shall be free of dirt and other construction debris. Vacuum clean.

5. Upper Floor: Prior to laying down in place, attach Finish Floor to top side of Upper Floor by means appropriate adhesive, uniformly roller-applied in adequate quantity and distribution without air pockets, gaps or lumps, sufficient to provide total bonding between the two layers. Stack in a safe place on the stage, under pressure, to allow glue to dry. Once glue is dried and cured, trim glue-combined sandwich of Upper Floor and Finish Floor so that side edges of hardboard and edges of plywood upper floor are exactly aligned and square in all directions. Drill and countersink screw holes along edges and interior as shown in “A” series drawing detail, before lay-down. Underside



of Upper Floor/Finish Floor sandwich shall be cleared of excess material and splinters as a result of hole drilling. Ease all top edges of Finish Floor portion of sandwich, in order to remove sharp corner of material.

6. Edge easing shall be approximately 1/16 inch chamfer. Lay down upper floor sandwich assembly on a rotated 90 degree pattern with 24” minimum offset from joints at sub-floor in both directions, so that no upper floor seam aligns with the lower floor seams.

7. Allow for expansion space at all perimeters. Upper Floor / Finish Floor sandwich assembly panels shall be set in place aligned and set with ZERO gap between adjacent panels, regardless of APA standard recommendations. Screw upper floor sandwich assembly panels to sub-floor with screws on 12 inch centers along edge of each panel, across field of each panel and at corners, with countersunk screws. Screws at corners and along edges shall be not more than 1” from edges of panels. Install tops of screw heads at 1/32” below finished surface. Provide a smooth, level, transition from top of one sheet to the next. Where uneven, shim underneath as needed.

8. Finish: Leave countersunk screw heads exposed; do not fill. Lightly disk sand to slightly roughen tempered hardboard enough to improve paint adhesion profile, without creating burrs, then clean, prepare and paint finish floor with three coats of flat black, self-priming stage floor paint (as specified herein). Ensure that prime and finish coats are allowed to freely flow down into gap between adjacent Upper Floor / Finish Floor panels, effectively acting as a seal to prevent moisture from future maintenance wet-mopping from reaching edges of Upper Floor / Finish Floor sandwich panel, or subfloor panel below.

9. Rubber Base: Review extent and details prior to placement. Adhere in place. Use four foot lengths or longer. Use outside corners where required. Install inside corners neatly mitered from straight lengths. Terminate all straight lengths with portion cut from outside corner piece. Use at all locations where stage floor intercepts a wall.

10. Expansion Joint: Install expansion joint threshold in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions observing all manufacturer's recommendations. Use anywhere the stage floor meets an adjoining floor. Threshold must be flush with both sides of floor joint. No bumps or dips allowed.

11. Caulking: Any unsealed gaps between finish floor sections of stage floor or devices cut into stage floor, shall be infilled flush with black, 50-year rated, acrylic, paintable caulk, then painted over with black stage floor paint. Caulk application shall not restrict removal of any device plate, or cause need to re-apply caulk if device plate is removed and reinstalled.

12. Touch-up: After floor has been completed, and area has fully dried, provide additional caulking (as specified in previous paragraph) where gaps have expanded and matching paint touch-up for final finish.

13. Spares: Provide (1) spare 5 gallon container of black stage floor paint, marked as “Original Stage Floor Paint” and (1) spare tube of original black caulk, marked as “Original Stage Floor Caulk”, with ½” tall letters from a red enamel paint pen. Deliver to Owner with instructions to store near the stage. Delivery shall take place during training session.

3.02 OTHER TRADES

A. Cooperate and assist other trades doing work around the stage floor, including, but not limited to the electrician installing floor pockets and access holes.

3.03 QUALITY OF WORK

A. All work shall be carried out as described and in good order. Stage floor assembly shall be flat within 1/8 inch vertical across a 10’-0” radius area at all points on stage. Stage shall be same elevation as adjacent floor on opposite side of threshold, within 1/16 inch vertical. Floor deflection and springback shall comply with national standards, including PLASA and ANSI standards for performing arts sprung floors.



3.04 TRAINING

A. Provide (3) one-hour sessions of training and familiarization to Owner’s designated performing arts curriculum and custodial staff, describing the materials and methods used to construct the stage floor, drama classroom and dance studio floors, and the basic features of each that affect the users.

B. During the training session, instruct the owner on proper cleaning of each type of performance floor, using a damp-mop process.

C. During the training session, instruct the Owner’s representatives on how to remove and replace a damaged or worn elements of each performance floor type.

D. A sample “script” for the items covered during training, and left behind as part of the Closeout Documents, is provided as an example at the end of this specification section.

3.05 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS

A. As per Division 0, but with additional requirements as defined herein.

B. Provide manuals for each of the floor systems, with documentation of materials used, updated as-built versions of original submittals, maintenance instructions and warranty.

C. Include as part of the O & M manuals, an informational document which repeats in detail, the instructional information presented during training for Floor Construction, Floor Usage and Floor Maintenance. See 3.04 A, B, C and D above.

END OF SECTION

RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING


SECTION 09 6566


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Rubber sheet flooring, adhesively installed.

B. Vinyl sheet flooring, adhesively installed.

C. Painted game lines.

D. Accessories.


A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors.

B. Section 03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Moisture mitigation system.


A. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and ThermoplasticElastomers--Tension; 2006a (Reapproved 2015a).

B. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2015.

C. ASTM F2772 - Standard Specification for Athletic Performance Properties of Indoor SportsFloor Systems; 2011.

D. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data sheets for products specified.

C. Shop Drawings: Fabrication and installation details, and layout, colors, and widths of gamelines and equipment locations.

D. Selection Samples: Manufacturer's color charts for flooring materials specified and game linepaints, indicating full range of colors and textures available.

E. Verification Samples: Actual flooring material specified, not less than 12 inch square, mountedon solid backing.1. Include samples of game lines, illustrating colors selected.

F. Test Reports: Submit test reports showing compliance with ASTM F2772.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer certified in writing by the flooring manufacturerto be qualified for installation of specified flooring system.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing andinspections of the type specified in this section.


A. Deliver materials to project site in unopened containers clearly labeled with manufacturer'sname and identification of contents.

B. Store materials in dry and clean location until needed for installation. During installation, handlein a manner that will prevent marring and soiling of finished surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PREFORMED ATHLETIC FLOORING

A. Rubber Sheet Flooring: Prefabricated resilient rubber flooring, calendered and vulcanized.1. Thickness: Minimum 0.394 inch (10mm).



2. Sheet Width: Minimum 73 inches.3. Tensile Strength: Minimum 600 psi, per ASTM D412.4. Durometer Hardness, Type A: Minimum of 75, when tested in accordance with ASTM

D2240.5. Color: As indicated.

a. RSF-1: Solid Black G790.6. Surface Texture: Hammered.7. Manufacturers:

a. Basis of Design: Mondo Sport & Flooring; Product Ramflex:www.mondoworldwide.com.


B. Rubber Sheet Flooring: Prefabricated resilient rubber flooring, calendered and vulcanized.1. Thickness: Minimum 0.236 inch (6mm).2. Sheet width: 73 inches.3. Tensile Strength: Minimum 650 psi, per ASTM D412.4. Durometer Hardness, Type A: Minimum of 75, when tested in accordance with ASTM

D2240.5. Color: As indicated.

a. RSF-3: Grey G707.6. Surface Texture: Hammered.7. Manufacturers:

a. Basis of Design: Mondo Sport & Flooring; Product Ramflex:www.mondoworldwide.com.

C. Rubber Sheet Flooring: Prefabricated resilient rubber flooring, calendered and vulcanized.1. Thickness: Minimum 0.157 (4mm).2. Sheet width: 73 inches.3. Tensile Strength: Minimum 600 psi, per ASTM D412.4. Durometer Hardness of wear layer, Type A: Minimum of 70, when tested in accordance

with ASTM D2240.5. Color: As indicated:

a. RSF-4: Grey.6. Surface Texture: Hammered.7. Manufacturers:

a. Basis of Design: Mondo Sport & Flooring; Product Reflex HP:www.mondoworldwide.com.


2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Leveling Compound: Latex-modified cement formulation as recommended by flooringmanufacturer for substrate conditions.

B. Flooring Adhesive: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for conditions detrimental to installation of athletic flooring. Proceed withinstallation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks thatmight telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of athletic flooring to substrate.

C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilientflooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.



2. Obtain instructions from Architect regarding use of moisture mitigation system, per 012200 - Unit Prices.

3.02 PREPARATION


B. Concrete: Use leveling compound as necessary to achieve substrate flatness of plus or minus1/8 inch within 10 ft radius.

C. Remove coatings that are incompatible with flooring adhesives, using methods recommendedby flooring manufacturer.

D. Broom clean areas to receive athletic flooring immediately before beginning installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION


B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Resilient Sheet Flooring:1. Unroll flooring and allow to relax before beginning installation.2. Mix adhesive thoroughly and apply to substrate with notched trowel. Roll flooring into fresh

adhesive, overlapping end seams and double cutting, butting factory edges andcompression fitting.

3. Roll entire flooring surface with steel roller to assure adhesion to substrate and eliminateair bubbles.

4. Immediately remove any adhesive from flooring surface, using chemical recommended byflooring manufacturer.

5. Weld seams using techniques and equipment recommended by manufacturer.6. Lay out game lines using tape and taping machine approved by flooring manufacturer.

Apply game line paint with roller, and allow to dry before removing tape.7. Apply transparent top coat over flooring if recommended by manufacturer, to achieve a

uniform finished appearance.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean flooring using methods recommended by manufacturer.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished athletic flooring from construction traffic to ensure that it is without damageupon Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING


SECTION 09 6613


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Cast-in-place terrazzo floor.

B. Precast Portland cement terrazzo units.


A. Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs: Formed steel stair pans.

B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between terrazzo work and adjacentconstruction and fixtures.


A. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar;2012 (Revised).

B. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded WireReinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017.

C. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016.

D. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016.

E. NTMA (SPECS) - NTMA Terrazzo Specifications; current edition located at www.ntma.com.



with related work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for control joint strips and sealer; include printed copy of currentNTMA recommendations for the type of terrazzo specified.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate control joint layout and details of adjacent components.

D. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating color, chip size and variation, chipgradation, mortar color, and typical divider strip.1. Architect may request an additional sample tile, if first sample is not approved.

E. Cleaning and Maintenance Data: Include procedures for stain removal, stripping, and sealing.


A. Perform work in accordance with NTMA recommendations as posted on their web site atwww.ntma.com.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with notfewer than three years of documented experience.

1.07 MOCK-UP

A. Construct mock-up of terrazzo flooring illustrating appearance of finished work. Size mock-upto be not less than 3 by 3 feet.

B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


A. Do not install terrazzo when temperature is below 50 degrees F or above 90 degrees F.

B. Maintain temperature within specified range 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours afterinstallation of terrazzo.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO FLOORING

A. Materials:1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I Normal; white color for topping mix;

modified to NTMA higher compressive strength requirements; obtained from single source.2. Color Pigments For Topping: Non-fading mineral type, alkali-resistant.3. Terrazzo Sand: ASTM C33/C33M, fine aggregates.4. Water: Potable.5. Surface Aggregate: Marble, free of deleterious or foreign matter.

B. Accessories:1. Underbed Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A1064M; 2 by 2 inch, 18/18 wire,

galvanized.2. Non-Slip Inserts: Provide channel-shaped inserts filled with a mixture of resin and fine,

abrasive aggregate.a. Color: Architect to choose from manufacturer's full range.

3. Cleaner: Neutralizing liquid type, pH of 7 to 10. 4. Sealer: Colorless, non-yellowing, penetrating liquid type, pH of 7 to 10; not detrimental to

terrazzo components.

2.02 PRECAST PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO UNITS

A. Manufacturers:1. Tectura Designs, a division of Wausau Tile Inc; Precast Cement Terrazzo:

www.tecturadesigns.com/#sle.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Precast Portland Cement Terrazzo Units: Portland cement matrix, ASTM C150/C150M;cleaned and graded aggregate sized in accordance with NTMA gradation standards.1. Fabricate to sizes and profiles shown on drawings.2. Setting Material: Latex Portland cement mortar, ANSI A118.4.3. Anchors and Reinforcement for Precast Units: As recommended by manufacturer for type

of installation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Do not begin terrazzo work until concrete substrate has cured 28 days, minimum, and has driedto a maximum moisture content of 12 percent.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of foreign matter.

B. Remove loose or flaking concrete and repair to form sound, solid substrate.

C. Remove surface water and thoroughly brush in neat cement slurry bond coat.

3.03 APPLICATION - CAST-IN-PLACE STAIRS

A. Terrazzo Stairs and Landings on Concrete: Minimum 5/8 inch topping on underbed bonded totreads and minimum 3/8 inch topping on underbed bonded to risers. Total minimum thicknessof 1-1/2 inches for treads and 1 inch for risers.

3.04 INSTALLATION - PRECAST PORTLAND CEMENT TERRAZZO UNITS

A. Anchor precast units as shown on drawings.

B. Install precast units using specified setting material.

3.05 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Flat Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.



3.06 CLEANING

A. Scrub and clean terrazzo surfaces with cleaner in accordance with NTMA instructions. Let dry.

B. Seal and polish surfaces in accordance with NTMA instructions.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit construction traffic over finished terrazzo surfaces.

END OF SECTION

TILE CARPETING


SECTION 09 6813

TILE CARPETING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Carpet tile, fully adhered.


A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concreteslabs and floors.

B. Section 09 6816 - Sheet Carpeting: Broadloom carpet.


A. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile FloorCovering Materials; 2016.

B. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Usinga Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.

C. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;2011.

D. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet; 2015.

E. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Testing Program - Certified Products; www.carpet-rug.org;current edition.

F. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Usinga Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.



with related work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performancecharacteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints.

D. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet colorselected.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditionsrequiring special attention.

F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,and suggested schedule for cleaning.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Carpet Tiles: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed of each color and pattern

installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet tile with minimum three yearsdocumented experience and approved by carpet tile manufacturer.


A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.

MelissaH

Cloud+

MelissaH

Cloud+

HOW MUCH OVERAGE ARE WE ASKING FOR?

TILE CARPETING


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Tile Carpeting:1. Bentley: www.bentleymills.com (Alternate No. 5a).2. Patcraft: www.patcraft.com (Alternate No. 5b)3. Tandus Centiva: www.tandus-centiva.com (Alternate 5c).4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS (ALTERNATE NO. 5A)

A. Tile Carpeting, Type CPT-3: Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot.1. Basis of Design: Bentley, Troubadour 4TOT5, Rover 400337..2. Tile Size: 18 by 36 inch, nominal.3. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with

ASTM E648 or NFPA 253.4. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test").5. VOC Content: Provide CRI (GLP) certified product; in lieu of labeling, independent test

report showing compliance is acceptable.6. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity.7. Gage: 1/12 inch.8. Stitches: 11.2 per inch.9. Backing: N.10. Total Weight: 80 oz/sq yd.11. Installation Method: Herringbone.

B. Tile Carpeting, Type CPT-4: Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot.1. Basis of Design: Bentley, Burnish 4BRT8, Leo Carillo 402924.2. Tile Size: 18 by 36 inch, nominal.3. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with


report showing compliance is acceptable.6. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity.7. Gage: 1/12 inch.8. Stitches: 10 per inch.9. Backing: .10. Total Weight: 75 oz/sq yd.11. Installation Method: Herringbone.

2.03 MATERIALS (ALTERNATE NO. 5B)

A. Tile Carpeting, Type CPT-3: Multi-Level Pattern Loop, manufactured in one color dye lot.1. Basis of Design: Patcraft, Patina I0511, Urban Study 590.2. Tile Size: 12 by 48 inch, nominal.3. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with


report showing compliance is acceptable.6. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity.7. Gage: 1/10 inch.8. Stitches: 8.5 per inch.9. Pile Weight: 23 oz/sq yd.10. Density Factor: 9,409 kilotex.11. Backing: .12. Installation Method: Brick.

TILE CARPETING


B. Tile Carpeting, Type CPT-4: Multi-Level Pattern Loop, manufactured in one color dye lot.1. Basis of Design: Patcraft, Rise I0465, Point 599.2. Tile Size: 12 by 48 inch, nominal.3. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with


report showing compliance is acceptable.6. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity.7. Gage: 1/10 inch.8. Stitches: 10 per inch.9. Pile Weight: 15 oz/sq yd.10. Density Factor: 8,060 kilotex.11. Backing: .12. Installation Method: Brick.

2.04 MATERIALS (ALTERNATE NO. 5C)

A. Tile Carpeting, Type CPT-3: Patterned Loop, manufactured in one color dye lot.1. Basis of Design: Tandus.2. Tile Size: 18 by 36 inch, nominal.3. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with


report showing compliance is acceptable.6. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity.7. Gage: 5/64 inch.8. Stitches: 10 per inch.9. Pile Weight: 21 oz/sq yd.10. Backing: .11. Installation Method: .

B. Tile Carpeting, Type CPT-4: Patterned Loop, manufactured in one color dye lot.1. Basis of Design: Tandus.2. Tile Size: 18 by 36 inch, nominal.3. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with


report showing compliance is acceptable.6. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity.7. Gage: 5/64 inch.8. Stitches: 10 per inch.9. Pile Weight: 21 oz/sq yd.10. Backing: .11. Installation Method: .

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.

B. Edge Strips: Embossed aluminum, clear anodized color.

C. Adhesives:

D. Carpet Tile Adhesive: Recommended by carpet tile manufacturer; releasable type.

TILE CARPETING


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive carpet tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive carpet tile.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding ofadhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.

D. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooringinstallation by testing for moisture and pH.1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATION


B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, andother defects with sub-floor filler.

C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler iscured.

D. Vacuum clean substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATION


B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.

D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.

E. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.

F. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.

G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.

H. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.

B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION

SHEET CARPETING


SECTION 09 6816

SHEET CARPETING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Carpet, direct-glued.

B. Accessories.


A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concreteslabs and floors to receive adhesive-applied carpet.

B. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring: Stair nosings.

C. Section 09 6813 - Tile Carpeting.


A. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile FloorCovering Materials; 2016.

B. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Usinga Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.

C. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet; 2015.

D. CRI (GL) - Green Label Testing Program - Certified Products; Current Edition.

E. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Testing Program - Certified Products; www.carpet-rug.org;current edition.

F. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Usinga Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2015.



with related work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performancecharacteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile andpattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpetand cushion material specified.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,and suggested schedule for cleaning.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional requirements.2. Extra Carpet: 500 sq ft of each type, color, and pattern installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three yearsdocumented experience.

MelissaH

Cloud+

MelissaH

Cloud+

HOW MUCH OVERAGE ARE WE ASKING FOR?

SHEET CARPETING



A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.

B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during and 24 hoursafter installation.

C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carpet:1. Mohawk: www.mohawkflooring.com (Alternate 5a).2. Bentley: www.bentleymills.com (Alternate 5a).3. Patcraft: www.patcraft.com (Alternate 5b).4. Tandus Centiva: www.tandus-centiva.com (Alternate 5c).5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 CARPET (ALTERNATE 5A)

A. Carpet, Type CPT-1: Tufted, nylon.1. Basis of Design: Mohawk, 50311-NO739, 12P3637V.2. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with


report showing compliance is acceptable.5. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity (RH).6. Gage: 1/12 inch.7. Stitches: 11 per inch.8. Density Factor: 7,534 kilotex.9. Backing: Unibond Plus On Guard.

B. Carpet, Type CPT-2: Tufted, nylon.1. Basis of Design: Bentley, Burnish 4BRT8, Leo Carillo 402924.2. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with


report showing compliance is acceptable.5. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity (RH).6. Gage: 1/12 inch.7. Stitches: 10 per inch.8. Backing:.

2.03 CARPET (ALTERNATE 5B)

A. Carpet, Type CPT-1: Tufted, nylon.1. Basis of Design: Patcraft, Z382G-0, Point.2. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with


report showing compliance is acceptable.5. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity (RH).6. Gage: ____ inch.7. Stitches: __ per inch.8. Backing: .

B. Carpet, Type CPT-2: Tufted, nylon.

MelissaH

Line

MelissaH

Cloud+

MelissaH

Cloud+

Z198P-0

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

SHEET CARPETING


1. Basis of Design: Bentley, Burnish 4BRT8, Leo Carillo 402924.2. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with


report showing compliance is acceptable.5. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity (RH).6. Gage: ____ inch.7. Stitches: __ per inch.8. Backing:.

2.04 CARPET (ALTERNATE 5C)

A. Carpet, Type CPT-1: Tufted, nylon.1. Basis of Design: Tandus, Haywire 04364, Steel Drums 18407.2. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with


report showing compliance is acceptable.5. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity (RH).6. Gage: 5/64 inch.7. Stitches: 10 per inch.8. Backing: .

B. Carpet, Type CPT-2: Tufted, nylon.1. Basis of Design: Tandus.2. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with


report showing compliance is acceptable.5. Maximum Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity (RH).6. Gage: ____ inch.7. Stitches: __ per inch.8. Backing:.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B. Stair Nosings: Se Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring.

C. Moldings and Edge Strips: Embossed aluminum, clear anodized color.

D. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by carpet manufacturer.

E. Carpet Adhesive: Recommended by carpet manufacturer; releasable type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type ofwork and are ready to receive carpet.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive carpet.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding ofadhesives to sub floor surfaces.

D. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooringinstallation by testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH).

MelissaH

Line

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

PATCRAFT, Z199P-0

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

SHEET CARPETING


1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATION


B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, andother defects with sub-floor filler.

C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler iscured.

D. Clean substrate.



B. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104(Commercial).

C. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.

D. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings.1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main

traffic.2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent

pieces.4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.

E. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.

3.04 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET

A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately.

B. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficientopen time, press carpet into adhesive.

C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seamstraight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.

D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.

E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.

B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION

WALL COVERINGS


SECTION 09 7200

WALL COVERINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wall covering.


A. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Aluminum trim at wall covering terminations.

B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Preparation and priming of substrate surfaces.


A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2016.

B. ASTM F793/F793M - Standard Classification of Wall Coverings by Use Characteristics; 2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on wall covering and adhesive.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations with seaming layout.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of wall covering, 8 by 10 inch in size illustrating color, finish, andtexture.


F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of covered surfaces.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Wall Covering Materials: 25 linear feet of each color and pattern of wall covering;

store where directed.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and withat least three years of documented experience.

1.06 MOCK-UP

A. Provide panel, 8 feet wide, full height, illustrating installed wall covering and joint seamingtechnique.

B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.


A. Inspect roll materials at arrival on site, to verify acceptability.

B. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures.

C. Do not store roll goods on end.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer's limited five-year written warranty against manufacturing defects.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperatureranges required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer.

B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wallcovering.

WALL COVERINGS


C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WALL COVERINGS

A. General Requirements:1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50,

maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. Wall Covering (VWC): Type II, Medium Duty, conforming to the following:1. Total Weight: 20 oz/sq yd.2. Manufacturers:

a. Koroseal: www.koroseal.com.b. Colour & Design: colouranddesign.com.c. De Novo: www.denovowall.com.d. Tri-Kes: www.tri-kes.com.e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Wall Covering (VWC): Wall Protection, conforming to the following:1. Finish: Stain and abrasion resistant.2. Total Weight: 35 oz/sq yd.3. Roll Width: 52 inches.4. Manufacturers:

a. Wolf Gordon, Rampart Wall Protection: www.wolfgordon.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Wall Covering (TB): Resilient surface material, conforming to the following:1. Total Thickness: 6 mm ( 1/4 inch).2. Manufacturers:

a. Koroseal, Walltalkers Tac-wall: www.koroseal.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate.

F. Termination Trim: Aluminum j-mold and h-mold, anodized, clear, per 09 2116 - Gypsum BoardAssemblies.

G. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatiblewith substrate.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform torequirements of the wall covering manufacturer.

B. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet nor vary at arate greater than 1/16 inch/ft.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks in substrate and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth.

B. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

C. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Maintain ambient temperature within the building at not less than 68 degrees Fahrenheit (20degrees Celsius) for a minimum of seventy-two hours prior to beginning of installation.1. Do not install tackable wallcovering until the space is enclosed and weatherproof.2. Do not install tackable wallcovering until temperature is stabilized and permanent lighting is

in place.

WALL COVERINGS


B. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Apply adhesive to wall surface immediately prior to application of wall covering.

D. Use wall covering in pattern sequence.

E. Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces.

F. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets andensure full bond to substrate surface.

G. Horizontal seams are not acceptable.

H. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners.

I. Install wall covering before installation of bases and items attached to or spaced slightly fromwall surface.

J. Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern sequence from roll.

K. Where wall covering tucks into reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply with contactadhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond.

L. Install termination trim.

M. Remove excess adhesive while wet from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe clean with dry cloth.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants.

B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit construction activities at or near finished wall covering areas.

3.06 SCHEDULES

A. VWC-1: Koroseal; Style: Galerie G222-09; Color: Portrait.

B. VWC-2: Colour & Design; Style: Obana CD2-OBA-38; Color: Mercury Glass.

C. VWC-3: Koroseal; Style: Galerie G222-91; Color: Poplar.

D. VWC-4: DeNovo; Style: Izzy DN2-IZY-03; Color: Ashwood.

E. VWC-5: DeNovo; Style: Shima Texture DN2-SMT-43; Color: Flax.

F. VWC-6: TriKes; Style: Suited SG2852; Color: Tweed.

G. VWC-7: Colour & Design; Style: Yoshi Glint CD2-YGT-11; Color: Anisette.

H. VWC-8: Wolf Gordon; Style: Rampart Quinault; Color: Charcoal GOH127421158.

I. VWC-9: Koroseal; Style: Custom.

J. VWC-10: Koroseal: Style: Custom.

K. VWC-11: Wolf Gordon; Style: Rampart Quinault; Color: Canvas QNT 5546.

L. TB-1: Koroseal; Style: Walltalkers Tac-wall; Color: Harbor 06.

M. TB-2: Koroseal; Style: Walltalkers Tac-wall; Color: Onyx 09.

N. TB-3: Koroseal; Style: Walltalkers Tac-wall; Color: Onyx 09 + Custom logo.

END OF SECTION

MelissaH

Line

heidi

Set to Completed

SOUND-ABSORBING WALL AND CEILING UNITS


SECTION 09 8430


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Sound-absorbing panels.

B. Sound-absorbing ceiling panels.

C. Sound-diffusing ceiling panels.

D. Bass traps.

E. Mounting accessories.


A. Section 09 2216 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Wall-mounting for bass traps.

B. Section 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling suspension system.


A. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficientsby the Reverberation Room Method; 2017.

B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2016.

C. ASTM E795 - Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound AbsorptionTests; 2016.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data sheets for products specified.

C. Shop Drawings: Fabrication and installation details, panel layout, and fabric orientation.

D. Verification Samples: Fabricated samples of each type of panel specified; 12 by 12 inch,showing construction, edge details, and fabric covering.

E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Panels: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed, but not less than one of each

type.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with not less than five years of experience inmanufacturing acoustical products similar to those specified.


A. Protect acoustical units from moisture during shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver infactory-wrapped bundles; do not open bundles until units are needed for installation.

B. Store units flat, in dry, well-ventilated space; do not stand on end.

C. Protect edges from damage.

1.07 MOCK-UP

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional mock-up requirements.

B. Construct mock-up of acoustical units at location as indicated by Architect.1. Minimum mock-up dimensions; 96 by 96 inches.2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOUND ABSORBING WALL PANELS

A. Manufacturers:1. F-Sorb; Acoustic Wall Panels : www.f-sorb.com.2. MDC Wallcoverings, Zintra Punto Acoustic Wall Panels: www.mdcwall.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. F-Sorb Acoustic Wall Panels (SAWP):1. Thickness: 1 inch.2. Panel Size: 48 by 96 inches.3. NRC, per ASTM C423: 0.70 minimum.4. Colors:

a. SAWP-1: Light Beige.b. SAWP-2: Grey.c. SAWP-3: Tan.

C. MDC Acoustic Wall Panels (SAWP):1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12 mm).2. Panel Sizes:

a. 2 feet by 2 feet.b. 2 feet by 4 feet.

3. Edge Detail: Square.4. NRC: 0.45 minimum.5. Colors:

a. SAWP-4: Slate

2.02 SOUND ABSORBING CEILING PANELS

A. Manufacturers:1. F-Sorb; Acoustic Wall Panels : www.f-sorb.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Sounds Absorbing Ceiling Panels (SACP):1. Thickness: 1 inch.2. Panel Size: 48 x 96 inches.3. NRC: 0.70 minimum.4. Colors:

a. SACP-1: Light Beige.b. SACP-2: Tan.

2.03 SOUND DIFFUSIVE CEILING PANELS

A. Manufacturers:1. MBI Products Company, Inc., Pyramid Diffuser: www.mbiproducts.com2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Sound Diffusive Ceiling Panels (SDCP):1. Thickness: 1/8 inch.2. Panel Size: 24 x 48 inches.3. NRC: 0.10 minimum.4. Color: White.

2.04 FABRIC-COVERED BASS TRAPS

A. Manufacturers:1. Vicoustic, Super Bass Extreme Premium: www.vicoustic.com.2. Real Acoustix, BassBox: www.realacoustix.com.3. RPG Acoustical Systems, Modex Corner: www.rpgacoustic.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Bass Boxes:

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

should we say see drawings for layout?

MelissaH

Cloud

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

FYI I'M LOOKING INTO A SHEET PRODUCT FOR THE CEILING MATERIAL ON THE BOTTOM OF THE BALCONY IN THE AUDITORIUM - THIS ISN'T CURRENTLY SPECIFIED ANYWHERE - WE ARE WAITING ON CONFIRMATION FROM THE THEATER CONSULTANT

MelissaH

Cloud



1. Performance: Provides low frequency absorption between 60 - 125 Hz.2. Color: Architect to select from Manufacturer's full range.3. Accessories: Provide mounting hardware or rubber feet as required for locations as

indicated on the drawings.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Tolerances: Fabricate to finished tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch for thickness, overalllength and width, and squareness from corner to corner.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Back-Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's standard accessories for concealed support,designed to allow panel removal:

B. Ceiling-Suspended Accessories: Manufacturer's standard accessories at locations as indicatedon each acoustical unit, sized appropriately for weight of acoustical unit.

C. Trim Moldings: Manufacturer's standard metal trim moldings for concealing panel joints; coloras selected from manufacturer's standards.

D. Panel Adhesive: Acceptable to acoustical panel manufacturer for application as indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for conditions detrimental to installation of acoustical units. Proceed withinstallation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical units in locations as indicated, following manufacturer's installationinstructions.

B. Align panels accurately, with edges plumb and top edges level. Scribe to fit accurately atadjoining work and penetrations.

C. Install acoustical units to construction tolerances of plus or minus 1/16 inch for the following:1. Plumb and level.2. Flatness.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean fabric facing upon completion of installation from dust and other foreign materials,following manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Provide protection of installed acoustical panels until Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired to satisfaction of the Architect.

END OF SECTION

EXTERIOR PAINTING


SECTION 09 9113

EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation.

B. Field application of paints, stains, and varnishes.

C. Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unlessotherwise indicated, including the following:

D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having

factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of

equipment.5. Non-metallic roofing and flashing.6. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, zinc, and lead.7. Floors, unless specifically indicated.8. Brick, glass unit masonry, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and

stucco.9. Glass.10. Concrete masonry units in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces.11. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.


A. Section 07 9100 - Water Repellants: Exterior sealed concrete and masonry surfaces.

B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.


A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;2016.

B. ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating; 2005(Reapproved 2012).

C. GS-11, Green Seal Standard for Paints and Coatings, Edition 3.1, 2013.

D. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; CurrentEdition, www.paintinfo.com.

E. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015.

F. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004).

G. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information foreach:1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category

(e.g. "alkyd enamel").2. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of

each system.

EXTERIOR PAINTING


C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustratingrange of colors available for each finishing product specified.1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.2. Where sheen is not specified, submit each color in each sheen available.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit data including material safety data sheets (MSDS), care andcleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and repair of painted and finished surfaces.

E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store

where directed.3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brandcode, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, andinstructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperatureranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing ofsubstrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

C. Do not apply exterior paint and finishes during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outsidethe humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Paints:1. Behr Process Corporation: www.behr.com/#sle.2. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.3. Parker Paint: www.brand.sherwin-williams.com/parker.4. Rodda Paint: www.roddapaint.com.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL

A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field-catalyzed paint.1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and

uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated underconditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testingand field experience.

3. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from asingle production run.

4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure isspecifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

EXTERIOR PAINTING


B. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.

C. Coating System Indicators: See 09 9123 - Interior Painting.

2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR

A. Paint CE-OP-3L - Masonry/Concrete, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat of block filler.2. Satin: Two coats of latex enamel.

B. Paint CE-TR-S - Concrete/Masonry Transparent Sealer:1. Application: As recommended by manufacturer.2. Manufacturer/Product: See 07 9100 - Water Repellants.

C. Paint ME-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat of rust-inhibitive primer, recommended by top coat manufacturer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.

D. Paint ME-OP-3P - Ferrous Metals, Primed and Unprimed,Two Part Polyurethane, 3 Coat:1. One coat of rust-inhibitive primer, equal to Sherwin Williams, Kem Kromik Universal Metal

Primer, B50WZ1.2. One coat Sherwin Williams Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane, B65W611, Gloss Extra

White Part A.3. One coat Sherwin Williams Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane, B65V600, Gloss

Hardener Part B.

E. Paint MgE-OP-3L - Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat galvanize primer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.


A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sandingmaterials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report anycondition that may potentially effect proper application.

D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

E. Verify exterior colors/locations with Architect prior to application of paint.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the bestresult for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing.

D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphateand bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

F. Concrete:1. Clean concrete according to ASTM D4258. Allow to dry.

EXTERIOR PAINTING


G. Masonry:1. Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of

surfaces or if alkalinity of mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's writteninstructions. Allow to dry.

2. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer.

H. Galvanized Surfaces:1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1.2. Prepare surface according to SSPC-SP 2.

I. Ferrous Metal:1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges

to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steelsurfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methodsrecommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6"Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.

J. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electricalcomponents and paint separately.

B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".

C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.

D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat isapplied.

E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.

F. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply additionalcoats until complete hide is achieved.

G. Sand metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

H. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just priorto applying next coat.

I. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removedprior to finishing.

J. Exterior hollow metal doors & frames and canopies to be painted P-6, per Section 09 9123.

K. All other exterior steel to be painted P-7, per Section 09 9123.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, andremove daily from site.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes until completion of project.

B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.

3.07 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS

A. Concrete, Concrete Masonry Units (CMU), Concrete Block, Brick Masonry: Finish surfacesexposed to view.1. Exterior: CE-TR-S.

MelissaH

Line

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

P-11

MelissaH

Cloud

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

EXTERIOR PAINTING


B. Steel Fabrications: Finish surfaces exposed to view.1. Exterior, Typical except as noted: ME-OP-3L, gloss.2. Exterior, Metal Canopies and Sunshades: ME-OP-3P, gloss.

a. Metal canopies to be painted P-8 as scheduled in Section 09 9123.

C. Galvanized Steel: Finish surfaces exposed to view.1. Exterior: Paint MgE-OP-3L, gloss.

3.08 COLOR SCHEDULE

A. See Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting.

END OF SECTION

INTERIOR PAINTING


SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation.

B. Field application of paints, stains, and varnishes.

C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unlessotherwise indicated.

D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having

factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and

operating parts of equipment.5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne coated stainless steel, and lead items.6. Floors, unless specifically indicated.7. Ceramic and other tiles.8. Glass.9. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.


A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.

B. Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs: Shop-primed items.

C. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.

D. Section 10 1400 - Custom mural to be painted on gymnasium wall.


A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;2016.

B. ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating; 2005(Reapproved 2012).

C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood andWood-Based Materials; 2015.

D. GS-11, Green Seal Standard for Paints and Coatings, Edition 3.1, 2013.

E. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015.

F. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information foreach:1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category

(e.g. "alkyd enamel").2. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of

each system.

C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustratingrange of colors available for each finishing product specified.1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.2. Where sheen is not specified, submit each color in each sheen available.

INTERIOR PAINTING


D. Maintenance Data: Submit data including product technical data sheets, material safety datasheets (MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and repair of painted andfinished surfaces.

E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store

where directed.3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,with minimum three years documented experience.

1.06 MOCK-UP

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.

B. Provide panel, 8 feet long by 8 feet wide, illustrating paint color, texture, and finish.

C. Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint color, texture, and finish.

D. Locate where directed by Architect.

E. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brandcode, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, andinstructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperatureranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing ofsubstrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Behr Process Corporation: www.behr.com/#sle.2. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.3. Rodda Paint Company: www.roddapaint.com.4. Parker Paint: www.brands.sherwin-williams.com/parker.5. Benjamin Moore: www.benjaminmoore.com.


2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL

A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint.1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and

uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from asingle production run.

INTERIOR PAINTING


3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure isspecifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Coating System Indicators:1. Substrate: W for wood, C for concrete and masonry, M for metals, G for gypsum board

and plaster.2. E for exterior, I for interior.3. OP for opaque, TR for transparent.4. 1, 2 or 3, indicating number of coats.5. A for alkyd, L for latex, V for varnish, S for sealer, F for fire retardant, DF for dryfall, P for

powder coating.

2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR

A. Paint WI-OP-3L - Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat of latex primer sealer.2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel.

B. Paint WI-TR-V - Wood, Transparent, Varnish, No Stain:1. One coat sealer.2. Satin: Two coats of varnish.

C. Paint WI-TR-VS - Wood, Transparent, Varnish, Stain:1. One coat of stain; To match PL-1 in Section 06 4100.2. One coat sealer.3. Satin: Two coats of varnish.

D. Paint CI-OP-3L - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat of block filler.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.

E. Paint CI-TR-1S - Concrete/Masonry, Transparent Sealer, 1 Coat.1. One coat per 200 to 400 SF per gallon.2. Manufacturer/Product: Equal to Prosoco Sure Klean Weather Seal Blok-Guard and Graffiti

Control.

F. Paint MI-OP-3A - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:1. One coat of alkyd primer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.

G. Paint MI-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat of latex primer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.

H. Paint MI-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat:1. Touch-up with alkyd primer.2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.

I. Paint MI-OP-2DF - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat: For exposed acoustical deck andjoist conditions:1. Unprimed: One coat of latex primer.2. Shop Primed: Touch-up with alkyd primer.3. Flat: Two coats of alkyd enamel.4. Provide dryfall type paint equal to Benjamin Moore "Super Spec Sweep Up Alkyd", Flat.

J. Paint CI-OP-4E - Concrete Floors (where scheduled as SC on drawings); Epoxy, 4 coat system.1. 1. Primer: Sherwin Williams Armorseal 33 Primer, 1 mil thickness.2. Epoxy, Opaque: Two coats Sherwin Williams Armorseal 1000 HS Epoxy color coat; 1.5

mil min., each coat. Color: Haze Gray.3. Epoxy Clear: Sherwin Williams Amorseal 1000 HS Epoxy clear coat, 3 mil. min.

K. Paint GI-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat:1. One coat of manufacturer recommended primer sealer.

INTERIOR PAINTING


2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel.

L. Paint GI-OP-3E - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Epoxy , 3 Coat:1. One coat of manufacturer recommended primer sealer.2. Eggshell: Two coats of epoxy enamel.

M. Paint GI-P-1A - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Alkyd Primer, 1 Coat:1. One coat of latex or alkyd primer sealer; As recommended by paint manufacturer for

preparing substrate to receive vinyl wallcovering.

N. Paint I-TR-F - Fire-Retardant Coating, Intumescent:1. One coat of fire-retardant primer sealer.2. Gloss: One coat of intumescent coating, flame/smoke rating of 25/50.

O. Paint FI-OP-2L - Fabrics/Insulation Jackets, Latex, 2 Coat:1. One coat latex primer.2. Flat: One coat latex enamel.3. Provide dry fall type paint for exposed overhead duct and pipe conditions.


A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sandingmaterials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report anycondition that may potentially effect proper application.

D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishesunless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units : 12 percent.3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.


C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

E. Concrete:1. Clean concrete according to ASTM D4258. Allow to dry.

F. Masonry:1. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer.

G. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

H. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.

I. Ferrous Metal:1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.

INTERIOR PAINTING


2. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methodsrecommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP 6"Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.

J. Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, sealknots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer hasdried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25percent with thinner.

K. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.

C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat isapplied.

D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer.

E. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as manycoats as necessary for complete hide.

F. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just priorto applying next coat.

H. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grainbefore set. Wipe excess from surface.

I. At channel reveal and control joint trim, design intent is to paint to corner at face of gypsumwallboard with three interior sides of reveal left as exposed factory finish aluminum.

J. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removedprior to finishing.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, andremove daily from site.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes until completion of project.

B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.

3.06 APPLICATION

A. Do Not Paint or Finish the following items:1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted.2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial numbers and capacity labels.3. Pre-finished metal including anodized or mill finish aluminum, and stainless steel items.

B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule - Paint Systems.

C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrate to be finished.1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occuring in finished areas to match background

surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.2. Paint shop-primed items occuring in finished areas.3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are

visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint.4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles and convector and baseboard cabinets to

match face panels.5. Paint all louvers the same color as the wall in which they will be installed.6. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before

installing equipment.

INTERIOR PAINTING


7. Paint all structural steel, decking and miscellaneous hangers, ducts, piping and equipmentexposed to view from any angle between dropped ACT ceiling systems clouds.

8. Paint all structural steel prior to installation in locations where access will be difficult,including but not limited to sunscreens and canopies.

3.07 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS

A. Concrete, Concrete Masonry Units (CMU), Concrete Block, Brick Masonry: Finish surfacesexposed to view, except as indicated on drawings to remain unpainted.1. Interior: CI-OP-3L, semi-gloss.

B. Gypsum Board: Finish surfaces exposed to view.1. Interior Ceilings and Bulkheads: GI-OP-3L, flat.2. Interior Walls: GI-OP-3A, eggshell.3. Interior Walls in Toilet Rooms @ Wet Walls: GI-OP-3E, eggshell.

C. Wood: Finish surfaces exposed to view, except factory finished items.1. Interior wood climbing wall, owner-furnished: WI-OP-3L, eggshell.2. Interior trim: WI-TR-V, satin.3. Interior MDF: WI-TR-V, satin.

D. Wood Doors: WI-TR-VS.

E. Steel Doors and Frames: Finish surfaces exposed to view; MI-OP-3A, semi-gloss.1. Hollow metal doors and frames to be P-7, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

F. Steel Fabrications: Finish surfaces exposed to view, including counter supports.1. Interior: MI-OP-3L, gloss.

G. Exposed Acoustical Deck and Joist Surfaces: MI-OP-2DF, flat.

H. Roof Deck and Supporting Structure: I-TR-F.

I. Wall Surfaces Under Vinyl Wall Covering: GI-P-1A.

J. Pipe and Duct Insulation Jackets: Finish surfaces exposed to view; FI-OP-2L, flat.

3.08 COLOR SCHEDULE

A. P-1: Sherwin Williams, Aesthetic White, SW 7035.

B. P-2: Sherwin Williams, Gray Clouds, SW 7658.

C. P-3: Sherwin Williams, Software, SW 7074.

D. P-4: Benjamin Moore, Florentine Plaster, CC-520.

E. P-5: Benjamin Moore, Taiga, CC-696.

F. P-6: Sherwin Williams, Peppercorn, SW 7674.

G. P-7: Sherwin Williams, Restrained Gold, SW 6129.

H. P-8: Behr, Emergency Zone, P190-6.

I. P-9: Sherwin Williams, Merlot, SW 2704.

J. P-10: Black.

K. P-11: Benjamin Moore, Deep Space, 2125-20.

END OF SECTION

MelissaH

Line

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

SHERWIN WILLIAMS FELTED WOOL SW9171

MelissaH

Cloud

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

L. P-12 SHERWIN WILLIAMS, ROYCROFT COPPER RED, SW2839

MelissaH

Cloud

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS


SECTION 10 1101


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Markerboards and Tackboards.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports.

B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports in metal stud walls.

C. Section 10 2239 - Folding Panel Partitions: Installation of visual display boards on operablepartitions.


A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009.

B. ASTM A424/A424M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2009a(Reapproved 2016).

C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2016.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on chalkboard, tackboard, trim, and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, special anchor details.

D. Samples: Submit color charts for selection of color and texture of markerboard, tackboard, andtrim.

E. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

F. Maintenance Data: Include data on regular cleaning, stain removal.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.06 WARRANTY


B. Provide five year warranty for markerboard to include warranty against discoloration due tocleaning, crazing or cracking, and staining.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Visual Display Boards:1. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc: www.claridgeproducts.com.2. MooreCo, Inc: www.moorecoinc.com.3. Polyvision Corporation (Nelson Adams): www.polyvision.com.4. Clarus: www.clarus.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

A. Markerboards: Porcelain enamel on steel, laminated to core.1. Basis of Design: Claridge, Series 42. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.3. Steel Face Sheet Thickness: 24 gage, 0.0239 inch .4. Core: Particleboard, manufacturer's standard thickness, laminated to face sheet.



5. Backing: Aluminum foil, laminated to core.6. Size: 8'-0" x 4'-0" unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Verify all sizes with Architect.7. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with concealed fasteners.8. Frame Profile: Manufacturer's standard9. Frame Finish: Anodized, natural.10. Accessories: Provide chalk tray, map rail, and flag holder.

a. Do not provide a chalk tray in Gyms, Weights and Cardio, Training orAerobics/Dance/Wrestling.

B. Tackboards: Fine-grained, homogeneous natural cork.1. Cork Thickness: 1/4 inch.2. Backing: Hardboard, 1/4 inch thick, laminated to tack surface.3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke

developed index of 450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.4. Size: 8'-0" x 4'-0" unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Verify all sizes with Architect.5. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with concealed fasteners.6. Frame Profile: Manufacturer's standard7. Frame Finish: Anodized, natural.

C. Glass Whiteboards: 1/4" tempered safety writing glass.1. Size: As indicated on drawings.2. Accessories:

a. Concealed mounting hardware and anchors.3. Color: 503 Pop Orange with magnetic finish.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Porcelain Enameled Steel Sheet: ASTM A424/A424M, Type I, Commercial Steel, with fired-onvitreous finish.

B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; wood chips, set with waterproof resin binder, sanded faces.

C. Honeycomb cores at sliding markerboards: 0.50 inch thick.

D. Glass: 1/4 inch tempered safety.

E. Aluminum Sheet Backing: 27 gage, 0.014 inch thick.

F. Adhesives: Type used by manufacturer.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Markerboard Sliding Track: Equal to Claridge two track style for mounting conditions indicated.

B. Sliding Whiteboard Locks: Provide locks at all center sliding whiteboards; Equal to Ives40B26D-4

C. Map Rail: Extruded aluminum, manufacturer's standard profile, with cork insert and runners foraccessories; 1 inch wide overall, full width of frame.

D. Map Supports: Formed aluminum sliding hooks and roller brackets to fit map rail.

E. Temporary Protective Cover: Sheet polyethylene, 8 mil thick.

F. Flag Holders: Cast aluminum bored to receive 1 inch diameter flag staff, bracketed to fit top railof board .

G. Chalk Tray: Aluminum, manufacturer's standard profile, one piece full length of chalkboard,molded ends, concealed fasteners, same finish as frame.

H. Mounting Brackets: Concealed.

I. Finger Pulls: Provide finger pulls on edges of sliding whiteboards, clear anodized to matchframes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

MelissaH

Line

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

MARKERBOARDS

MelissaH

Cloud

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed



B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are asindicated on shop drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install markerboards and tackboards on center of wall, unless noted otherwise in the drawings.

C. Mount markerboards and tackboards at 7'-2" above finished floor, unless noted otherwise in thedrawings.

D. Secure units level and plumb.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Cover with protective cover, taped to frame.

C. Remove temporary protective cover at Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

SIGNAGE


SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Room and door signs.

B. Interior directional and informational signs.

C. Building identification signs.

D. Plaque.


A. Section 10 1400.13 - Signage Schedule: Location, text and Design Intent Drawings (DID).


A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings andFacilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.

B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.

C. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating signstyles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.

C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication,including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, andcolors.1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on drawings, include the

drawing room number on schedule.2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from

Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request,submit preliminary schedule.

3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication.

D. Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years of documented experience.


A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.

B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.

C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.


A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended bymanufacturer.

B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flat Signs:1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com.

SIGNAGE


2. Cosco Industries (ADA signs): www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com.3. Cosco Industries (non-ADA signs): www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com.4. Inpro: www.inprocorp.com/#sle.5. Art Source Inc.: www.artsource-inc.com.6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Dimensional Letter Signs:1. Cosco Industries; Cast Aluminum: www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com/#sle.2. Inpro: www.inprocorp.com/#sle.3. Gemini: www.geminiproducts.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Plaques:1. Cosco Industries; Cast Aluminum: www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com/#sle.2. Gemini: www.geminiproducts.com.3. Metallic Arts, Inc.: www.metallicarts.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflictingrequirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.

B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, notincluding corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas.1. Sign Type: Flat signs with raised lettering panel media as specified.2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille.3. Character Height: 1 inch.4. Signs mounted on relites or windows: Provide an additional 1/8" non-glare backer to

match sign.

C. Interior Directional and Informational Signs: 1. Sign Type: Same as room and door signs.2. Sizes: As indicated on drawings.3. Wording of signs is scheduled on drawings.4. Where suspended, ceiling mounted, or projecting from wall signs are indicated, provide

two-sided signs with same information on both sides.

D. Building Identification Signs:1. Use individual metal letters.2. Mount on outside wall in location indicated on drawings.

2.03 SIGN TYPES

A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.1. Edges: Square.2. Corners: Square.3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive.4. Wall and Ceiling Mounting of Two-Sided Signs: Aluminum wall bracket, powder coated,

color selected from manufacturer's standard colors, attached with screws in predrilledmounting holes, set in clear silicone sealant.

5. Suspended Mounting: Stainless steel suspension cables, cable clamps, and ceilingfastener suitable for attachment to ceiling construction indicated.

6. Exterior signage to be fiberglass or photopolymer, to withstand the weather.

B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:1. Character Font: Avenir.2. Character Case: Upper case only.3. Background Color: Architect to choose from manufacturer's full range of colors.4. Character Color: Contrasting color.

SIGNAGE


2.04 NON-TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA

A. Vinyl Letters: Crisply cut vinyl letters for applicaiton to glass, color and font to be selected; 4inches high, typical.1. Quantity: eight (8) sets to be turned over to Owner for installation.2. Text to read: 500 S. Dayton St.; Verify.

2.05 PLAQUES

A. Metal Plaques:1. Metal: Aluminum casting.2. Border Style: Raised flat band.3. Letter Style: Raised, Satin finish; Font: BD Oxford.4. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard pebble texture.5. Background Finish: Filled Black.6. Size: 24" x 16".7. Quantity: one (1).8. Location: Verify location at front entry with Owner

2.06 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS

A. Metal Letters:1. Metal: Aluminum casting.2. Finish: Black anodized or painted, as indicated on schedule.3. Mounting: Concealed screws.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other non-corrodingmetal.

B. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.

C. Locate signs and mount at heights indicated on drawings and in accordance with ADAStandards and ICC A117.1.

D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items.

END OF SECTION

MelissaH

Typewritten Text

DO WE NEED A DID SIGN TYPE FOR THIS??

MelissaH

Cloud

MelissaH

Re: Cloud

I think this is sufficient - noting the quantity and location which we haven't done before.

MelissaH

Set to Accepted

MelissaH

Set to Accepted

LEGEND: MT = Mounting Type: D = Door, G = Glass, W = Wall, C = Ceiling

17.05 / KENNEWICK HIGH SCHOOL 10 1400.13 - 1

SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

ROOM NO. ROOM NAME DID # QTY MT TEXT REMARKSOWNER

ROOM NO.

A100 STORAGE (MISC SUPPORT) 2 1 W STORAGE E102D

A101 STORAGE (BAND) 2 2 W STORAGE E104B

A101A TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) E104A

A102 BAND 1 2 W E104 SLIDE-IN TEXT E104

A103 OFFICE 1 2 W E103B SLIDE-IN TEXT E103B

A104 MUSIC SUPPORT/ENSEMBLE 1 2 W E103C SLIDE-IN TEXT E103C

A105 PRACTICE 2 1 W PRACTICE E103F

A106 PRACTICE 2 1 W PRACTICE E103E

A107 PRACTICE 2 1 W PRACTICE E103D

A108 CHOIR/VOCAL 1 1 W E103 SLIDE-IN TEXT E103

A109 STORAGE (CHOIR) 2 1 W STORAGE E103A

A110 MUSIC LIBR. 2 1 W MUSIC LIBRARY

B100C HALLWAY 2 1 G ADMINISTRATION

B100E HALLWAY 2 2 G ADMINISTRATION

B101 STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE E101C

B102 MDF 2 1 W MDF E101B

B103 ELECTRICAL 7 2 W, D ELECTRICAL E101A

B104 FLEX LAB (DRAMA & PIANO LAB) 1 1 G E101 SLIDE-IN TEXT E101

B105 WOMEN 3 1 W WOMEN (SYMBOLS) E100D

B106A CUSTODIAL 2 1 W CUSTODIAN E100F

B106B TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) E100B

B107 MEN 3 1 W MEN (SYMBOLS) E100C

B108 STUDENT STORE 1 1 W A101A SLIDE-IN TEXT A101A

B109 COFFEE 1 1 W A100U SLIDE-IN TEXT A100U

B109 COFFEE TBD 1 W COFFEE A100U

B110 TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) A100T

B111 TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) A100S

B112 STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE A100R

B113 FIRE RISER 7 1 D FIRE RISER

B114 CONFERENCE 2 1 G CONFERENCE A100Q

B115 PRINCIPAL 1 1 G A100P SLIDE-IN TEXT A100P

B116 ASST PRIN 1 1 G A100N SLIDE-IN TEXT A100N

B117 ASST PRIN 1 1 G A100M SLIDE-IN TEXT A100M

B118 ASST PRIN 1 1 G A100L SLIDE-IN TEXT A100L

B119 ASST PRIN 1 1 G A100K SLIDE-IN TEXT A100K

B120 WORK ROOM 2 2 G WORK ROOM A100H

B121 STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE A100V

B122 ASB 1 1 W A100W SLIDE-IN TEXT A100W

B122 ASB TBD 1 W ASB A100W

B123 ATHLETIC RECEPTION 1 1 G A100F SLIDE-IN TEXT A100F

B123 ATHLETIC RECEPTION TBD 1 W ATHLETICS A100F

B124 OFFICE 1 1 G A100G SLIDE-IN TEXT A100G

B125 BANK 1 1 W C105 SLIDE-IN TEXT C105

B125 BANK TBD 1 W BANK C105

MelissaH

Cloud+

MelissaH

Cloud+

SEE UPDATED SCHEDULE



SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

SIGNAGE SCHEDULE page 2


ROOM NO.

C100 CORE LEARNING 1 1 G C106 SLIDE-IN TEXT C106





C106 FLEX LAB (MARKETING) 1 2 G C121 SLIDE-IN TEXT C121

C107 MEN 3 1 W MEN (SYMBOLS) C123

C108 WOMEN 3 1 W WOMEN (SYMBOLS) C126

C109 TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) C127


C111 JANITOR 2 1 W CUSTODIAN C123

C112 IDF 2 1 W IDF C122

C113 GROUP 1 1 G C128A SLIDE-IN TEXT C128A

C114 GROUP 1 1 G C128B SLIDE-IN TEXT C128B

D100 CORE LEARNING 1 1 G C109 SLIDE-IN TEXT C109

D101 CLASSROOM - LIFE SKILLS 1 1 G C110 SLIDE-IN TEXT C110

D101B QUIET ROOM 1 1 W C110A SLIDE-IN TEXT C110A

D102 KITCHEN 1 3 G C111 SLIDE-IN TEXT C111

D102A TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) C111A

D103 CLASSROOM - LIFE SKILLS 1 1 G C112 SLIDE-IN TEXT C112



D106 FLEX LAB (BUSINESS) 1 1 G C116 SLIDE-IN TEXT C116

D107 FLEX LAB (BUSINESS) 1 1 G C117 SLIDE-IN TEXT C117


D109 QUIET ROOM 1 1 W C112A SLIDE-IN TEXT C112A

D110 QUIET ROOM 1 1 W C113C SLIDE-IN TEXT C113C

D111 CLASSROOM - AUTISM 1 2 W C113 SLIDE-IN TEXT C113

D112 QUIET ROOM 1 1 W C113B SLIDE-IN TEXT C113B

D113 TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) C113A

D115 PROJECT COMMONS 6 1 W MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY CONFIRM OCC. C128

F100 CORE LEARNING 1 1 G B138 SLIDE-IN TEXT B138

F101 FLEX LAB (DRAFTING) 1 1 G B139 SLIDE-IN TEXT B139

F102 FLEX LAB (MAKER SPACE) 1 1 G B140 SLIDE-IN TEXT B140

F103 FLEX LAB (COMPUTER SCIENCE) 1 1 G B141 SLIDE-IN TEXT B141











SIGNAGE SCHEDULE



ROOM NO.

F112 MEN 3 1 W MEN (SYMBOLS) B160

F113 WOMEN 3 1 W WOMEN (SYMBOLS) B159

F114 GROUP 1 1 G B162B SLIDE-IN TEXT B162B

F115 GROUP 1 1 G B162A SLIDE-IN TEXT B162A

F116 IDF 2 1 W IDF B157

F117 JANITOR 2 1 W CUSTODIAN B156

F118 TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) B158


F120 PROJECT COMMONS 6 1 W MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY CONFIRM OCC. B162

F121 SMALL BOX - JROTC 1 2 G B144 SLIDE-IN TEXT B144

G100 ELECTRICAL 7 2 W, D ELECTRICAL F163A

G101 MECHANICAL 7 2 D MECHANICAL F163

G102 CUSTODIAL 2 1 W CUSTODIAN F163B

G104 ISS 1 1 G D126 SLIDE-IN TEXT D126

G105 TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) D126A

G106 SRO 1 2 W D125B SLIDE-IN TEXT D125B

G107 INTERVIEW 1 2 W D125A SLIDE-IN TEXT D125A

G108 SECURITY 1 1 G D125 SLIDE-IN TEXT D125

G109 MEDIA CENTER 2 2 G MEDIA CENTER D136

G109 MEDIA CENTER 6 2 G MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY CONFIRM OCC. D136

G110 WORK 2 1 W WORK ROOM D136A

G111 OFFICE 1 1 W D136B SLIDE-IN TEXT D136B

G112 CONFERENCE 2 1 G CONFERENCE B137A

G113 STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE B137B

G114 TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) B137C

G115 GROUP 1 1 G B153 SLIDE-IN TEXT B153

G116 GROUP 1 1 G B152 SLIDE-IN TEXT B152

G117 FLEX CLASSROOM 1 1 G B154 SLIDE-IN TEXT B154

G118 TEACHER BREAK 2 1 G STAFF B155

G119 SMALL BOX (3D ART) 1 1 G B151 SLIDE-IN TEXT B151

G119A KILN 2 1 W KILN B151A

G119B PUG MILL 2 1 W PUG MILL B151B

G120 FLEX LAB PLUS (AG) 1 1 G B142 SLIDE-IN TEXT B142

G121 FAB (METAL SHOP) 1 1 G B143 SLIDE-IN TEXT B143

G122 VESTIBULE 1 1 G SLIDE-IN TEXT

H100 DINING 6 1 W MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY CONFIRM OCC. D135

H102A STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE D131A

H103 TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) D132

H104 WOMEN 3 1 W WOMEN (SYMBOLS) D133

H105 MEN 3 1 W MEN (SYMBOLS) D134

H106 WOMEN'S PE LOCKER ROOM 1 1 W F169 SLIDE-IN TEXT F169

H106A TOILET/SHOWER 3 1 W WOMEN (SYMBOLS) F169C

H106B OFFICE 1 1 G F169A SLIDE-IN TEXT F169A

H106C STAFF TOILET/SHOWER 3 1 W WOMEN (SYMBOLS) F169B

H106D TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) F170

H106E OFFICE 1 1 G F169E SLIDE-IN TEXT F169E



SIGNAGE SCHEDULE



ROOM NO.

J100 CAREER CENTER 1 1 G D129 SLIDE-IN TEXT D129

J100B ELEV. MACH. 2 1 W ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT C105A

J100C ELEV. 8 1 W IN CASE OF FIRE USESTAIRS

J100F TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) F178

J102 MAIN OFFICE 2 2 G ADMINISTRATION A100A

J102 MAIN OFFICE 5 1 G ALL VISITORS REPORT TOTHE OFFICE

A100A

J103 CONFERENCE 2 2 G CONFERENCE A100J

J104 VAULT 2 1 W VAULT A100E

J105 HEALTH 2 2 G HEALTH A100C

J105A TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) A100D

J106 ATTENDANCE 1 2 G A100B SLIDE-IN TEXT A100B

J108 MEN'S PE LOCKER ROOM 1 1 W F179 SLIDE-IN TEXT F179

J108A TOILET/SHOWER 3 1 W MEN (SYMBOLS) F179C

J108B OFFICE 1 1 G F179A SLIDE-IN TEXT F179A

J108C STAFF TOILET/SHOWER 3 1 W MEN (SYMBOLS) F179B

J108D OFFICE 1 1 G F179D SLIDE-IN TEXT F179D

J109 AEROBICS/DANCE/WRESTLING 1 1 G F180 SLIDE-IN TEXT F180

J109 AEROBICS/DANCE/WRESTLING 6 1 G MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY CONFIRM OCC. F180

J109A OFFICE 1 1 G F180A SLIDE-IN TEXT F180A

J110 STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE F181

J110A WRESTLING STORAGE 2 1 D STORAGE F180B

J111 STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE F177

K100 FAMILY TOILET 4 1 W FAMILY RESTROOM(SYMBOLS)

F176

K101 REFEREE 2 1 W REFEREE F192

K102 TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) F192A

K103 FIRE RISER 7 2 W, D FIRE RISER F192B

L100 WEIGHTS AND CARDIO 1 1 G F173 SLIDE-IN TEXT F173

L100 WEIGHTS AND CARDIO 6 1 G MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY CONFIRM OCC. F173

L100A STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE F173A

L100C STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE F173B

L101 AUXILIARY GYM 2 1 W GYMNASIUM F172

L101 AUXILIARY GYM 6 1 W MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY CONFIRM OCC. F172

L102 STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE F166

L102A LAUNDRY 2 1 W LAUNDRY F171

L103 TRAINING 1 1 G F168 SLIDE-IN TEXT F168

L103A OFFICE 1 1 G F168A SLIDE-IN TEXT F168A

L104 FLEX LAB (SPORTS MEDICINE) 1 2 G F167 SLIDE-IN TEXT F167

L105 CONVENIENCE STORE 1 1 G F165 SLIDE-IN TEXT F165

L106 KITCHEN 2 2 W KITCHEN F164

L106B CASHIER 1 1 G F164C SLIDE-IN TEXT F164C

L106C JANITOR 2 1 W CUSTODIAN F164D

L106D TOILET 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) F164E

L106E DRY STORAGE 2 1 W DRY STORAGE F164F

L106F MANAGER'S OFFICE 1 1 G F164G SLIDE-IN TEXT F164G



SIGNAGE SCHEDULE



ROOM NO.

X4 FOYER 2 3 W AUDITORIUM E102

X4 FOYER 6 3 W MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY CONFIRM OCC. E102

X4A 2 1 W

X5 AUDITORIUM 2 2 W AUDITORIUM E102

X5 AUDITORIUM 6 2 W MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY CONFIRM OCC. E102

X6 DRESS 2 1 W DRESSING ROOM E102B

X8 STOR. 2 1 W STORAGE E102C

X9 STAGE 2 1 W AUDITORIUM E102

X10 DRESS 2 1 W DRESSING ROOM E102C

XK101 TICKETS 2 1 W TICKET BOOTH F191

XK104 LOCKER 2 1 W LOCKER ROOM F193

XK105 RR 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) F193A

XK106 RR 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) F193B


XK108 OFFICE 1 1 W F193C SLIDE-IN TEXT F193C

XK109 RR 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) F193D

XK111 RR 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) F194B

XK112 OFFICE 1 1 W F194A SLIDE-IN TEXT F194A


XK114 RR 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) F194C

XK115 RR 4 1 W RESTROOM (SYMBOLS) F194D


XK117 GYM 2 4 W GYMNASIUM F182

XK117 GYM 6 2 W MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY CONFIRM OCC. F182

XK118A MECH. 7 1 W MECHANICAL F183A

XK126 MECH. 7 1 W MECHANICAL F184

XK127 JANITOR 2 1 W CUSTODIAN F185

XK128 CONCESSIONS 2 1 W CONCESSIONS F186

XK129 STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE F187

XK130 ELEV. MACH. 2 1 W ELEVATOR EQUIPMENT F188

XK131 ELECTRICAL 7 1 W ELECTRICAL F189

XK131A LAN 2 1 W LAN F190

XK133 STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE F182B

XK134 MEN 3 1 W MEN (SYMBOLS) F175

XK135 WOMEN 3 1 W WOMEN (SYMBOLS) F174

XK136 ELEVATOR 8 1 W IN CASE OF FIRE USESTAIRS

F183B



SIGNAGE SCHEDULE



ROOM NO.

A200 CONTROL BOOTH 2 1 W CONTROL BOOTH ?

B200 CONFERENCE 2 2 G CONFERENCE A200B

B200C HALLWAY 2 3 W(2),D(1) A200

B202 CONFERENCE 2 2 G CONFERENCE A200A

B203 CORE LEARNING 1 1 G B202 SLIDE-IN TEXT B202

B204 ASC 1 1 G A201 SLIDE-IN TEXT A201

B205 OFFICE 1 1 G A200Q SLIDE-IN TEXT A200Q

B206 OFFICE 1 1 G A200P SLIDE-IN TEXT A200P

B207 OFFICE 1 1 G A200N SLIDE-IN TEXT A200N

B208 OFFICE 1 1 G A200M SLIDE-IN TEXT A200M

B209 OFFICE 1 1 G A200L SLIDE-IN TEXT A200L

B210 OFFICE 1 1 G A200K SLIDE-IN TEXT A200K

B211 OFFICE 1 1 G A200J SLIDE-IN TEXT A200J

B212 OFFICE 1 1 G A200H SLIDE-IN TEXT A200H

B213 OFFICE 1 1 G A200G SLIDE-IN TEXT A200G

B214 OFFICE 1 1 G A200F SLIDE-IN TEXT A200F

B215 OFFICE 1 1 G A200E SLIDE-IN TEXT A200E

B216 STORAGE 2 1 W STORAGE A200D

C C WING LETTERS

2 MDFPANEL

C -






C206 PROJECT COMMONS 6 1 W MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY CONFIRM OCC. C255

C207 GROUP 1 1 G C256 SLIDE-IN TEXT C256

C208 GROUP 1 1 G C257 SLIDE-IN TEXT C257



C211 JANITOR 2 1 W CUSTODIAN C259

C212 IDF 2 1 W IDF C258

C213 MEN 3 1 W MEN (SYMBOLS) C261

C214 WOMEN 3 1 W WOMEN (SYMBOLS) C262

C215 STORAGE & ROOF ACCESS 2 1 W STORAGE AND ROOFACCESS

C264



D202 CHEMISTRY 1 1 G S249 SLIDE-IN TEXT S249

D204 CHEMISTRY 1 1 G S270 SLIDE-IN TEXT S270




D208 SCIENCE PREP 1 1 G S248 SLIDE-IN TEXT S248



SIGNAGE SCHEDULE



ROOM NO.

E200 SCIENCE CLASSROOM 1 1 G S246 SLIDE-IN TEXT S246










F204 SCIENCE PREP 1 1 G S238 SLIDE-IN TEXT S238

F204A CHEMICAL STORAGE 2 1 W CHEMICAL STORAGE S238A

F207 CHEMISTRY 1 1 G S239 SLIDE-IN TEXT S239






F213 STORAGE/ROOF ACCESS LADDER 2 2 W STORAGE AND ROOF ACCESS B228

F214 WOMEN 3 1 W WOMEN (SYMBOLS) B226

F215 MEN 3 1 W MEN (SYMBOLS) B225

F216 IDF 2 1 W IDF B233

F217 JANITOR 2 1 W CUSTODIAN B229



F220 CHEMISTRY 1 1 G S240 SLIDE-IN TEXT S240

G200 CORE LEARNING 1 1 G B218 SLIDE-IN TEXT B218


G202 GROUP 1 1 G B216A SLIDE-IN TEXT B216A

G203 PROJECT COMMONS 6 1 W MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY CONFIRM OCC. B216



G206 FLEX LAB (FCS) 1 1 G B213 SLIDE-IN TEXT B213

G207 FLEX LAB (FCS) 1 1 G B231 SLIDE-IN TEXT B231



H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) 1 1 G B211 SLIDE-IN TEXT B211

H201 CORE LEARNING 1 1 G B210 SLIDE-IN TEXT B210

H202 CORE LEARNING 1 1 G B209 SLIDE-IN TEXT B209

H203 FLEX LAB PLUS (2D ART) 1 1 G B208 SLIDE-IN TEXT B208

H204 FLEX LAB PLUS (PHOTO) 1 1 G B207 SLIDE-IN TEXT B207

J100C ELEV. 8 1 W IN CASE OF FIRE USE STAIRS

J200 CORE LEARNING 1 1 G B206 SLIDE-IN TEXT B206




SCIENCE SCIENCE WING LETTERS 2 MDF PANEL SCIENCE -

1234

Mrs. SmithScience

1/8" ACRYLIC BACKING, SUB-SURFACE PAINT ?, TYP.

1"H RAISED OWNER'S ROOM NUMBER (WHITE), TYP.

AREA FOR SLIDE-IN TEXT

BRAILLE, TYP.

SUB-SURFACE PAINT P-6, TYP.

1/8" ACRYLIC BACKING, SUB-SURFACE PAINT BLACK, TYP.

A

3"

2"

3"

1 7/8"

SUB-SURFACE PAINTED LOGO, TYP.


3/16" TYP.

R 4"

Administration

1/8" ACRYLIC BACKING, SUB-SURFACE PAINT ?, TYP.

1"H RAISED OWNER'S BLDG AREA NUMBER AND ROOM NUMBER (WHITE), TYP.

5/8"H RAISED OWNER'S RM NAME (WHITE)



A

3"

2"

3"

1 7/8"

SUB-SURFACE PAINTED LOGO, TYP.


SUB-SURFACE PAINT P-?, TYP.

3/16" TYP.

R 4

"

1234BRAILLE



SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"1

DID 1

SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"2

DID 2

Flavien

Typewritten Text

SARA WILL UPDATE THIS & SHOW DIFFERENT COLORS PER AREA: DO WE WANT TO INCLUDE THE COLORED SIGNAGE PLAN OR WAIT FOR THE PROJECT TO BE AWARDED?

Flavien

Cloud

WOMEN

6"5/

8"

RAISED TEXT AND GRAPHICS (WHITE), TYP.

BRAILLE, TYP.

1/8" ACRYLIC BACKING, SUB-SURFACE PAINT BLUE, TYP.

8"

6"

RESTROOM

6"

6"5/

8"

RAISED TEXT AND GRAPHICS (WHITE), TYP.

BRAILLE, TYP.

1/8" ACRYLIC BACKING, SUB-SURFACE PAINT BLUE, TYP.

8"



SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"1

DID 3

SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"2

DID 4

ALL VISITORS PLEASE

REPORT TO THE OFFICE


5/8"H RAISED TEXT (WHITE)


3/16" TYP.

R 4"

MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY

300

1/8" ACRYLIC BACKING, SUB-SURFACE BLACK, TYP.



3/16" TYP.

VERIFY NUMBER PRIOR TO SUBMITTALR

4"



SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"1

DID 5

SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"2

DID 6

ELECTRICAL

1/8" ACRYLIC BACKING, SUB-SURFACE PAINT BLUE AT ELECTRICAL ROOMS, AND RED AT ALL MECHANICAL, FIRE ALARM, AND FIRE RISER ROOMS.

1"H RAISED TEXT (WHITE), TYP.

BRAILLE, TYP.

4"

8"

IN CASE OF FIRE USE STAIRS


RAISED SYMBOLS (WHITE)


3/16" TYP.


8"

6"

BRAILLE



SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"1

DID 7

SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"2

DID 8

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE


SECTION 10 1453 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior traffic and accessible signs. 2. Sign posts.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance

Board’s “Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines”.

B. MUTCD – Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements and layout for each sign. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1 and MUTCD.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR TRAFFIC AND ACCESSIBLE SIGNS

A. Material shall be Aluminum Sheet and Plate conforming to ASTM B 209, alloy 6061-T6 or 5052-H36 or H38. Thicknesses shall be 0.063 inches for signs up to 20 inches wide, 0.080 inches for signs 21 to 36 inches wide, and 0.125 inches for signs over 36 inches in width.

B. Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner.

C. Minimum Maintained Retroreflectivity Levels shall be in accordance with the minimum requirements of MUTCD for the type of sign.

D. Provide all necessary hardware for fastening to support poles. 2.02 SIGN POSTS

A. Sign posts shall be galvanized steel pipe with a nominal 2” diameter or 1 and 3/4” square tube with pre punched or drilled holes for fasteners. Unless otherwise indicated all posts shall be embedded into an 8” diameter concrete footing.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and

other defects in appearance. END OF SECTION

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE


VIDEO DISPLAY SYSTEMS


SECTION 10 1500


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Panelized LED video display systems.


A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Support structure.

B. Division 26 - Electrical: Conduit and wiring for electriucal systems.


A. ANSI/Infocomm 10 - Audiovisual Systems Performance Verification; 2013.

B. UL 879 - Electric Sign Components; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting two weeks prior to the start of thework of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets on panelized LED display systems includingrecommendations for preparation, storage and handling, and installation.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate cable routing, connections between equipment, anchor and supportdetails, and adjacent construction.

D. Project Record Documents: Provide quantities, type, and location for components, cabling andaccessories.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. Authorized Manufacturer Representative: System shall be configured and commissioned by anauthorized manufacturer representative.


A. Deliver and store products in compliance with manufacturer instructions.

1.08 WARRANTY


B. There shall be a one-year coverage of electronic parts and labor, with four additional years ofparts replacement (not including labor).

C. There shall be an exchange program that provides replacement parts for components that failduring the five-year coverage. To minimize downtime, the exchange parts shall be shipped onthe same day the order is received or on the following day. The manufacturer shall also enclosean air bill for return of defective components.

D. There shall be a local Authorized Service Company with technicians based within 50 miles ofthe project site, no exceptions.

E. A help desk staffed by experienced technicians and coordinators thoroughly familiar with thevideo display system and software shall be available for technical support. This staff shall beavailable at no cost to the customer and on call during weekends.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: WatchFire: www.watchfiresigns.com; Product: Watchfire Display Systems, twosingle-sided electronic reader boards capable of displaying text, graphics and animations withtrue pixels at 19mm spacing.1. Watchfire Ignite Software for Windows based PC.2. Minimum 3 LEDs per pixel. Pixel-sharing software not acceptable.


2.02 PANELIZED LED VIDEO DISPLAY

A. Performance Requirements:1. Comply with performance standards based on tests conducted in accordance with

ANSI/Infocomm 10.

B. System Type: Flat.1. Pixel Pitch: 19mm2. Horizontal Viewing Angle: 140 degrees.3. Vertical Viewing Angle: 70 degrees.4. Brightness: 10,000 adjustable5. Mount Type: Custom Ceiling Mount.6. Location: Outdoor.7. Working Voltage: 120 VAC / 240 VAC at 60Hz.

2.03 CONTROLS

A. Interface Unit:1. Fiber cable (up to 1,000') from a Windows based PC (PC not in contract).2. Working Voltage: 120 VAC / 240 VAC at 60Hz.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrates and support structure is in place and properly prepared.

B. Verify that required power and data sources are provided.

C. Verify that space is available for centrally located components.

D. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving thebest result under the project conditions.

B. Do not proceed with installation until support structure and substrates have been prepared usingthe methods recommended by the manufacturer and deviations from manufacturer'srecommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptanceof conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions .

B. Install message center and signs level and plumb with fasteners reccommended by themanufacturer.

3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstrate proper operation and maintenance of equipment to Owner's designatedrepresentative.

B. Review service and support contacts.



3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

17.05 / Kennewick High School 10 2113.19 - 1

SECTION 10 2113.19


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Solid plastic toilet compartments.

B. Urinal screens.


A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Concealed steel support members.

B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports.

C. Section 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories.


A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless SteelSheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.


A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls andceilings.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports,door swings.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 4 x 4 inch in size illustrating panel finish,color, and sheen.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments:1. Scranton Products (Santana/Comtec/Capital); Hiny Hiders with privacy option:

www.scrantonproducts.com.2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

A. Toilet Compartments: Factory fabricated doors, pilasters, and divider panels made of solidmolded high density polyethylene (HDPE), floor-mounted headrail-braced.1. Color: Stainless Steel, Hammered finish.

B. Doors:1. Thickness: 1 inch.2. Width: 24 inch.3. Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch, out-swinging.4. Height: 72 inch.5. Door Edge: Shiplap

C. Panels:1. Thickness: 1 inch.2. Height: 72 inch.

D. Floor Support Options:1. Pilasters

a. Thickness: 1 inch.



b. Width: As required to fit space; minimum 3 inch.2. Extruded aluminum posts, with clear anodized finish; Fastened to foot with stainless steel

tamper resistant screw.a. Hidden Shoe (Foot): One piece molded polyethylene invisible shoe inserted into

metal post.b. Headrail Cap and Corner Cap: One-piece molded polyethylene secured to metal post

with stainless steel tamper resistant screw; adjustable to level headrail to finish floor.

E. Screens: Without doors; to match compartments; mounted to wall with continuous panelbrackets with vertical support/bracing same as compartments.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 in high,concealing floor fastenings.1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with

pilaster.2. Provide ceiling attachment using two adjustable hanging studs, attached to above-ceiling

framing.

B. Head Rails: Extruded aluminum, anti-grip profile.1. Size: Manufacturer's standard size.

C. Wall and Pilaster Brackets: Stainless steel; manufacturer's standard type for conditionsindicated on drawings.

D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type.1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through-bolts and nuts; tamper proof.

E. Door Hardware: Stainless steel, manufacturer's standard finish.1. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature.2. Door Strike and Keeper with Rubber Bumper: Mount on pilaster in alignment with door

latch.3. Provide door pull for outswinging doors.

F. Coat Hook: One per compartment, mounted on door.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.

C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Maintain 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and endpilasters.

C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.

D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines.

E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged orscratched materials with new materials.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.

B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16inch.



B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out-swingingdoors to closed position.

C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.

END OF SECTION

CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK


SECTION 10 2123


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Suspended overhead metal curtain track and guides.

B. Surface mounted overhead metal curtain track and guides.

C. Curtains.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports for track.

B. Section 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings: Suspended ceiling system to support track.



B. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for curtain fabric characteristics .

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate a reflected ceiling plan view of curtain track, hangers and suspensionpoints, attachment details, schedule of curtain sizes.

D. Samples: Submit two fabric samples, 6x6 inch in size illustrating fabric color.

E. Samples: Submit two fabric samples, 4 x 4 inch in size illustrating mesh color for selection.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditionsrequiring special attention.

G. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods and materials and stain removalmethods.


A. Accept curtain materials on site and inspect for damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Cubicle Track and Curtains:1. A. R. Nelson Co: www.arnelson.com.2. C/S General Cubicle: www.c-sgroup.com/cubicle-track-curtains.3. Imperial Fastener Co., Inc: www.imperialfastener.com.4. Inpro; ______: www.inprocorp.com/#sle.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 TRACKS AND TRACK COMPONENTS

A. Track: Extruded aluminum sections; one piece per cubicle track run; I-beam profile.1. Structural Performance: Capable of supporting vertical test load of 50 lbs without visible

deflection of track or damage to supports, safely supporting moving loads, and sufficientlyrigid to resist visible deflection and without permanent set.

2. Track End Stop, Tees, Y's, and Switches: To fit track section.3. Track Bends: Minimum 12 inch radius; fabricated without deformation of track section or

impeding movement of carriers.4. Suspension Rods: Tubular Aluminum sections, sized to support design loads and

designed to receive attachment from track and ceiling support.5. Escutcheons to Suspension Rods: Aluminum.

Flavien

Typewritten Text

BASIS OF DESIGN: MAHARAM; BUOYANT; OYSTER 003

Flavien

Cloud



6. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Clear anodized finish.

B. Curtain Carriers: Nylon slider to accurately fit track; designed to eliminate bind when curtain ispulled; fitted to curtain to prevent accidental curtain removal; 3 carriers per foot of track length.

C. Installation Accessories: Types required for specified mounting method and substrateconditions.

2.03 CURTAINS

A. Curtain Materials:1. Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smoke developed index of 450, maximum; when

tested in accordance with ASTM E84.2. Naturally flame resistant or flameproofed; capable of passing NFPA 701 test.3. Curtain: Close weave polyester; anti-bacterial, self deodorizing, sanitized, and preshrunk.4. Open Mesh Cloth: Open weave to permit air circulation; flameproof material, same color

as curtain.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and supports above ceiling are ready to receive work of this Section.

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install curtain track to be secure, rigid, and true to ceiling line.

B. Install end cap and stop device.

C. Secure track to ceiling system.

D. Install curtains on carriers ensuring smooth operation.

END OF SECTION

INTERIOR CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES


SECTION 10 2212.13


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Galvanized steel chain link fabric.

B. Galvanized steel framework.


A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for post footings.


A. ASTM A90/A90M - Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and SteelArticles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings; 2018.

B. ASTM A428/A428M - Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Aluminum-CoatedIron or Steel Articles; 2014.

C. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc—Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire;2014.

D. ASTM A817 - Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Wire for Chain-Link FenceFabric and Marcelled Tension Wire; 2017.

E. ASTM A824 - Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire for UseWith Chain Link Fence; 2017.

F. ASTM B211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold FinishedBar, Rod, and Wire; 2012.

G. ASTM F567 - Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence.

H. ASTM F626 - Standard Specification for Fence Fittings; 2014.

I. ASTM F900 - Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Steel Swing Gates; 2017.

J. ASTM F1043 - Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel IndustrialFence Framework; 2018.

K. ASTM F1083 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Welded, for Fence Structures; 2018.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's technical data, specifications, and installation instructionsfor fence and gate posts, fabric, gates and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Locations of fence, gates, each post, and details of post installation, extensionarms, gate swing, hardware, and accessories.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has at least three years'experience and has completed at least five chain link fence projects with same material and ofsimilar scope to that indicated for this Project with a successful construction record of in-serviceperformance.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain chain link fences and gates, including accessories, fittings,and fastenings, from a single source.

C. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for fences and gates shown on the drawings.

Flavien

Typewritten Text

DO WE WANT TO SPECIFY THIS AS BLACK??

Flavien

Cloud



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FABRIC

A. Selvage: Knuckled on both selvages for 2-inch and 2-1/8-inch mesh sizes with heights of 60inches and less.

B. Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric: Fabricated in one-piece widths for fencing 12 feet and less inheight to comply with Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) "Product Manual" andwith requirements indicated below:1. Mesh and Wire Size: 2-inch mesh, 0.148-inch diameter (9 gage).2. Coating: ASTM A 817, Type 2, Class 2, zinc-coated (galvanized).3. Coat selvage ends of fabric that is metallic coated before the weaving process with

manufacturer's standard clear protective coating.

2.02 FRAMING

A. Round member sizes are given in actual outside diameter (OD) to the nearest thousandth ofinches. Round fence posts and rails are often referred to in ASTM standard specifications bynominal pipe sizes (NPS) or the equivalent trade sizes in inches. The following indicates theseequivalents all measured in inches:

B. Type I Round Posts: Std. weight (sch. 40) galvanized-steel pipe conforming to ASTM F 1083,according to heavy industrial requirements of ASTM F 669, Group IA, with minimum yieldstrength of 25,000 psi, not less than 1.8 oz. of zinc per sq. ft. Type A coating inside and outsideaccording to ASTM F 1234, as determined by ASTM A 90, and weights per foot as follows:



C. Top Rail: Manufacturer's longest lengths (17 to 21 feet) with swedged-end or expansion-typecoupling, approximately 6 inches long for joining. Provide rail ends or other means for attachingtop rail securely to each gate corner, pull, and end post.1. Round Steel: 1.660-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.

D. Steel posts for fabric heights up to 6 feet:1. Round Line or Intermediate Posts: 1.90-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.2. Round End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 2.375-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.

E. Swing Gate Posts: Furnish posts to support single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double-gateinstallation, according to ASTM F 900, sized as follows for steel and aluminum pipe posts:1. Steel posts for fabric height of 6 feet or less and gate leaf width:

a. Less than 4 Feet: 2.375-inch OD pipe weighing at least 3.11 lb per ft.b. 4 to 10 Feet: 2.875-inch OD pipe weighing at least 4.64 lb per ft.c. 10 to 18 Feet: 4.000-inch OD pipe weighing at least 8.65 lb per ft.

F. Opening Width Up to 12 feet: 2.875-inch OD pipe weighing not less than 4.64 lb per ft.

G. Opening Width Over 12 feet: 4.000-inch OD pipe weighing not less than 6.56 lb per ft.

2.03 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Material: Comply with ASTM F 626. Mill-finished aluminum or galvanized iron or steel to suitmanufacturer's standards.1. Steel and Iron: Unless specified otherwise, hot-dip galvanize pressed steel or cast-iron

fence fittings and accessories with at least 1.2 oz. zinc per sq. ft. as determined by ASTMA 90.

B. Post and Line Caps: Provide weathertight closure cap for each post. Provide line post caps withloop to receive tension wire or top rail.

C. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace. Use material specified belowfor brace, and truss to line posts with 3/8-inch-diameter rod and adjustable tightener. Providemanufacturer's standard galvanized-steel, cast-iron or cast-aluminum cap for each end.1. Round Steel: 1.660-inch OD Type I or II steel pipe.2. Roll-Formed Steel: 1-1/4-by-1-5/8-inch C section weighing a minimum of 1.40 lb per linear

ft.

D. Center Rail: Same material as top rail. Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel,cast-iron or cast-aluminum cap for each end.

E. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Hot-dip galvanized steel with a minimum length 2 inches less thanthe full height of fabric, a minimum cross section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch, and a minimum of 1.2



oz. of zinc coating per sq. ft. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for eachcorner and pull post, except where fabric is integrally woven into the post.

F. Tension and Brace Bands: 3/4-inch-wide minimum hot-dip galvanized steel with a minimum of1.2 oz. of zinc coating per sq. ft.1. Tension Bands: 0.074 inch thick (14 gage) minimum.2. Brace Bands: 0.105 inch thick (12 gage) minimum.

G. Tension Wire: 0.177-inch-diameter metallic-coated steel marcelled tension wire conforming toASTM A 824 with finish to match fabric.1. Coating Type I aluminum with a minimum coating weight of 0.40 oz. per sq. ft. as

determined by ASTM A 428.a. Class 2, with a minimum coating weight of 1.20 oz. per sq. ft. of uncoated wire

surface.

H. Tension Wire: 0.192-inch-diameter (6-gage) mill-finished aluminum wires, ASTM B 211, alloy6061-T94 with 50,000-psi minimum tensile strength.

I. Tie Wires: 0.106-inch-diameter (12-gage) galvanized steel with a minimum of 0.80 oz. per sq. ft.of zinc coating according to ASTM A 641, Class 3 or 0.148-inch-diameter (9-gage) aluminumwire alloy 1350-H19 or equal, to match fabric wire.

2.04 GATES

A. Fabricate perimeter frames of gates from same material and finish as fence framework. Assemble gate frames by welding. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure propergate operation and attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame membersmaximum of 8 feet apart unless otherwise indicated.1. Fabric: Same as for fence unless otherwise indicated. Secure fabric at vertical edges with

tension bars and bands and to top and bottom of frame with tie wires.2. Bracing: Install diagonal cross-bracing consisting of 5/16-inch-diameter adjustable-length

truss rods on gates to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist.

B. Swing Gates: Comply with ASTM F 900.1. Steel: Gates up to 8 feet wide:

a. Up to 6 feet high: Fabricate perimeter frames of 1.66 inch minimum OD, Type I or IIsteel pipe or 1-1/2 inch square galvanized steel tubing, weighing 1.84 lbs. per sq. ft.

b. Over 6 feet high: Fabricate perimeter frames of 1.90-inch minimum OD Type I or IIsteel pipe or 2-inch-square galvanized-steel tubing weighing 2.52 lb per sq. ft.

2. Gate Hardware: Provide galvanized hardware and accessories for each gate according tothe following:a. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, offset to permit

180-degree gate opening. Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf over 6-footnominal height.

b. Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate,with padlock eye as an integral part of latch.

c. Keeper: Provide a keeper for vehicle gates that automatically engages gate leaf andholds it in the open position until manually released.

d. Gate Stops: Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of mushroom-type flushplate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod orplunger bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch,permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fence to comply with ASTM F 567.1. Apply fabric to outside of framework.

B. Post Holes: Drill holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated in concert slab.



1. If not indicated on Drawings, excavate holes for each post to minimum diameterrecommended by fence manufacturer, but not less than four times the largest crosssection of post.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, excavate hole depths approximately 3 inches lower than postbottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 36 inches below finish grade surface.

C. Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Space amaximum of 10 feet o.c., unless otherwise indicated.1. Protect portion of posts above ground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts

and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, andhold in position during placement and finishing operations.a. Unless otherwise indicated, extend concrete footings 2 inches above grade and trowel

to a crown to shed water.

D. Top Rails: Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and atother posts terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer.

E. Center Rails: Install center rails in one piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side,using rail ends and special offset fittings where necessary.

F. Brace Assemblies: Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pullposts. Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric on fences with top rail and at two thirdsfabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is underproper tension.

G. Top Tension Wire: Install tension wire through post cap loops before stretching fabric. Pull wiretaut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch-diameter (11-gage) hog rings ofsame material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches o.c.

H. Fabric: Leave approximately 2 inches between finish grade and bottom selvage unlessotherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric onsecurity side of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains under tension afterpulling force is released.

I. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate postswith tension bands spaced not over 15 inches o.c.

J. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to secure fabric firmly to posts and rails. Bend ends of wireto minimize hazard to persons or clothing.1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts 12 inches o.c. and to rails and braces 24 inches

o.c.

K. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite thefabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts for added security.

3.02 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-setitems in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate wherenecessary. Install gates according to manufacturer's instructions, plumb, level, and secure.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Gates: After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normaltraffic, readjust gates and gate operators and controls for optimum operating condition andsafety. Lubricate operating equipment and clean exposed surfaces.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of gates.

END OF SECTION

FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS


SECTION 10 2239


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Top-supported folding panel partitions, horizontal opening.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and track support shimming.

B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Lock cylinders for panels

C. Section 09 7200 - Wall Coverings: Product requirements for vinyl fabric finish for installation bythis section.


A. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.

B. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013.

C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2016.

D. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne SoundTransmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016).

E. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2016.

F. ASTM E557 - Standard Guide for Architectural Design and Installation Practices for SoundIsolation between Spaces Separated by Operable Partitions; 2012.

G. ASTM F793/F793M - Standard Classification of Wall Coverings by Use Characteristics; 2015.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on partition materials, operation, hardware and accessories, andcolors and finishes available.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, track layout, details of track and required supports,static and dynamic loads, location and details of pass door and frame, adjacent constructionand finish trim, and stacking depth.

D. Samples for Selection: Submit two samples of full manufacturer's color range for selection ofcolors.

E. Samples for Review: Submit two samples of surface finish, 12 by 12 inches size, illustratingquality, colors selected, texture, and weight.

F. Certificates: Certify that partition system meets or exceeds specified acoustic requirements.

G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

H. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stainremoval methods. Describe cleaning materials detrimental to finish surfaces and hardwarefinish.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified thissection with minimum three years of documented experience.





A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation.

1.07 WARRANTY


B. Correct defective Work within five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Provide two year manufacturer warranty against defects in material and workmanship, excludingabuse.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Folding Panel Partitions - Horizontal Opening:1. Hufcor, Inc: www.hufcor.com/#sle.2. Basis of Design: Modernfold, a DORMA Group Company; Acousti-Seal 932:

www.modernfold.com/#sle.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS - HORIZONTAL OPENING

A. Folding Panel Partitions: Side opening; paired panels; center stacking; manually operated.

B. Panel Construction:1. Frame: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch thick formed sheet steel frame top, bottom, jambs, and

intermediates; welded construction, with acoustical insulation fill.2. Panel Substrate Facing: Steel sheet, 20 gage, 0.0359 inch thickness.3. Hardware: Latching door handles of cast steel, satin chrome finish.

a. Refer to Section 08 7100 for additional requirements.4. Panel Properties:

a. Thickness With Finish: 3 inches.

C. Panel Finishes:1. Facing: Vinyl coated fabric VWC-4 as specified in Section 09 7200.

D. Panel Seals:1. Panel to Panel Seals: Grooved and gasketed astragals, with continuous flexible ribbed

vinyl seal fitted to panel edge construction; color to match panel finish.2. Acoustic Seals: Flexible acoustic seals at jambs, meeting mullions, ceilings, retractable

floor and ceiling seals, and above track to structure acoustic seal.

E. Suspension System:1. Track: Formed steel; 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 inch size; thickness and profile designed to support

loads, steel sub-channel and track connectors, and track switches.2. Carriers: Nylon wheels on trolley carrier at top of every second panel, sized to carry

imposed loads, with threaded pendant bolt for vertical adjustment.

F. Performance:1. Acoustic Performance:

a. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 48 to 52 calculated in accordance with ASTME413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90, on panel size of 100sq ft.

2. Installed partition system track capable of supporting imposed loads, with maximumdeflection of 1/360 of span.

G. Accessories:

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.

Flavien

Typewritten Text

THIS PARTITION IS @ THE CORRIDOR - CAN WE ADD PLAM-2 TO THE BOTTOM 4'-0" OF THE CORRIDOR SIDE?

Flavien

Cloud



B. Vinyl Coated Fabric: ASTM F793/F793M, Category VI, polyvinyl fluoride (PVC) finish forwashability and improved flame retardance; color as selected by Architect from manufacturer'sstandard range.

C. Acoustic Insulation:1. Type: As required for acoustic performance indicated.2. Thickness: As required for acoustic performance indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify track supports are laterally braced and will permit track to be level within 1/4 inch ofrequired position and parallel to the floor surface.

C. Verify floor flatness of 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative.

D. Verify wall plumbness of 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install partition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E557.

B. Fit and align partition assembly and pocket doors level and plumb.

C. Lubricate moving components.

D. Install acoustic sealant to achieve required acoustic performance.

E. Coordinate electrical connections.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust partition assembly to provide smooth operation from stacked to full open position. Do notover-compress acoustic seals.

B. Visually inspect partition in full extended position for light leaks to identify a potential acousticalleak.

C. Adjust partition assembly to achieve lightproof seal.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean finish surfaces and partition accessories.

B. Condition markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Demonstrate operation of partition and identify potential operational problems.

END OF SECTION

WALL AND CORNER GUARDS


SECTION 10 2601

WALL AND CORNER GUARDS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Corner guards.


A. Section 09 7200 - Wall Coverings: Terminating wall covering at corner guard.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough-inmeasurements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wall and Corner Guards:1. Inpro: www.inprocorp.com/#sle.2. Architectural Specilaties: www.archsp.com.3. J Sheet Metal: www.jsheetmetal.com.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Corner Guards - Surface Mounted:1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 finish, 18 gage, 0.05 inch thick.2. Width of Wings: 2 inches.3. Corner: Square.4. Length: One piece.5. Installation: Adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.

B. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, securedrigidly in position to wall framing members only.

B. Position corner guard 4 inches above finished floor to 86 inches high. Align with top of typicaldoor head frame or as indicated on interior elevations, unless otherwise noted.1. Provide full-height corner guards where VWC terminates on an outside corner, in all

Project Commons.

C. Coordinate installation of vinyl fabric wall covering with corner guard cover.

D. Install on all gypsum board corners, whether indicated on drawings or not.

3.02 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1/4 inch.

B. Maximum Variation From Level or Plane For Visible Length: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

Flavien

Cloud

Flavien

Cloud+

Flavien

Cloud+

CAN WE ADD A NOTE THAT IN PROJECT COMMONS F120 & D115 CORNER GUARD TO BE 4" AFF TO BOTTOM OF SOFFIT WHERE VWC-9 & VWC-10 OCCURS?

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES


SECTION 10 2800


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Commercial toilet accessories.

B. Commercial shower and bath accessories.

C. Under-lavatory pipe supply covers.

D. Diaper changing stations.

E. Utility room accessories.


A. Section 09 2116: Gypsum Board Assemblies.

B. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Ceramic washroom accessories.

C. Section 10 2113.19 - Plastic Toilet Compartments.

D. Division 22 sections: Grab bars and seat specified as part of shower unit.


A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.

B. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic StainlessSteel Tubing for General Service; 2015.

C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) orZinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless SteelSheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.

E. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016.

F. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).

G. ASTM F2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper ChangingTables for Commercial Use; 2004 (Reapproved 2010).

H. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials toFungi; 2015.

I. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.


A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceilingsupports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, andattachment methods.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiringspecial attention.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Commercial Toilet, Shower, and Bath Accessories:1. Advance Tabco: www.advancetabco.com.2. AJW Architectural Products: www.ajw.com.3. ASI - American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com.4. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.



5. Bobrick Washroom Equipment: www.bobrick.com.6. IPS Corporation: www.ipscorp.com.7. Koala Kare Products: www.koalabear.com.8. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Provide products of each category type by single manufacturer.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged completewith anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.1. Grind welded joints smooth.2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Keys: Provide 6 keys for each accessory to Owner; master key lockable accessories.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.

D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Grade TP304 or TP316.

E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, withG90/Z275 coating.

F. Mirror Glass: Annealed float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering,protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503.

G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: Satin finish, unless otherwise noted.

2.04 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES

A. Toilet Paper Dispenser (OFCI): Double roll, surface mounted bracket type, stainless steel.1. Product:

a. Royce Rolls Ringer Company; TP-2: www.roycerolls.net.

B. Paper Towel Dispenser (OFCI): Roll type, surface-mounted, with push paddle operation andtumbler lock.1. Product:

a. Georgia Pacific; GP Pro 54338: www.gppro.com.

C. Soap Dispenser (OFCI): Liquid soap dispenser, wall-mounted, surface, with stainless steelcover and horizontal stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve,and window gage refill indicator, tumbler lock.1. Products:

a. Purell 2000ml Manual Soap Dispenser, Gray.

D. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 1/4 inch thick annealed float glass; ASTM C1036.1. Frame: 0.05 inchangle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground corners, and

tamperproof hanging system; satin finish.2. Size/Location: Verify with casework details at each room.

a. Toilet Rooms: 2'-0" x 3'-6" mirrors, typical, unless noted otherwise on interiorelevations.

b. Health Room: 2'-0" x 6'-0" mirror.

E. Ceiling Mounted Demo Mirror: Stainless steel framed, 1/4" annealed float glass; ASTM C1036.1. Frame and Mounts: 1-5/8 inch diameter, 16 ga., 304 type stainless steel.2. Dimensions: Minimum 60 inches wide by 24 inches high.3. Products:

a. Basis of Design: Advance Tabco, Model #MI-60.b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, reloading by concealed opening atbase, tumbler lock.1. Minimum capacity: 250 seat covers.



G. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, textured surface.1. Standard Duty Grab Bars:

a. Push/Pull Point Load: 250 pound-force, minimum.b. Dimensions: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness,

concealed flange mounting, 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall and inside of grab bar.c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.d. Products:

1) Product B-5806 manufacturered by Bobrick Washroom Accessories.2) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

H. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit (OFCI): Stainless steel, surface-mounted, locking bottom panelwith full-length stainless steel piano-type hinge, removable receptacle.1. Products:

a. Royce Roll Ringer Company; SNR: www.roycerolls.net.

2.05 COMMERCIAL SHOWER AND BATH ACCESSORIES

A. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch outside diameter, 0.04 inch wall thickness,satin-finished, with 3 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin-finished stainlesssteel flanges, for installation with exposed fasteners.

B. Shower Curtain: 1. Material: Opaque vinyl, 0.008 inch thick, matte finish, with antibacterial treatment,

flameproof and stain-resistant.2. Size: 48 by 72 inches, hemmed edges.3. Grommets: Stainless steel; pierced through top hem on 6 inch centers.4. Color: White.5. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless steel spring wire designed for snap

closure.

C. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, single-prong, rectangular-shaped bracket andbackplate for concealed attachment, satin finish.

2.06 UNDER-LAVATORY PIPE AND SUPPLY COVERS

A. Under-Lavatory Pipe and Supply Covers:1. Insulate exposed drainage piping including hot, cold, and tempered water supplies under

lavatories or sinks to comply with ADA Standards.2. Exterior Surfaces: Smooth non-absorbent, non-abrasive surfaces.3. Construction: 1/8 inch soft, resilient molded vinyl.

a. Comply with ICC A117.1.b. Microbial and Fungal Resistance: Comply with ASTM G21.

4. Color: White.5. Products:

a. IPS, Trubro Lav Guard 2: www.ipscorp.com.b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.07 DIAPER CHANGING STATIONS

A. Diaper Changing Station: Wall-mounted folding diaper changing station for use in commercialtoilet facilities, meeting or exceeding ASTM F2285.1. Material: Stainless steel.2. Mounting: Recessed.3. Minimum Rated Load: 50 pounds.4. Products:

a. Koala Kare Products; Model No. KB110-SSRE: www.koalabear.com.b. Substitutions: 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.08 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, hat-shaped channel.1. Holders: Three spring-loaded rubber cam holders.



2. Length: 36 inches.

B. Shelf: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, with 3/4 inch returned edges, 0.06 inch steelwall brackets.1. Length: 24 inches.

C. Hook Strip: Stainless steel, Type 304, three (3) hooks are 1 inch by 6-1/2 inches on 4 inchmounting strip with 1/4 inch returned edges.1. Length: 24 inches.

D. Heavy-Duty Hook: One-piece brass with satin-nickel-plated finish.1. Withstands 300-lb. downward pull.2. Location: Building Q, Track Storage.3. Product: Bobrick,Heavy-Duty Clothes Hook, B-211.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

D. See Section 06 1000 for installation of blocking, reinforcing plates, and concealed anchors inwalls and ceilings.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated ondrawings.

B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Where mirror is mounted on tile and gypsum board, provide blocking behind mirror above tile, 1inch in from edge of frame, for a flush mounting. Paint blocking black.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES


SECTION 10 4400


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fire extinguishers (OFCI).

B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.

C. Accessories.

D. Key containment lock box.


A. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Roughed-in wall openings.


A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.

B. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of cabinets and cabinet physical dimensions.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordinationrequirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:1. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com.2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.3. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS (OFOI)

A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicablecodes, whichever is more stringent.

B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.1. Class: A:B:C type.2. Temperature range: Minus 40 degrees F to ___ degrees F.

C. Foam Type Fire Extinguishers: Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage. Class K, typical atKitchen only.1. Class: A:B type.2. Size: 2.5 pound.3. Temperature range: 40 degrees F to 120 degrees F.

2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type.1. Size to accommodate accessories.2. Trim: Rolled edge, 2 1/2 inch wide face.

B. Door: 0.036 inch metal thickness, reinforced for flatness and rigidity with nylon catch. Hingedoors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge.

C. Door Glazing: Float glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick, and set in resilient channel glazing gasket.



D. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet, with pre-drilled holes for placement ofanchors.

E. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.

F. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Anodized to clear color.

G. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White colored enamel.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.

B. Extinguisher Theft Alarm: Battery operated alarm, 10 second delay for disarming, activated byopening cabinet door.

C. Cabinet Signage: Die cut identification reading "Fire Extinguisher"..

D. Knox Box 3200 Series - recessed; Color as selected by Architect; Verify model with Fire Districthaving jurisdiction.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for ADA compliant installation.

B. Secure rigidly in place.

C. Place extinguishers in cabinets.

END OF SECTION

LOCKERS


SECTION 10 5100

LOCKERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Metal lockers.

B. Locker benches.


A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) orZinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on locker construction, sizes and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inches in size, of each color scheduled.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly.


A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Metal Lockers:1. Art Metal Products: www.artmetalproducts.com.2. Penco Products, Inc: www.pencoproducts.com.3. Republic Storage Systems Co: www.republicstorage.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Solid Plastic Locker Room Benches:1. Scranton Products; Tufftec: www.scrantonproducts.com.2. Bradley Corporation; Lenox Pedestal: www.bradleycorp.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 LOCKER APPLICATIONS

A. Athletic Lockers: Multi-Tier metal lockers, wall mounted for base indicated on drawings.1. ML-1: Six-Tier; 12 inches wide x 15 inches deep x 72 inches high.2. ML-2: Two-Tier; 12 inches wide x 15 inches deep x 72 inches high.3. ML-3: Two-Tier; 24 inches wide x 18 inches deep x 72 inches high.4. ML-4: Single Tier; 12 inches wide x 15 inches deep x 72 inches high.5. Locking: Padlock hasps, for padlocks provided by Owner.6. Provide sloped top.

B. Student Lockers: Two-Tier metal lockers, wall mounted for base indicated on drawings.1. ML-5: Two-Tier; 15 inches wide x 15 inches deep x 72 inches high.

C. Locker Benches: Stationary type; bench top of solid high density polyethylene (HDPE);aluminum pedestals.1. Bench Tops: 1-1/2 inch thick HDPE with edges rounded to 1/4 inch radius.2. Height: 17-1/2 inches.3. Length: Varies, see drawings.4. Length at ADA benches: 48 inches.5. Width: 9-1/2 inches.6. Width at ADA benches: 24 inches.7. Color: Architect to selected from full range of colors.

Ryan Jones

Line

Ryan Jones

Text Box

Propose removing Art Metal Products and replacing with DeBourgh

LOCKERS


2.03 METAL LOCKERS

A. Lockers: Factory assembled, made of formed sheet steel, ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade33/230, with G60/Z180 coating, stretcher leveled; metal edges finished smooth without burrs;baked enamel finished inside and out.1. Where ends or sides are exposed, provide flush panel closures.2. Provide filler strips where indicated, securely attached to lockers.3. Color: To be selected by Architect; allow for contrasting colors for locker bodies and

doors.

B. Locker Body: Formed and flanged; with steel stiffener ribs; electric spot welded.1. Body and Shelves: 24 gage, 0.0239 inch.2. Base: 20 gage, 0.036 inch.3. Metal Base Height: 4 inch.

C. Frames: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body, resilient gasketsand latching for quiet operation.1. Door Frame: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch, minimum.

D. Doors: Hollow double pan, sandwich construction, 1-3/16 inch thick; welded construction,channel reinforced top and bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs, grind and finish edgessmooth.1. Door Outer Face: 18 gage, 0.0478 inch, minimum.2. Door Inner Face: 20 gage, 0.0359 inch, minimum.3. Form recess for operating handle and locking device.4. Provide louvers in door face, top and bottom, for ventilation.

E. Hinges: Two for doors under 42 inches high; three for doors over 42 inches high; weld securelyto locker body and door.1. Hinge Thickness: 14 gage, 0.0747 inch.

F. Sloped Top: 20 gage, 0.0359 inch, with closed ends.

G. Trim: 20 gage, 0.0359 inch.

H. Coat Hooks: Stainless steel or zinc-plated steel.

I. Number Plates: Provide oval shaped brass plates. Form numbers 1 inch high of block fontstyle with ADA designation, in contrasting color.

J. Locking device supplied by Owner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration.

B. Verify bases and embedded anchors are properly sized.

3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install lockers plumb and square.

C. Place and secure on prepared base.

D. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 lb.

E. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation.

F. Install end panels, filler panels, and sloped tops.

G. Install accessories.

H. Replace components that do not operate smoothly.

LOCKERS


3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces.

END OF SECTION

POSTAL SPECIALTIES


SECTION 10 5500

POSTAL SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Central mail delivery boxes.


A. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting: Field painting.


A. 39 CFR 111 - U.S. Postal Service Standard 4C; effective date September 3, 2006.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specifications and descriptive literature, installationinstructions, maintenance information, and current USPS approval documentation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CENTRAL MAIL DELIVERY BOXES

A. Manufacturers:1. Basis of Design: Salsbury Industries; Product 4276, Option A: www.mailboxes.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Central Mail Delivery Boxes: Provide products approved for United States Postal Service(USPS) delivery.1. Materials: Aluminum with stainless steel hardware.2. Finish: Powder coat in color selected by Architect from colors as scheduled in Section 09

9113.3. Unit Size: 23 inches wide x 27 inches high x 19 inches deep.4. Configuration: Front and rear access, no slot.5. Accessories: Key Keeper, Recessed mounted, Aluminum.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Locking: USPS standard, two keys per box.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install postal specialties in accordance with approved shop drawings, manufacturer'sinstructions, and USPS requirements.

B. Adjust and lubricate door hardware to operate properly.

END OF SECTION

Flavien

Typewritten Text

Flavien

Cloud+

Flavien

Cloud+

COLOR = P-11

Flavien

Cloud

METAL STORAGE SHELVING


SECTION 10 5613


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Four post shelving.

B. Kiln room shelving.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:1. Rated uniform shelf loads.2. Details of shelving assemblies, including reinforcement.3. Accessories.

C. Test Reports: Provide independent agency test reports documenting compliance with specifiedstructural requirements.

D. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, type, and layout of shelving, including lengths, heights, andaisle layout, and relationship to adjacent construction.

E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed inOwner's name and registered with manufacturer.




A. Inspect for dents, scratches, or other damage. Replace damaged units.

B. Store in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

C. Store under cover and elevated above grade.

1.05 WARRANTY


B. Provide one year manufacturer warranty covering defects of manufacturing and workmanshipand rust and corrosion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Four Post Shelving:1. SpaceSaver Corporation; MD Series Wire Shelving: www.spacesaver.com/#sle.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Kiln Room Shelving:1. North Star Equipment; Shelf Truck: www.northstarequipment.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SHELVING - GENERAL

A. See drawings for layout and sizes.

2.03 FOUR POST SHELVING

A. Four Post Shelving: Steel post-and-beam type with sway bracing, shelving brackets, shelvingsurfaces, and accessories as specified.1. Unit Width: 48 inches, center to center of posts.2. Shelf Capacity: Uniform distributed load of 50 psf, minimum.3. Shelf Deflection: 1/4 inch in 36 inches, maximum, under specified uniform load.4. Adjustability of Shelving: At intervals of 6 inches on center, minimum.



5. Shelf Depth: 36 inches, minimum.6. Unit Height: 74 inches, overall.7. Finish: Chrome Plus.8. Number of Units: As indicated on drawings.

B. Posts and Beams: Formed sheet members; perforations may be exposed on face of members.1. Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch.2. Post Shape: Round intermediate posts, round end posts forming corners.3. Post Dimensions: 1 inch diameter.4. Connecting Hardware: Manufacturer's standard.5. Swivel Casters: 5-inch, with 2 locking.

C. Shelves: Formed stainless steel wire; brushed or satin finish; cut ends concealed or smoothedfor safety.1. Wire Diameter: 1/8 inch, minimum.2. Maximum Opening Dimension: 1/4 inch, maximum.3. Shelf Edge Profile: Extending 3/4 inch high, maximum, below top surface of shelf.4. Shelf Connection to Posts: Manufacturer's standard.5. Numberof Units: 5 (Five).

2.04 METAL KILN ROOM WARE CARTS:

A. Frame: Formed 14 ga. steel members comprising posts, brackets and shelf supports.

B. Shelves: 1/2-inch finished plywood.

C. Casters: 6-inch diameter swiveling, 300-lb. capacity on each; 2 casters to be locking.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.


3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Install shelving with shelf surfaces level and vertical supports plumb; adjust feet and bases asrequired.

C. Out-Of-Square Tolerance - Four Post Shelving: Maximum of 1/8 inch difference in distancebetween bottom shelf and canopy top, measured along any post in any direction.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean shelving and surrounding area after installation.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

FIXED SUN SCREENS


SECTION 10 7113.43

FIXED SUN SCREENS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Modular, shop fabricated, extruded aluminum sun screens to be mounted on structure providedby others.

B. Modular, shop fabricated, extruded aluminum sun screens, self-supporting system, to bemounted on glazed aluminum framing members.


A. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Mounting substrates.

B. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Mounting substrates.

C. Section 08 4413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: Mounting substrates.


A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata).

B. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000PSI Tensile Strength; 2014.

C. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coatedby the Hot-Dip Process; 2010 (Reapproved 2015).

D. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.

E. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate(Metric); 2014.

F. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.

G. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013.

H. ASTM F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs;2013a.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Prior to commencement of fabrication, submit detailed shop drawings, showingall profiles, sections of all components, finishes, fastening details, and manufacturer's technicaland descriptive data. Include field dimensions of openings and elevations on shop drawings.

C. Samples: 10 inches by 10 inches minimum illustrating design, workmanship and finish color.

D. Specimen Warranty: Furnish a copy of manufacturer's standard warranty.


A. Designer Qualifications: Perform structural design under direct supervision of a ProfessionalEngineer experienced in design of this type of work licensed in the State in which the Project islocated.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with no less than five years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section.1. With minimum five years of documented experience.2. Approved by manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials to project site ready for erection.

FIXED SUN SCREENS


B. Package using methods that prevent damage during shipping and storage on site.

C. Store materials under cover and elevated above grade.

1.07 WARRANTY


B. Sun Screens: Correct defective work within a one year period after Date of SubstantialCompletion.

C. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's five year warranty on factory finish against cracking,peeling, and blistering.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fixed Sun Screens:1. Basis of Design: Industrial Louvers, Inc; SA Series: www.industriallouvers.com/#sle.2. ASCA Inc.: www.asca-design.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Integral Sun Screens:1. Same manufacturer as curtain wall, storefront, and windows to which sun screens are to

be attached

2.02 SUN SCREENS

A. Sun Screens: Shop fabricated, shop finished, extruded aluminum outriggers, louvers, andfascia, free of defects impairing strength, durability or appearance.1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.2. Louver Type: Airfoil.3. Outrigger Shape: Tapered Flat Bar.4. Fascia Profile: Wedge.5. Mounting brackets: Fabricated from minimum 0.375 inch aluminum, designed to receive

and anchor the outrigger to substructure.6. Sizes: As indicated on drawings.7. Provide a complete system ready for erection at project site.8. Shop fabricate to the greatest extent possible; disassemble if necessary for shipping.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) or ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).

B. Aluminum Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A792/A792M.

C. Concealed Structural Supports: Aluminum, or steel coated for corrosion resistance anddissimilar metal isolation.

D. Fasteners: ASTM F593 stainless steel or ASTM A307 carbon steel.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than0.7 mils thick.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and site area for conditions that might prevent satisfactory installation.

B. Verify that dimensions of supporting structure are within plus/minus 1/8 inch of dimensionsindicated on shop drawings.

C. Verify that all adjacent painting, roofing, masonry work, and other work that might damage sunscreen finish has been completed prior to installation of sun screens.

D. Do not install until after all adjacent painting, roofing and masonry have been completed.

FIXED SUN SCREENS


E. Do not proceed with installation until all conditions are satisfactory.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Set units level, plumb, with uniform joints, and aligned with building elements.

C. Separate dissimilar metals using concealed bituminous paint or non-absorbent gasket.

D. Anchor units to structure as indicated on drawings.

E. Do not cut or trim aluminum members without approval of manufacturer; do not install damagedmembers.

F. Touch-up damaged finish coating using material provided by manufacturer to match originalcoating.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Level: Plus/Minus 1/8 inch.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean exterior surfaces units of dust and debris; follow manufacturer's cleaning instructions forthe finish used.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect units after installation to prevent damage due to other work until Date of SubstantialCompletion.

END OF SECTION

FLAGPOLES


SECTION 10 7500

FLAGPOLES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Aluminum Flagpoles.


A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete base and foundation construction.


A. AASHTO M 36 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated, for Sewersand Drains; 2016.

B. ASTM B241/B241M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipeand Seamless Extruded Tube; 2016.

C. NAAMM FP 1001 - Guide Specifications for Design Loads of Metal Flagpoles; 2007.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on pole, accessories, and configurations.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate detailed dimensions, base details, anchor requirements, and imposedloads.


A. Spiral wrap flagpole with protective covering and pack in protective shipping tubes orcontainers.

B. Protect flagpole and accessories from damage or moisture.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flagpoles:1. American Flagpole: www.americanflagpole.com.2. Pole-Tech Co, Inc: www.poletech.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FLAGPOLES

A. Flagpoles: Designed in accordance with NAAMM FP 1001.1. Material: Aluminum.2. Design: Cone tapered.3. Mounting: Ground mounted type.4. Nominal Height: 40 ft; measured from nominal ground elevation.5. Halyard: Interior type.

2.03 POLE MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B241/B241M, 6063 alloy, T6 temper.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Finial Ball: Stainless steel, 6 inch diameter.

B. Truck Assembly: Cast aluminum; revolving, stainless steel ball bearings, non-fouling.

C. Flag: USA Outdoor Polyester design, 6 ft by 10 ft size, nylon fabric, brass grommets, hemmededges.1. Freedom Flag Supply, Spokane, WA, Product: U.S. Hercules Polyester flag:

www.freedomflagsupply.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

FLAGPOLES


D. Cleats: 9 inch size, aluminum with galvanized steel fastenings, two per halyard.

E. Halyard: 5/16 inch diameter stainless steel aircraft cable.

2.05 OPERATORS

A. Hand Crank: Removable winch type.

2.06 MOUNTING COMPONENTS

A. Foundation Tube Sleeve: AASHTO M 36, corrugated 16 gage, 0.0598 inch steel, galvanized,depth of 48 inches as indicated.

B. Pole Base Attachment: Flush; steel base with base cover.

C. Lighting Ground Rod: 12 inch long copper rod, 3/4 inch diameter.

2.07 FINISHING

A. Aluminum: Mill finish.

B. Finial: Spun finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that concrete foundation is ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated onshop drawings.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coat metal sleeve surfaces below grade and surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials withasphaltic paint.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Fill foundation tube sleeve with concrete specified in Section 03 3000.

3.04 TOLERANCES

3.05 ADJUSTING

END OF SECTION

APPLIANCES


SECTION 11 3013

APPLIANCES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Kitchen appliances.

B. Laundry appliances.


A. Division 22 - Plumbing: Plumbing connections for appliances.

B. Division 23 - HVAC: Exhaust connections for appliances.

C. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical wiring connections for appliances.


A. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features ofeach piece of residential equipment specified.

C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have beencompleted in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL (DIR) and complying with NEMA Standards(National Electrical Manufacturers Association).

1.06 WARRANTY


B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators.

C. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on magnetron tube of microwave ovens.

D. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on tub and door liner of dishwashers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES

A. Provide Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated.

B. Refrigerator: Free-standing, side-by-side, and frost-free.1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 22 cubic ft; minimum 20 percent freezer capacity.2. Energy Usage: Minimum 20 percent more energy efficient than energy efficiency

standards set by U.S. Department of Energy (DOE).3. Features: Include glass shelves, automatic icemaker, light in freezer compartment, and

in-door water and ice dispenser.4. Exterior Finish: Stainless steel.5. Manufacturers:

a. Frigidaire Home Products: www.frigidaire.com.b. GE Appliances: www.geappliances.com.c. Whirlpool Corp: www.whirlpool.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Refrigerator: Free-standing, top mount, and frost-free.1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 18 cubic ft; minimum 20 percent freezer capacity.2. Energy Usage: Minimum 20 percent more energy efficient than energy efficiency

standards set by U.S. Department of Energy (DOE).3. Features: Include glass shelves, automatic icemaker and light in freezer compartment.

Flavien

Typewritten Text

ADD DESIGNATIONS FROM PLANS

Flavien

Cloud

APPLIANCES


4. Exterior Finish: Stainless steel.5. Manufacturers:

a. Basis of Design: Frigidaire Home Products; FGTR1837T: www.frigidaire.com.b. GE Appliances: www.geappliances.com.c. Whirlpool Corp: www.whirlpool.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Undercounter Refrigerator: ADA compliant undercounter refrigerator-freezer.1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 5 cubic ft.2. Features: Include glass shelves.3. Exterior Finish: Stainless Steel.4. Manufacturers:

a. Basis of Design: Summit; CT661BISSHVADA: www.summitappliance.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Range: Electric, free-standing, with glass-ceramic cooktop.1. Size: 30 inches wide.2. Oven: Self-cleaning with electronic ignition.3. Elements: Four (4), minimum.4. Controls: Solid state electronic.5. Features: Include storage drawer, oven door window, broiler pan and grid, and oven light.6. Exterior Finish: Stainless steel.7. Manufacturers:

a. Basis of Design: Frigidaire Home Products; FFEF3056T: www.frigidaire.com.b. GE Appliances: www.geappliances.com.c. Whirlpool Corp: www.whirlpool.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Range: Electric, free-standing, with glass-ceramic cooktop.1. Size: 30 inches wide.2. Oven: Self-cleaning with electronic ignition.3. Elements: Four (4), minimum.4. Controls: Solid state electronic.5. Features: ADA compliant, to include storage drawer, oven door window, broiler pan and

grid, and oven light.6. Exterior Finish: Stainless Steel.7. Manufacturers:

a. Basis of Design: Frigidaire Home Products; FFEH3054US: www.frigidaire.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

G. Cooking Exhaust: Range hood.1. Size: 30 inches wide.2. Fan: Two-speed, 500 cfm3. Exhaust: Rectangular, vented to exterior.4. Features: Include cooktop light, night light, backdraft damper, and removable grease filter.5. Exterior Finish: Stainless steel, color as indicated.6. Manufacturers:

a. Frigidaire Home Products: www.frigidaire.com.b. GE Appliances: www.geappliances.com.c. Whirlpool Corp: www.whirlpool.com.

H. Microwave: Countertop.1. Capacity: 0.7 cubic ft.2. Power: 700 watts.3. Features: Include turntable, cooktop light, 2-speed exhaust fan, built-in trim kit, and

undercabinet mounting kit.4. Exterior Finish: Stainless Steel.5. Manufacturers:

APPLIANCES



I. Dishwasher: Undercounter.1. Controls: Solid state electronic.2. Wash Levels: Three (3).3. Cycles: Six (6), including normal, rinse and hold, short, and pot and pan.4. Features: Include rinse aid dispenser, optional no-heat dry, optional water temperature

boost, adjustable upper rack, and adjustable lower rack.5. Finish: Stainless steel, color as indicated.6. Manufacturers:


2.02 LAUNDRY APPLIANCES

A. Provide Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated.

B. Clothes Washer: Front-loading.1. Size: Large capacity.2. Controls: Solid state electronic.3. Cycles: Include normal, permanent press, delicate, soak, and automatic soak.4. Motor Speed: Single-speed.5. Features: Include optional second rinse, bleach dispenser, fabric softener dispenser,

self-cleaning lint filter, sound insulation, and end of cycle signal.6. Finish: Painted steel, color to match stainless steel.7. Manufacturers:


C. Clothes Dryer: Electric, stationary.1. Size: Large capacity.2. Controls: Solid state electronic, with electronic moisture-sensing dry control.3. Temperature Selections: Two.4. Cycles: Include normal, permanent press, knit/delicate, and air only.5. Features: Include interior light, reversible door, stationary rack, sound insulation, and end

of cycle signal.6. Finish: Painted steel, color to match stainless steel.7. Manufacturers:


D. Commercial Sized Washer: Front-loading.1. Size: 60-lb.2. Features: Emergency stop button, Stainless steel drum and panels and large door for

loading and unloading.3. Finish: Stainless Steel4. Manufacturers:

a. Basis of Design: Belco Athletic Laundry Equipment; Belco 60 lb. Washer:www.belcoathleticlaundry.com.

APPLIANCES



E. Commercial Sized Dryer: Electric.1. Size: Multi-load, 75-lb. capacity.2. Features: Multiple temperatures and extra large door opening.3. Finish: Stainless Steel.4. Manufacturers:

a. Basis of Design: Belco Athletic Laundry Equipment; Belco 75 lb. Dryer:www.belcoathleticlaundry.com.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify utility rough-ins are provided and correctly located.

3.02 INSTALLATION


B. Anchor built-in equipment in place.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust equipment to provide efficient operation.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove packing materials from equipment and properly discard.

B. Wash and clean equipment.

END OF SECTION


APPLIANCE SCHEDULE

APPLIANCE SCHEDULE PART 1

ROOM NO. ROOM NAME Type Mark DESCRIPTION NOTES

B100C HALLWAY DW DISHWASHER ADA, 32.5" H

B100C HALLWAY MW MICROWAVE

B100C HALLWAY REF2 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER (SMALL) 18 CU FT

B108 STUDENT STORE FRZ FREEZER

B108 STUDENT STORE REF REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER 21.2 CU FT

B108 STUDENT STORE ICE ICE MACHINE ADA, 32.25" H

B108 STUDENT STORE MW MICROWAVE




B108 STUDENT STORE C COOKIE OVEN OFOI




B108 STUDENT STORE DW DISHWASHER ADA, 32.5" H

B109 COFFEE REF3 UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR ADA, 32.38" H

B109 COFFEE DW DISHWASHER ADA, 32.5" H

B109 COFFEE ICE ICE MACHINE ADA, 32.25" H

D102 KITCHEN D DRYER

D102 KITCHEN W WASHER

D102 KITCHEN REF2 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER (SMALL) 18 CU FT

D102 KITCHEN DW DISHWASHER ADA, 32.5" H

D102 KITCHEN MW MICROWAVE

D102 KITCHEN RNG3 RANGE (ADA) DROP-IN, CONTROLS ONFRONT

D102 KITCHEN MW MICROWAVE

D102 KITCHEN DV DOWNDRAFT VENT

D115 PROJECT COMMONS MW MICROWAVE

F120 PROJECT COMMONS MW MICROWAVE

G108 SECURITY REF3 UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR ADA, 32.38" H

G118 TEACHER BREAK REF REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER 21.2 CU FT

G118 TEACHER BREAK REF REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER 21.2 CU FT

G118 TEACHER BREAK MW MICROWAVE

G118 TEACHER BREAK MW MICROWAVE

G118 TEACHER BREAK RNG2 RANGE (ADA) CONTROLS ON FRONT

G118 TEACHER BREAK DW DISHWASHER ADA, 32.5" H

G118 TEACHER BREAK RH RANGE HOOD WITH ADA SWITCH

J105 HEALTH REF2 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER (SMALL) 18 CU FT

J105 HEALTH D DRYER

J105 HEALTH W WASHER

Flavien

Cloud

Flavien

Arrow

Flavien

Typewritten Text

I LIKE SHOWING A SIZE CATEGORY HERE - MAYBE SAY SMALL, MED. OR LG.??

Flavien

Spec Comment

Recommend not calling out size in the schedule to prevent conflicts with product spec above.


APPLIANCE SCHEDULE



L102A LAUNDRY W2 COMMERCIAL WASHER

L103 TRAINING ICE ICE MACHINE ADA, 32.25" H

L102A LAUNDRY D2 COMMERCIAL DRYER

C206 PROJECT COMMONS MW MICROWAVE

D203 PROJECT COMMONS MW MICROWAVE

D208 SCIENCE PREP ICE ICE MACHINE ADA, 32.25" H

D208 SCIENCE PREP REF2 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER (SMALL) 18 CU FT

D208 SCIENCE PREP DW DISHWASHER ADA, 32.5" H

F204 SCIENCE PREP ICE ICE MACHINE ADA, 32.25" H

F204 SCIENCE PREP DW DISHWASHER ADA, 32.5" H

F204 SCIENCE PREP REF2 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER (SMALL) 18 CU FT

F205 PROJECT COMMONS MW MICROWAVE

G203 PROJECT COMMONS MW MICROWAVE

G203 PROJECT COMMONS RNG2 RANGE (ADA) CONTROLS ON FRONT

G203 PROJECT COMMONS REF2 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER (SMALL) 18 CU FT

G203 PROJECT COMMONS RH RANGE HOOD WITH ADA SWITCH


APPLIANCE SCHEDULE



H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) REF REFRIGERATOR/FREEZER 21.2 CU FT



H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) RNG3 RANGE (ADA) DROP-IN, CONTROLS ONFRONT

H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) RNG2 RANGE (ADA) CONTROLS ON FRONT

H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) D DRYER

H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) W WASHER

H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) DW DISHWASHER ADA, 32.5" H

H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) DW DISHWASHER ADA, 32.5" H

H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) RH RANGE HOOD WITH ADA SWITCH

H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) MW MICROWAVE

H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) MW MICROWAVE

H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) DV DOWNDRAFT VENT

H200 FLEX LAB PLUS (FCS/FOOD LAB) MW2 MICROWAVE HOOD








FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT

SECTION 11 4000 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Foodservice equipment.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Refer to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and applicable provisions of Division 1 – Architectural for additional instructions.

B. Refer to Division 22 & 23 - Mechanical; for applicable provisions and sections regarding mechanical services, including, but not limited to, rough-ins, grease traps, steam traps, drain traps, atmospheric vents, valves, pipes and pipe fittings, ductwork, and other materials necessary to complete final connections to individual items as specified in this Section.

C. Refer to Division 26 - Electrical; for applicable provisions and sections regarding electrical services, including, but not limited to, rough-ins, wiring, disconnects and other materials necessary to complete final connections to individual items as specified in this Section.

D. Work included in other Sections - Provision of all wall, floor, and/or ceiling/roof openings, recesses, sleeves, and/or conduits; and equipment pads, as required for installation of items included in this section. Also sealing of these openings, recesses, sleeves, etc., after installation of the equipment items, as required.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

Furnish – K.E.C. to Supply and deliver to Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly & installation.

Installation (set in place, fully assembled) - Operations at Project Site including actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations; ready for final utility connections by other Sections as appropriate.

Provide – Furnish and install (set in place, fully Assembled), ready for intended use.

1.04 LAWS, ORDINANCES AND STANDARDS

STANDARDS: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards as applicable to the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of the work of this Section:

Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (A.R.I): Comply with the applicable regulations and references of the latest edition of standards for remote refrigeration system(s), components and installation.

American Gas Association (A.G.A.): Comply with A.G.A. standards for gas heated equipment, and provide equipment with the A.G.A. seal. Automatic safety pilots to be provided on all equipment, where available. (Canadian Gas Association or alternate testing lab's seals may be accepted if acceptable to local code jurisdictions.)



American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.): Comply with A.N.S.I. Z21-Series standards for gas-burning equipment, and provide labels indicating name of testing agency.

American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.): Comply with A.N.S.I. A40.4 and A40.6 for water connection air gaps and vacuum breakers.

American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (A.S.H.R.A.E.): Comply with the applicable regulations and references of the latest edition of standards for remote refrigeration system(s), components and installation

American Society for Testing and Materials (A.S.T.M.): Comply with A.S.T.M. C1036 for flat glass.

American Society for Testing and Materials (A.S.T.M.): Comply with A.S.T.M. C1048 for heat-treated flat glass - Kind HS, Kind FT coated and uncoated glass.

American Welding Society (A.W.S.): Comply with A.W.S. D1.1 structural welding code.

National Electric Code (N.E.C.): Comply with N.F.P.A. Volume 5 for electrical wiring and devices included with foodservice equipment, A.N.S.I. C2 and C73, and applicable N.E.M.A. and N.E.C.A. standards.

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (N.E.M.A.): Comply with N.E.M.A. LD3 for high-pressure decorative laminates.

National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.): Comply with the applicable sections of the N.F.P.A. for exhaust hood, ventilators, duct and fan materials, hoods fire suppression systems, construction and installation; as well as, local codes and standards.

National Sanitation Foundation (N.S.F.): Comply with the latest Standards and Revisions established by N.S.F. Provide N.S.F. Seal of Approval on each applicable manufactured item, and on items of custom fabricated work. (UL Sanitation approval and seal may be accepted if acceptable to local code jurisdictions.)

Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (S.M.A.C.N.A.): Comply with the latest edition of S.M.A.C.N.A. guidelines for seismic restraint of kitchen equipment, and the applicable local regulatory agencies requirements.

Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.): For electrical components and assemblies provide either U.L. labeled products or, where no labeling service is available, "recognized markings" to indicate listing in the UL "Recognized Component Index". (Canadian Standards Association or alternate testing lab's seals may be accepted if acceptable to local code jurisdictions.)

UL 300 Standard: Wet chemical fire suppression systems for exhaust hoods/ventilators shall comply with these requirements.

American with Disabilities Act (ADA): Comply with requirements, as applicable to this Project.

Refrigeration Service Engineers Society (R.S.E.S.): Comply with the applicable regulations and references of the latest edition of standards for remote refrigeration system(s), components and installation; No CFC refrigerants shall be allowed on this project



All refrigeration components installation, repairs, and/or associated work on any refrigeration system, self-contained or remote, shall be performed by a Certified Refrigeration Mechanic.

Comply with all applicable local codes, standards and regulations and any special local conditions.

Backflow prevention assemblies must be applied per WAC 246-290-490.

Backflow prevention equipment will be applied as required in UPC 603.4.13 and devices will be required to be from the current list of approved devices for use in the state or jurisdiction of the project location.

The UPC states that integral air gaps or vented backflow assembly be installed. An integral air gap is preferred. However, if a backflow assembly is installed it must be a reduced pressure backflow assembly per AWWA Cross Connection Control Manual as cited under WAC 246-290-490 and installed so that it can be tested annually. If this is an integral assembly, Equipment supplier must provide information as to how it can be tested.

1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS

Submit bids for the specific manufacturer documents, model, size, and accessories, as specified & shown in the drawings.

Requests for substitutions must be submitted and approved in writing by the Architect. All request for substitutions shall comply with conditions and requirements as stated in Division 1 the architectural specifications.

If custom fabricated items are submitted and accepted as a substitute to standard manufactured items, these items shall meet the specifications of the specified manufactured items, and in general, the fabrication section (Part 2-Products) which follows.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

All items must be received, stored, and accounted for. Items shall not be delivered to the job site until the job site is ready for installation. K.E.C. is responsible for coordination with the General Contract to determine jobsite installation readiness.

Storage of Materials, Equipment and Fixtures: Contractor is responsible for receiving and warehousing of equipment and fixtures, until ready for installation. Store materials, equipment and fixtures in sealed containers. Store off the ground and under cover, protected from damage. K.E.C. is ultimately responsible for products from the point of receiving in storage warehouse until delivery & installation on jobsite.

Handling Materials and Equipment: Verify and coordinate conditions at the building site, particularly door and/or wall openings, and passages, to assure access for all equipment. Pieces too bulky for existing facilities shall be hoisted or otherwise handled with apparatus as required. All special handling equipment charges shall be arranged for and paid for by the K.E.C.



1.07 DISCREPANCIES

Where discrepancies are discovered between the drawings and the specifications, regarding quality or quantity, the higher quality or the greater quantity shall be included in the Bid Proposal. Notify the Architect, in writing, of any discrepancies discovered; and await clarification prior to proceeding with the items or areas in question.

1.08 SUBMITTALS

Rough-In Drawings

Submit one (1) digital set for approval. After approval, reproduce and supply the required number of corrected distribution prints for record and construction purposes.

Submit 1/4 inch scale rough-in drawings for approval. These drawings shall be dimensioned; showing location of ducts, stubs, floor and wall sleeves, for ventilation, plumbing, steam, electrical, refrigeration lines, and concrete base and curb dimensions as required for equipment so supported. Provide plumbing and electrical rough-in drawings on separate sheets.

Site-verify mechanical, electrical and ventilation rough-in and sleeve locations.

Maintain one record set with any related corrections, revisions, additions, deletions, changes, etc. noted during construction and installation; and provide an "as-built" set in digital form at the completion of this phase of the Project.

The K.E.C. shall be responsible for the accuracy of the information on their submittals.

In the event rough-ins have been accomplished before award of this contract, the K.E.C. shall check the existing facility and make adjustments to their equipment to suit building conditions and utilities, where possible. If not possible, so state in a letter with reasons, and an alternate method and pricing, to the Owner, Architect and JLR Design Group.

Shop Drawings

Submit one (1) digital set for approval. After approval, reproduce and supply the required number of corrected distribution prints for record and construction purposes (Hard copy prints to be produced only if required by General Contractor).

Submit shop drawings for items of custom fabrication included in this contract. Shop drawings shall be submitted at 3/4 inch and/or 1-1/2 inch scale and shall show dimensions, materials, details of construction, installation and relation of adjoining work requiring cutting or close fitting. Shop drawings shall also indicate reinforcements, anchorage and related work required for the complete installation of fixtures.

Before proceeding with the fabrication of any item, the Contractor shall be responsible for verifying and coordinating all dimensions and details, with site dimensions and conditions.

Product Data Manuals



Submit one (1) digital set of manufacturer's specifications sheets with complete and specific information. Lead sheet for each item to include: model numbers, options and accessories provided, exact utility requirements per manufacturer. Mark each data sheet with the applicable project equipment item number. Each data sheet to include N.E.M.A. plug and receptacle configuration, plumbing requirements and/ or mechanical connections as applicable.

Architect’s/Consultant’s review of drawings, shop details, product data brochures, and service and parts manuals is for general conformance with the design concept and contract documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the contract documents, or departures therefrom. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for performing their work in a safe, satisfactory, and professional manner.

1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA MANUALS

Service and Parts Manuals: One (1) printed & bound set as well as one (1) digital copy of service and parts manuals shall be furnished for items of manufactured items before final acceptance of installation by Owner. Manuals to be in alphabetical order, according to manufacturer.

Service Agency List: Submit, with the service and parts manuals, a complete list of local service agencies for included manufacturers, complete with telephone numbers.

1.10 SCHEDULE

General: Time is of the essence in this agreement and acceptance constitutes a guarantee that the K.E.C. can and will obtain materials, equipment and manpower, upon notice to proceed, to permit overall completion of the entire building project on schedule. The K.E.C. shall coordinate their work with the progress schedule, as prepared and updated periodically by the General Contractor or Construction Manager.

Unanticipated delays, not within the realm of control of the K.E.C., shall be noted in a written notification to the Foodservice Consultant and the Architect, immediately upon the K.E.C.’s realization that delays are imminent.

Failure of manufacturers to meet promised delivery dates will not grant relief to the K.E.C. for failure to meet schedules; unless the Contractor can establish, in writing, that orders were received by the manufacturer, with reasonable lead times.

Extra charges resulting from special handling or air shipment in order to meet the schedule will be paid by the K.E.C. if insufficient time was allowed in placing factory orders.

1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

Verify all dimensions of manufactured & custom fabricated items prior to fabrication, with field existing conditions.

If field measurements differ slightly from drawing dimensions, modify work as required for accurate fit. If measurements differ substantially, notify General Contractor, Architect & Foodservice Consultant.



1.12 PRODUCT PROTECTION

The K.E.C. is responsible, during the installation portion of the project, to protect their equipment and associated work & materials of other trades against theft or damage, until final acceptance by the Owner.

1.13 WARRANTY

Unless otherwise noted in this Section, items furnished shall be fully guaranteed against defects in workmanship and material(s) for one full year after issue of Substantial Completion, or the manufactures standard extended warranty equivalent. Should a Temporary Certificate of Substantial Completion be issued for partial completion of work, the items furnished within that designated area shall be under warranty from the date of issue of that Certificate. Repairs and replacements will be made by the Contractor or their service agent without charge to the Owner, and within a reasonable time.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment schedule: Refer to schedule on Foodservice Drawings and Part 4 Itemized Specifications for equipment included in this Section.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Metals 1. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, hardest workable temper, No.4 directional polish.

2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A526, except ASTM A527 for extensive forming; ASTM A525, G90 zinc coating, chemical treatment.

a. Where a painted finish is indicated, provide mill phosphatized treatment in lieu of chemical treatment.

3. Steel Sheet: ASTM A569 hot-rolled carbon steel.

4. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or ASTM A120, welded or seamless, schedule 40, galvanized.

5. Steel Structural Members: Hot rolled or cold formed, carbon steel unless stainless steel is indicated.

a. Galvanized Finish (G.I.): ASTM A123 hot-dipped zinc coating, applied after fabrication.

6. Aluminum: ASTM B209/B221 sheet, plate and extrusions (as indicated); alloy, temper and finish as determined by manufacturer/fabricator, except 0.40-mil natural anodized finish on exposed work unless another finish is indicated.

B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD3, Type 2, 0.050" thick, except Type 3, 0.042" for post- forming smooth (non-textured). Color and texture as selected by the Architect.

1. Comply with N.S.F. No. 35.



2. Veneered with approved waterproof and heatproof cement. Rubber base adhesives are not acceptable.

3. Applied directly over close grained plywood, such as solid Mahogany or solid Birch, of selected, smooth, sanded stock to ensure a smooth ripple-free laminated surface.

4. Exposed faces and edges shall be faced with 1/8 inch (1.6mm) thick edge banding of same material as exposed face. Corresponding backs are to be covered with approved backing and balancing sheet material. No unfinished exposed substrate will be acceptable

C. Insulation

1. For low temperature applications, such as ice bins, cold pans, or fabricated under counter freezers, use urethane, rigid board foam or foamed-in-place; not less than 2 inches (50mm) thick, except that vertical surfaces of cold pans and ice bins may be 1 inch (25mm) thick. Insulation shall be bonded at joints, to prevent condensation on exterior.

2. At counter tops, subject to heat from cooking equipment and refrigeration compressors, use 1 inch thick B&Z Products (1-800-999-0890) Marinite I, or equal, to insulate underside of top.

3. All insulation shall be fully encased or enclosed.

D. Joint Materials:

1. Sealants: 1-part or 2-part, polyurethane or silicone based, liquid elastomeric sealant, non-solvent release type, Shore A hardness of 30, except 45 if subject to traffic.

2. Backer Rod: For 3/8 inch or larger joints, shall be polyurethane rod stock, larger than joint width.

3. Gaskets: Solid or hollow (but not cellular) neoprene or polyvinyl chloride; light grey, minimum of 40 Shore A hardness, self-adhesive or prepared for either adhesive application or mechanical anchorage.

E. Paint And Coatings:

1. Provide the types of painting and coating materials which, after drying or curing, are suitable for use in conjunction with foodservice, and which are durable, non-toxic, non-dusting, non-flaking, mildew resistant, and comply with governing regulations for foodservice.

2. Galvanize Repair Paint: MIL-P-21035.

3. Bituminous Paint: Sound deaden internal surfaces of metal work, and underside of metal counters and tables between work top and underbracing.

4. Pretreatment: SSPC-PT2 or PT3, of FS TT-C490.

5. Primer Coating for Metal: FS TT-P-86, type suitable for baking, where indicated.

6. Enamel for Metal: Synthetic type, FA TT-P-491, type suitable for baking, where indicated.



2.03 CUSTOM FABRICATED PRODUCTS

Hardware

General: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than ANSI 156.9 Type 2 (Institutional), satin finish stainless steel or dull chrome finish on brass, bronze, or steel.

Hinged Door Hardware: Hinged doors shall be mounted with heavy duty N.S.F. approved hinges with Component Hardware Group, Model No. P62-1010 pulls, or equal. Catches shall be heavy-duty magnetic type, except as otherwise indicated..

Drawer Hardware: Slides to be 200 pounds minimum capacity per pair, 300 series stainless steel, full extension, side-mounting, self-closing type, with stainless steel ball-bearings and positive stops; Component Hardware Group Series S52, or equal. Pulls shall be Component Hardware Group, Model No. P62-1012, or equal.

Sliding Door Hardware: Sliding doors shall be mounted on large, quiet ball bearing rollers in 14-gauge (2.0mm) stainless steel overhead tracks, and be removable without the use of tools. Bottom of cabinet shall have stainless steel guide-pins and not channel tracks for doors.

All hardware shall be identified with manufacturer's name and number, so that broken or worn parts may be replaced.

B. Casters

Type and size as recommended by caster manufacturer, N.S.F. approved for the type and weight of equipment supported; but not less than 5 inch (127mm) diameter heavy-duty, ball-bearing, solid or disc wheel with non-marking grease proof rubber, neoprene or polyurethane tire; unless otherwise specified. Minimum width of tread shall be 1-3/16 inch (30mm). Minimum capacity per caster shall be 250 pound (113.4kg), unless otherwise noted in itemized specifications.

Solid material wheels to be provided with stainless steel rotating wheel guard.

To be sanitary, have sealed wheel and swivel bearings and polished plated finish per N.S.F.

Unless otherwise indicated, equip each item with two (2) swivel-type casters and two (2) fixed casters. Provide foot brakes on two (2) casters on opposite corners of equipment.

Unless equipment item is equipped with another form of all-around protective bumper, provide circular rotating bumper above each caster, 5 inch (127mm) diameter tire of light grey synthetic rubber (hollow or closed-cell) on cadmium-plated disc.

Plumbing Fittings, Trim And Accessories:

General: Where exposed or semi-exposed, provide bright chrome plated brass or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed.

Vacuum Breakers: Provide with foodservice equipment as listed in the itemized specifications.

Water Outlets: At sinks and at other locations where water is supplied (by manual, automatic or remote control), furnish commercial quality faucets, valves, dispensers or fill devices, of the type and size indicated, and as required to operate equipment and fixtures as indicated.



Waste Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, furnish 2 inch (50mm) remote-lever waste valve, and 3-1/2 inch (89mm) strainer basket.

Electrical Materials

General: Provide standard materials, devices and components as recommended by the manufacturer or fabricator, selected and installed in accordance with N.E.M.A. standards and recommendations; and as required for safe and efficient use and operation of the foodservice equipment, without objectionable noise, vibration and sanitation problems.

Before ordering equipment, confirm with the serving electrical utility, pertinent electrical requirements, such as actual voltages available, number of phases and number of wires in the system.

Electrical work for fabricated equipment shall be completely wired to a junction or pull box, wholly accessible, mounted on the equipment. Wiring shall be labeled for outlet or item served. Verify local requirements for U.L. Listing on complete assembly, and provide if required.

Components shall bear the U.L. label or be approved by the prevailing authority.

Custom fabricated refrigerator units shall be provided with vapor tight light receptacles, shatterproof lamps and automatic switches. Wiring shall be concealed.

Controls and Signals: Provide recognized commercial grade signals, on-off push buttons or switches, and other speed and temperature controls as required for operation; complete with pilot lights and permanent signs and graphics to assist the user of each item. Provide stainless steel cover plates at control and signal electrical boxes. Controls and switches are to be located out of heat zones, easily accessible, and in locations that preclude accidental contact by employees.

Internal Wiring of Fixtures and Equipment:

The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for internal wiring of electrical devices, built into or forming an integral part of fabricated equipment items. Wiring to be in metal conduit, to an accessible pull-box, tagged for intended use. Refer to Section 26 Specifications for color coding of wiring.

Each standard item shipped in sections, shall be properly connected internally, and verified by the Contractor.

Furnish dish washers and conveyors internally wired to junction box or distribution panel as specified; including push button switches, motors, immersion heaters, solenoids, etc.

Where light fixtures are specified or detailed as part of counters, cases or fixtures; light fixtures, lamps and shields shall be furnished and installed. Warm white lamps shall be provided, unless otherwise specified. If fluorescent light fixtures are specified, ballasts shall be provided and shields shall be included. Shields shall be provided for all light fixtures.

Exposed flexible steel conduit on kitchen equipment, shall be neoprene jacketed Seal-Tite conduit equal to Anaconda type "UA". U.L. approved, complete with approved liquid-tight connectors on each end; designed to provide electrical grounding continuity.



Exposed electrical conduit used in kitchen wet area applications, except for flexible connections, shall be rigid galvanized steel. Thin wall conduit (EMT) shall not be permitted for wet areas. Exposed outlet boxes shall be liquid-tight type, with threaded hubs.

Convenience and Power Outlets:

Make cutouts and install appropriate boxes or outlets in fabricated fixtures, complete with wiring, conduit, outlet and stainless steel cover plate.

Outlets and plugs shall conform to N.E.M.A. standards.

Electrical outlets and devices shall be first quality "Specification Grade".

Plugs and Cords: Where cords and plugs are provided, they shall comply with National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (N.E.M.A.) requirements. Indicate N.E.M.A. configuration for each applicable item.

Heating Equipment:

Electric and heating equipment shall be so installed as to be readily cleanable or removable for cleaning.

Motors: Totally enclosed type, except drip-proof type where not exposed to a dust or moisture condition; ball bearings, except sleeve bearings on small timing motors; windings impregnated to resist moisture; horse-power and duty-cycle ratings as required for the service indicated.

Power Characteristics: Refer to Section 26 Specifications for project power characteristics. Also, refer to individual equipment requirements, for loads and ratings.

2.04 FABRICATION OF METALWORK

General Fabrication Requirements

Remove burrs from sheared edges of metalwork, ease the corners and smooth to eliminate cutting hazard. Bend sheets of metal, at not less than the minimum radius required to avoid grain separation in the metal. Maintain flat, smooth surfaces, without damage to finish.

Reinforce metal at locations of hardware, anchorages and accessory attachments; wherever metal is less than 14 gauge, or requires mortised application. Conceal reinforcements to the greatest extent possible. Weld in place, on concealed faces.

Exposed screws or bolt heads, rivets and butt joints made by riveting straps under seams and then filled with solder, will not be accepted. Where fasteners are permitted, provide Phillips head, flat or oval head machine screws. Cap threads with acorn nuts, unless fully concealed in inaccessible construction; and provide nuts and lockwashers unless metal for tapping is at least 12 gauge (2.5mm). Match fastener head finish with finish of metal fastened.

Where components of fabricated metal work are indicated to be galvanized, and involve welding or machining of metal heavier than 16 gauge (1.6mm), complete the fabrication and provide hot-dip galvanizing of each component, after fabrication, to the greatest extent possible (depending upon available dip-tank sizes). Comply with ASTM A123.



Welding And Soldering

Materials 18-gauge, or heavier, shall be welded.

Seams and joints shall be shop welded or soldered as the nature of the material may require.

Welds must be ground smooth and polished to match original finish.

Where galvanizing has been burned off, the weld shall be cleaned and touched up with high grade aluminum paint.

Provide removable panels for access to mechanical and electrical service connections, which are concealed behind or within foodservice equipment, but only where access is not possible and not indicated through other work.

Closures: Where ends of fixtures, backsplashes, shelves, etc., are open, fill by forming the metal, or welding sections, if necessary, to close entire opening flush to walls or adjoining fixtures.

Rolled Edges: Rolled edges shall be as detailed, with corners bullnose, ground and polished.

Coved Corners: Stainless steel foodservice equipment shall have 1/2 inch (13mm) or larger radius coves in horizontal and vertical corners, and intersections, per N.S.F. standards.

Metal And Gauges:

Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate exposed metalwork of stainless steel; and fabricate the following components from the gauge of metal indicated, and other components from not less than 20 gauge metal:

Table and counter tops: 14 gauge.

Sinks and drainboards: 14 gauge.

Shelves: 16 gauge.

Front drawer and door panels: 18 gauge (double-pan type).

Single pan doors and drawer fronts: 16 gauge.

Enclosed base cabinets: 18 gauge.

Enclosed wall cabinets: 18 gauge.

Exhaust hoods and ventilators: 18 gauge.

Pan-type insets and trays: 16 gauge.

Removable covers and panels: 18 gauge.

Skirts and enclosure panels: 18 gauge.

Closure and trim strips over 4" wide: 18 gauge.

Hardware reinforcement: 12 gauge.

Gusset plates: 10 gauge.

Closure panels from top of walk-ins to ceiling: 18 gauge.



Closure panels from top of exhaust hood to ceiling: 18 gauge

Work-Surface Fabrication:

Fabricate metal work surfaces by forming and welding, to provide seamless construction; using welding rods matching sheet metal, grinding and polishing. Where necessary for disassembly, provide waterproof gasketed draw-type joints with concealed bolting.

Reinforce work surfaces 30 inches on center both ways, with galvanized or stainless steel concealed structural members. Reinforce edges which are not self-reinforced, by formed edges.

Metal Top Construction:

Metal tops shall be one-piece welded construction, including field joints. Secure to a full perimeter galvanized steel channel frame cross-braced not farther than 2'-6" on center. Fasten top with stud bolts or tack welds. If hat sections are used in lieu of channels, close ends.

Properly designed draw fastening, trim strip, or commercial joint material to suit requirement shall be used, only if specified.

Structural Framing:

Except as otherwise indicated, provide framing of minimum 1 inch pipe-size round pipe or tube members, with mitered and welded joints and gusset plates, ground smooth. Provide 14 gauge stainless steel tube for exposed framing, and galvanized steel pipe for concealed framing.

Where indicated, flange rear and end edges up to form splashes integrally with top, with vertical and horizontal corners coved of not less than 1/4 inch radius, die formed. Turn back splashes 1 inch to wall across top and ends with rounded edge on break, unless otherwise specified.

For die-crimped edges, use inverted "V" 1/2 inch deep inside and 2 inch deep on outside, unless otherwise shown. For straight down flanges, make 1-3/4 inch deep on outside. For bullnose edges, roll down 1-3/4 inch.

Edges: die-formed, integral with top. For rounded corners, form to 1 inch radius, weld, and polish to original finish.

Field Joints: For any field joint required because of size of fixture; butt-joint, reinforce on underside with angles of same material, bolt together with non-corrosive bolts and nuts, field weld, grind and polish.

Pipe Bases: Construct pipe bases of 1-5/8 inch diameter 18 gauge stainless steel tubing. Fit legs with polished stainless steel sanitary adjustable bullet feet to provide for adjustment of approximately 1-1/2 inch, without exposing threads. Space legs to provide ample support for tops, precluding any possibility of buckling or sagging, and in no case more than 6'-0" centers.

Legs and Crossrails

Equipment legs and crossrails shall be 1-5/8 inch (41mm), 16-gauge (1.59mm) stainless steel tubing.



Welds at cross rails shall be continuous and ground smooth. Please note; tack welds are not acceptable.

Bottom of legs shall be swedged inward and fitted with a stainless steel bullet-type foot with not less than 2 inch (50mm) adjustment.

Free standing legs shall be pegged to floor with 1/4 inch (6mm) stainless steel rod.

Components:

Stainless Steel Gusset: Stainless steel exterior to fit 1-5/8 inch (41mm) tubing, with allen screw for fastening and adjustment. Not less than 3 inches diameter at top and 3-3/4 inch long. Outer shell 16-gauge stainless steel, reinforced with 12-gauge mild steel insert welded interior shell, or approved equal.

Stainless Steel Low Counter Legs: Stainless steel exterior 5-3/4 inch minimum, 7 inch maximum length with stainless steel 3-1/2 inch square plate with four counter-sunk holes, welded to top for fastening.

Stainless Steel Adjustable Foot: Stainless steel 1-1/2 inch diameter tapered at bottom to 1 inch diameter, fitted with threaded cold rolled rod for minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter x 3/4 inch threaded bushing plug welded to legs, or approved equal. Push-in foot not acceptable.

Legs shall be fastened to equipment with gussets, as follows:

Sinks: Reinforced with bushings and set screw.

Metal Top Tables and Dish Tables: Welded to galvanized steel channels, 14-gauge or heavier, anchored to top with screws through slotted holes.

Shelves:

Construct solid shelves under pipe base tables of 16 gauge stainless steel, with 1-1/2 inch turned down and under edges on exposed sides, and 2 inch turn up against walls or equipment. Fully weld to pipe legs.

In fixtures with enclosed bases, turn up shelves on back and sides with 1/4 inch (minimum) radius and feather slightly to ensure a tight fit to enclosure panels.

Sinks:

1. Construct sinks of 14 gauge stainless steel with No.4 finish inside and outside.

2. Form back, bottom and front of one piece, with ends and partitions welded into place. Partitions: double thickness, 1 inch minimum space between walls. Multiple compartments shall be continuous on the exterior, without applied facing strips or panels.

3. Cove interior vertical and horizontal corners of each tub not less than 1/4 inch radius, die formed. Outer ends of drainboards to have roll rim risers not less than 3 inches high.

4. Drill faucet holes in splashes 2-1/2 inches below top edge. Verify center spacing with faucet specified.



5. Sink insets shall be deep drawn of 16-gauge (1.59mm), or heavier, polished stainless steel. Weld into sink drainboards with 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 14 gauge stainless steel angle brackets; securely welded to sinks and galvanized cross angles spot welded to underside of drainboards to form an integral part of the installation.

6. The bottom of each compartment shall be creased such as to ensure complete drainage to waste opening. Slope bottom of sink bowls toward outlet.

Drains, Wastes and Faucets:

Furnish and install Fisher model 22322 stainless steel rotary drain assembly with connected overflow assembly, in 3-compartment sinks (pot/pan wash sinks).

Other custom fabricated sinks shall be furnished with Fisher model 22438 stainless steel rotary drain assembly.

Rotary Handle: Of sufficient length to extend to front edge of sink. No riveting, screws or soldering permitted to fit drains to sinks, with all parts of drains easily removable for servicing and replacement.

All faucets shall be furnished with equipment included in this Section. All faucets shall be lead free and comply with NSF Standard #61, Section #9. All sinks shall be furnished with Fisher faucets as follows unless specified explicitly in the written specifications:

Deck mount faucets #57657

Backsplash mount faucets #60771

¾” backsplash mount faucets #60100

Workmanship:

Best quality in the trade. Field verify dimensions before fabricating; conform all items to dimensions of building; neatly fit around pipes, offsets and other obstructions.

Fabricate only in accordance with approved shop drawings, showing pipes, obstructions to be built around, and location of utilities and services.

Enclosures:

Provide enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts for service lines, operating components and mechanical and electrical devices associated with the foodservice equipment, except as specifically indicated to be "open".

Where equipment is exposed to customer view, provide enclosure of service lines, operating components and mechanical and electrical devices.



Doors:

Metal doors shall be double-cased stainless steel. Outer pans shall be 18-gauge (1.27mm) stainless steel with corners welded, ground smooth and polished. Inner pan shall be 20-gauge (.95mm) stainless steel fitted tightly into outer pan with a sound-deadening material such as Celotex or styrofoam used as a core. The two pans shall be tack welded together and joints solder filled. Doors shall finish approximately 3/4 inch (19mm) thick, and be fitted with flush recessed type stainless steel door pulls.

Wood doors shall be fabricated as detailed. If formica or other plastic surfaces are used, sides and backs must be laminated.

Hinged doors shall be mounted on heavy-duty N.S.F. approved hinges, or as noted on plans or specifications.

Drawer Assemblies:

Assemblies shall consist of removable drawer body mounted in a ball bearing slide assembly with fully enclosed housing.

Slide assembly consists of one pair of 200 pound stainless steel roller bearing extension slides, with side and back enclosure panels, front spacer angle, two drawer carrier angles, secured to slides and stainless steel front.

Drawer bodies for general storage are to be 20 inches x 20 inches, with 18 gauge stainless steel or Royalite containers.

Drawers intended to hold food products shall be removable type with 12 x 20 stainless steel food pans, in a stainless steel assembly.

Drawer fronts are double cased, 3/4 inch thick, with 18 gauge stainless steel welded and polished front pan. Steel back pan is tightly fitted and tack welded. Sound deaden with rigid insulation material.

Provide drawers with replaceable soft neoprene bumpers; or for refrigerated drawers, a full perimeter soft gasket.

Closed Base: Where casework is indicated to be located on a raised-floor base, prepare casework for support without legs, and for anchorage and sealant application, as required for a completely enclosed and concealed base.

Support from Floor: Equip floor supported mobile units with casters, and equip items indicated as roll-out units, with manufacturer's standard one-directional rollers. Otherwise, and except for closed-base units, provide pipe or tube legs, with adjustable bullet-design feet for floor supported items of fabricated metalwork. Provide 1-1/2 inch adjustment of feet (concealed threading).

Sound Deadening:

Sound deaden underside of metal tops, drainboards, undershelves, cabinet interior shelves, etc., above the underbracing/reinforcing/framing only.



2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

Nameplates: Whenever possible, locate nameplates and labels on manufactured items, in accessible position, but not within customer's normal view. Do not apply name-plates or labels on custom fabricated work, except as required for compliance with governing regulations, insurance requirements, or operator performance.

Manufactured Equipment Items: Furnish items as scheduled or herein specified. Verify dimensions, spaces, rough-in and service requirements, and electrical characteristics, before ordering. Provide trim, accessories and miscellaneous items for complete installation.

Insert Pans:

General: Cut-outs, openings, drawers, or equipment specified or detailed to hold stainless steel insert pans shall be provided with a full complement of pans as follows:

One (1) stainless steel, 20-gauge minimum, solid insert pan for each space, sized per plans, details, or specifications.

Where pan sizes are not indicated in plans, details, or specifications, provide one full-size pan for each opening.

Provide maximum depth pan to suit application and space.

Provide 18-gauge removable stainless steel adapter bars where applicable.

All cut-outs and openings, or equipment specified or detailed to hold stainless steel insert pans, shall be provided with a hinged stainless steel removable night cover.

Reasonable quietness of operation of equipment is a requirement, and the Contractor will be required to replace or repair any equipment producing out-of-the-ordinary intolerable noise. This also includes providing and installing bumpers and gaskets for doors and drawers on fabricated and standard manufactured items, and sound insulation where feasible.

2.06 REFRIGERATED WALK-IN COOLERS AND FREEZERS

Walk-in cooler freezer combination to be prefabricated of modular panel construction. Of size and shape as shown on drawings. Interior ceiling height shall be a minimum of 8’- 0”. Verify all dimensions with building conditions for proper fit. Provide maximum size possible to fit available space. Walk-in shall be set on the building slab.

Materials: Insulation – All wall and ceiling panel insulation shall be 4 inches thick foamed-in-place. Urethane Foam Insulation: Rigid HFC-245fa an environmentally friendly blowing agent, over 90 percent closed cell content, nominal density of 2.2 pounds per cubic foot+0.1 CF -0. Dimensional Stability – No change from -20 degrees F to +160 degrees F. Flammability – Less than 25 flame spread and less than 450 smoke density when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 and UBC Section 1712.

Classification – Class 1, 0-25 flame spread in accord with UBC Std 42-1 (based on UL 723 which is similar to ASTM E84 the Steiner Tunnel Test); and Class “A” interior finish in accordance with NFPA 101, Section 6-2, and NFPA 255



Thermal Conductivity – Initial (K-Factor), reference ASTM C-177 shall not exceed 0.12 BTU. Aged K-Factor shall not exceed 0.13 BTU per hour per square foot per degree F. per inch thickness as test in accordance with California Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation standards.

Sheet Aluminum – ASTM B209, Alloy 5052 H34. Stainless steel sheet – ASTM A167, Type 304, No. 3 finish. Galvanized steel sheet – ASTM A525, G90. Silicone sealant – FDA approved sealant; GE 1200 or equal. Foil coated vapor farrier with woven polyethylene for added strength – ASTM E96,

or equal. PVC Membrane – 0.01 perm per ASTM E96 or less. Asphalt emulsion – ASTM D1187 clay type. Fiber Glass Reinforced Plastic Class I (FRP-X): USDA accepted, UL 790, smoke

75, fuel 5, class B flame spread less than 50.

Panel Construction:

1. Wall and ceiling panels shall be modular sandwich panel design based on completely frothed-in-place or foamed-in-place construction, without any wood, metal frame, or high density urethane frame.

2. Sheet metal facing shall be flanged ½ to ¾ inches perimeter of each sheet.

3. Corner panels and “T” panels shall be matching one piece construction including ½ inch minimum radius at all inside vertical corners.

4. Panel joints shall be sealed with double bubble PVC gasket at interior and exterior panel edges, maintaining continuity.

5. Wall panels shall be set in concealed continuous 18 gauge galvanized steel floor attachment boots at bottom of wall panels, anchored to sub-floor with drive pins, 24 inches O.C. Wall panels shall be sealed to building subfloor with continuous bead of sealant.

6. Roof panel joints shall offset or lap wall panel joints. Matching alignment of wall/roof joints will not be accepted. Typical 46” wall panels must have minimum of 2 connectors at Wall/ceiling juncture.

7. Lateral alignment of adjoining panel shall be provided by continuous tongue and groove mating edges.

8. Panels shall be rigidly coupled by 5-1/4” high strength, foamed-in-place “wing type” cam action locks, with 2-1/2” wing span for high pull-out strength, maximum 4 foot centers. Section lock ports shall be finished with PVC snap-in buttons.

9. Maximum deflection of ceiling panels shall not exceed 1/240 of the clear span under uniform loading of 20 pounds per square foot. If ceiling spans require a support system, the contractor shall submit details and structural calculations demonstrating conformance with specified requirements.

Panel Fascia:

1. Interior face of wall and ceiling panels shall be .040” white stucco embossed aluminum.



2. Exterior exposed face of panels shall be clad with 20 Ga. Stainless Steel.

3. Exterior unexposed face of panels shall be 26 Ga. Acrylume steel.

Floor:

1. All cold storage rooms shall have depressed subfloor unless otherwise specified.

2. An asphalt emulsion subfloor membrane (ASTM D 1187 clay type) shall be applied to a clean, smooth, and level concrete subfloor and covered with foil coated vapor barrier with woven polyethylene for added strength determined by ASTM-E96 joints lapped 6 inches minimum, and flash up sides of recess.

3. Floor insulation: After erection of wall panels, floors in refrigerator and freezer shall be insulated with 2 layers of 2” thick rigid closed cell urethane foam insulation. Joints shall be staggered.

4. Vapor permeable separation: 15 pound felt, protective slip sheet shall be applied over insulation, flashed up height of cove and joints lapped 6 inches minimum.

5. Interior and exterior finished base, floor and setting bed shall be furnished and installed by Others.

Doors:

1. Door opening shall be 3'-0" width in clear by 6'-8" height in clear. Door shall be flush.

2. Door shall be insulated with 4 inches thick core of same insulating material specified for wall panels. The ambient side of freezer door jamb, including threshold shall be provided with 120 Volt, 500 watt heating element, including thermostat control, factory wired to “GS” splice box located above door at interior face of wall panel.

3. Front and back of doors shall be clad with 20 ga. stainless steel. Sheet metal joints of doors and door frames shall be heliarc welded, ground smooth and polished.

4. The threshold shall be removable 1/8” thick stainless steel plate Type 304 #2B.

5. Provide 14 inch by 24 inch, tempered hermetically sealed triple panel glass vision panel in prefabricated refrigerator and freezer door. Each door vision panel shall be furnished with 120V electrically conducting, transparent tin coating on interior face of ambient panel connected to main door circuit.

6. Each door shall have interior and exterior kickplates of 16 ga. Stainless steel (Type 304, #4) and shall be 3’-0” high and full width of door.

7. Three hinges, each door, shall be nylon cam stainless steel pin, zinc die cast, polished chrome finish.

8. Door latch shall be bright polished chrome finish with deadbolt that can be independently locked with either key or padlock. Locking mechanism with inside release knob is mounted on the frame side of the door opening and includes no moving parts through the frame. This design eliminates possibility of lock freeze-up. Locking mechanism has no exposed fasteners to give maximum tamper resistance. Locked door can be opened from the inside. Gasket shall be extruded polyvinyl chloride with corners vulcanized and continuous magnetic core at sides and head of doo jamb.



9. Each door will be provided with a Dictator Model V1600 chrome finish hydraulic cylinder wheel and hook door closer.

10. Sill wiper shall be extruded neoprene secured by removable stainless steel retainer strip and stainless steel fastener. (Dual wiper to be provided at freezer).

11. Hardware shall be mounted with reinforced steel tapping plates and stainless steel machine screws.

12. Interior door cart bumper bar shall be ¼” x 2” aluminum channel, 3’-0” A.F.F.

13. Interior door jamb guards of 16 ga. Stainless steel.

14. Provide strip curtains on each door.

15. Freezer door fan switch built into door head.

Light Fixtures and Switches:

1. Quantity of light fixtures shall be as indicated on the Food Service Equipment Electrical Plan.

2. Light fixtures shall be 48” long LED Vapor Proof ceiling mounted fixtures including two 4000K color temperature LED strips, where shown on plans. (120V,39W)

3. Provide vapor tight cast junction box galvanized steel nipple of proper length and “EY” seal off (by electrical contractor) to terminate at exterior of roof panel.

4. Interior and exterior 3-way presswitch w/pilot lights (120V).

Digital Thermometer and Alarm and Automatic Light Control: Each refrigerated compartment shall be monitored by a Modularm Model 75LC multi-monitor as manufactured by Kitchen Brains, www.kitchenbrains.com. 75LC to include the following:

Built-in audible alarm for on-premise annunciation and built-in dry contacts for remote notification capability for all alarm conditions. Alarm Relay: N/O & N/C dry contacts, 1A@28VDC

Line voltage operation with built-in transformer power supply. Power Requirement: 120VAC,30mA.

Built-in rechargeable battery backup with built-in recharging circuitry to maintain operation in a power failure and to provide backup to low voltage peripherals.

Energy Independence and Security Act Compliant timed compartment 3 & 4 way light switch capability. plus manual light control. (When so utilized, standard light switches are not required.) Light Relay: 8.3A @120VAC

HI-LO temperature alarm with Autoset function to automatically adjust set points for a cooler or a freezer.

Door ajar alarm. Manual and automatic panic alarm. AC failure alarm. Built-in data/communications port for wired or wireless communication, data

logging, email and text message alarm notification (requires 75LC Communicator) and system expansion.



Magnetic contacts (low voltage) to sense compartment door status for door ajar alarm and to provide automatic lights on switch function when a door is open. Multiple magnetic contacts to be provided for each door for multi-door compartments. Multiple magnetic contacts connect in series to 75LC.

IP-1 Illuminated Push Button(s) (low voltage), mounted inside of walk-in near the door(s), to provide light switch function inside of the walk-in and to also provide both manual and automatic panic alarm function. IP-1’s to include low voltage illumination means and will remain lit at all times, both when AC power is present or when power failure occurs to help personnel inside the walk-in find the door during a power outage. IP-1 push button(s) to include audible and visual annunciation to provide warning to personnel inside the walk-in that lights will turn off if the IP-1 is not pressed. Multiple IP-1’s to be provided for each door for multi-door compartments to integrate with 75LC timed lighting function and to replace conventional 3 and 4 way light switching. Multiple IP-1’s connect daisy chained in parallel to 75LC.

75LC enclosure to be provided with two separate conduits to the top of the walk-in,

properly sealed, for separation of line voltage and low voltage wiring.

Trim:

1. Tolerance gaps between face of cold room walls and building walls/ceiling shall be finished with matching sheet metal angles.

2. Space between suspended ceiling and top of refrigerator shall be enclosed with matching sheet metal panels designed for easy removal to facilitate access to crawl space (dimensions permitting).

Coil Supports:

1. Coil support rods of 1/2" diameter threaded nylon with stainless steel nuts and washers for support of the evaporator coils shall be provided.

Utility Penetrations:

1. Each trade to provide penetrations at refrigerator and freezer wall and ceiling panels to accommodate electrical, refrigeration lines and drain lines. All electrical penetrations to the ambient require “RY” seal off.

Escutcheons:

1. Provide sufficient quantity of 4” square blank stainless steel escutcheons to trim all interior and exposed exterior penetrations.

2. Cut proper size hole in blanks and panel penetrations not furnished by the Manufacturer.

Pressure Relief Vent:

1. Factory mount in head section, electrically heated vacuum pressure relief vent above each freezer door. (If stainless steel exterior panel, provide stainless steel vent cover). Where conduit penetrated the ceiling panel, electrical contractor to provide “EY” seal off.

Electrical: 120/60/1



2.07 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

The outdoor air-cooled, refrigeration system is to be U.L. Listed and will be located in the service yard at ground level in location as shown on drawings. This unit includes the outdoor weather housing, compressors, copper finned condenser core if project is within 6 miles of the ocean, electrical control panel, all housed within a single assembly and the evaporator coil assemblies, all with the required options and accessories. All of the component parts, options and accessories will be provided, mounted, piped and wired, as required by the manufacturer. The system shall be manufactured to operate at 208-230 volts/3 phase/60 hertz. The refrigeration system shall have the following compressors and evaporator coils:

B. FRAME AND HOUSING

The outdoor weather shall include a welded, de-burred and cleaned structural steel frame made of 12 gauge. The exterior housing and access doors will be manufactured of a minimum of 16 gauge galvanized steel which has been assembled and cleaned. The frame and shall be painted with a primer coat of epoxy based paint and finished with a coat of polyurethane acrylic enamel.

C. COMPRESSOR SYSTEMS

All compressors will be Copeland Hermetic and/or Semi-Hermetic style. All medium compressors will be manufactured to operate with R-448A refrigerant; low temperature compressors will be manufactured to operate with R-448A refrigerant.

Each Compressor system shall be filled with refrigerant compatible refrigeration oil by the manufacturer and will include discharge and suction line vibration eliminators, oil separator, dual pressure control with stainless steel braided control piping, liquid line filter-dryer, moisture indicating sight glass and water regulating valve and if system water pressure is over 150 psig a high-pressure system of 450 psig is needed. Each of these systems shall also include a receiver tank capable of accepting all of the system refrigerant without exceeding 90% of its volumetric capacity. Each receiver will be provided with a pressure relief vent and, at its inlet and outlet, a roto-lock isolation valve with a service port. Additionally, all compressor systems that will operate at suction temperatures below 0° F shall include a suction line accumulator and compressor body cooling fan. All of the internal refrigeration piping is to be held in place with Uni-Strut channels and clamps and protected with neoprene grommets. A minimum of 1/2 inch thick insulation shall cover all suction lines and suction line accumulators. D. CONDENSER SYSTEMS

The condenser system shall include a multi-circuited condenser using 3.8” riffled tubing, 1/3 horsepower “or larger” condenser “EC” type fan motors with 20 inch fan blades mounted in a venturi contoured air scoop protected by plastic coated fan guards, and flooded head pressure controls. The condenser core will be made of copper fins to retard salt air deterioration if within 6 miles of the ocean otherwise the aluminum fins to be Gold Coated. The compressors and condenser circuits shall be sized to operate at an average temperature differential between the ambient and condensing temperatures of 10F for low temperature and 15F for medium temperature.



E. CONTROL PANEL

The exterior mounted, weather tight, electrical control panel will be manufactured of 16 gauge galvanized steel which has been assembled, welded, de-burred and cleaned. The control panel shall be protected by an exterior mounted NEMA 3R rated fused disconnect switch and will include a removable cover, circuit breakers, start capacitors, and fan cycle control thermostats for each of the condenser fan motors. A wiring diagram of the refrigeration system shall be provided and mounted inside of the refrigerated system. All internal wiring shall be shown on the wiring diagram.

F. EVAPORATOR COILS

The evaporator assemblies, and the parts associated with them, will be mounted inside of the walk-ins. Each evaporator coil shall include EC fan motors, a thermostatic expansion valve, liquid line solenoid valve and thermostat piped, mounted and wired by the manufacturer.

G. INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

The refrigeration system shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner that conforms to all pertinent local and national codes.

H. REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR

The installing refrigeration contractor shall obtain all permits, mount evaporator coils and controls, provide and install refrigerant piping, fittings, hangers, supports, hook-up and start-up as per Manufacturer’s Procedures, notes on R-1 drawing and Start-up Procedure. The Preparation and Start-Up Procedure shall be filled out, signed and returned to the manufacturer within ten (10) days of start-up.

All copper tubing shall be refrigerant grade type L ACR. Sil-Fos 15 solder shall be used. After the system and evaporator coils have been connected, the balance of the system shall be leak tested with all valves open. The complete system shall be evacuated to a vacuum of 1500 microns absolute pressure. At this point the vacuum will be broken by the introduction of refrigerant into the system. Each system shall be fully charged with R-448A refrigerant. This contractor shall be responsible for testing and adjusting each compressor/condensing system to make the total system operational and demonstrate the operation to owner’s representatives.

This contractor shall provide a drain line heater for each evaporator coil located within a compartment with an operating temperature at or below + 32° F. After installation of the drain line heater the condensate drain line shall be wrapped with 1/2 inch of armaflex insulation.

All refrigeration suction lines shall be wrapped with cellular type insulation. The insulation for systems with an evaporating temperature of + 25° F or higher shall be a minimum of 1/2 inches thick. Systems with an evaporating temperature below +25°F shall be wrapped with a minimum of 3/4 inch thick insulation and 1 inch thick insulation on lines below -0 F. The insulation shall fit the tubing snugly, with no gaps, and shall be applied and sealed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

All refrigeration suction lines shall have 'P' traps as close to the exit of the evaporator coils as possible and at the bottom of all vertical rises. If the vertical rise exceeds 20 feet an additional 'P' trap shall be installed every 15 feet and a reverse trap at the top of the line.

The refrigeration piping shall be sloped downward, from directly above each evaporator coil to the area where the piping rises to meet the remote refrigeration system, 1 inch for each 20 feet of horizontal distance.



UTMOST CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO PREVENT MOISTURE FROM GETTING INTO THE REFRIGERATION SYSTEM. Do not leave the system open to the atmosphere for longer than 15 minutes. The maximum content after complete installation shall be no more than 80 parts per million (PPM). After running the system the system moisture level shall be no more than 10 PPM.

I. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR

The electrical contractor shall provide power to the refrigeration system and all control and defrost wiring as called for in the manufacturer’s wiring diagrams. This contractor shall also connect the condensate drain line heaters at the electrically defrosted evaporator coils. All electrical wiring shall be in accordance with the RDT wiring diagrams and all local codes.

J. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR

The plumbing contractor shall provide type 'L' copper condensate drain lines for the evaporator coils in all walk-ins, pitched 1/4 inch per foot of run. Condensate drain lines shall have a 'P' trap, outside of the refrigerated space as close to the floor sink as possible. This contractor shall provide water piping to the refrigeration system supply and return. The water supply shall be at a maximum pressure of 125 pounds and at a flow rate as indicated on the refrigeration schedule drawings. A manual shut-off valve shall be installed by this contractor for both the water supply and return lines. In the main supply the rack manufacturer will pipe in a cleanable water strainer. All plumbing installation shall be in accordance with local codes.

K. GENERAL CONTRACTOR

The general contractor shall provide a level platform for the refrigeration system, all roof and wall penetrations, all required concrete coring and will seal and make weather tight all of these items. This contractor shall provide all lifting services for the refrigeration system and all other required materials. All of this contractors work shall be in accordance with the plans and specifications and the manufacturer’s refrigeration drawings and in accordance with all local codes and Dept. of Energy’s requirements.

2.8 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

A. The Fire Protection System (System) shall be wet chemical and comply with NFPA 17A & NFPA 96 as well as all other prevailing national, state and local codes.

B. The System shall be UL 300 Listed, installed per the Manufacturer’s listing, and be capable of

automatic and/or manual activation. Automatic activation shall be provided by fusible link detectors and/or a connection with another fire and/or alarm system. Manual activation shall be provided by manual pull station(s).

C. Manual pull station(s) to be recessed in the wall whenever possible, installed per the location

shown on the drawings at a height between 42” and 48 “above the finished floor. D. Provide system design and drawings for approval prior to installation of the system. E. Exhaust hood manufacturer to provide all exhaust hood penetrations, listed seals and piping in

the hood. No exceptions. F. All exposed piping shall be stainless steel, chrome plated or sleeved. Run unexposed piping

wherever possible. Horizontal piping within the canopy is not acceptable. G. Provide all appliance, duct and plenum protection nozzles.



H. Provide (1) each single pole double throw mechanically actuated electrical switch with dry contact points rated at 28 VDC, 50 mA to be used to facilitate the connection to:

Life Safety Alarm System signaling upon system actuation. I. Provide (3) each single pole double throw mechanically actuated electrical switch with dry contact

points rated at 250 VAC, 21A to be used to facilitate the connection to: Shunt all electrical power in the hazard area upon system actuation. Shunt all electrical power to the makeup air fan and compensating air fan (if applicable) upon

system actuation. Shunt all electrical power to the electrical gas valve if applicable upon system actuation. J. Provide an electrical gas shut off valve and reset relay to shunt the gas supply in the hazard

area upon system activation. Verify the size and location of the valve with Division 22 Plumbing. Division 22 Plumbing to install the gas valve.

K. Provide Y Strainer(s) with 40 mesh stainless steel screen, (for the protection of the gas shut off

valve(s)), on the inlet side, as close to the valve as possible. See General Conditions Y Strainer for more detail.

L. Provide field distribution piping, field installed conduit, supports, and A-PC style fusible links. All

field piping shall be installed by a certified and licensed contractor. M. Provide kitchen with durable plastic signage at each manual pull station and on each exhaust

hood that identifies the associated manual pull station(s) with associated exhaust hood(s). N. Provide a full system test in the presence of the Authority Having jurisdiction (AHJ). Upon

successful completion of such test and authorization from the AHJ, arm and tag the system as compliant and approved for use.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROJECT SUPERVISION

A. A competent supervisor, representing the General Contractor, shall be present at all times during progress of the General Contractor's work.

B. The K.E.C. shall provide a competent Project Manager for the installation portion of the project. The Project Manager shall be responsible for supervision of proper equipment installation and to consult with General Contractor regarding final MEP connections provided by their (G.C.) trades/ subs.

3.02 SITE EXAMINATION

A. Verify site conditions under the provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and applicable provisions of Division 1 Sections. Notify the Architect, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions for proper installation of foodservice equipment.

B. Verify wall, column, door, window, and ceiling locations and dimensions. Fabrication and installation should not proceed until dimensions and conditions have been verified and coordinated with fabrication details.

C. Verify that wall reinforcement or backing has been provided, and is correct for wall supported equipment. Coordinate placement dimensions with wall construction Section.

D. Verify that ventilation ducts are of the correct characteristics, and in the required locations.

E. Verify that utilities are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the required locations.

3.03 INSTALLATION

Sequence installation and erection to ensure correct mechanical and electrical utility connections are achieved.

Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securely in place, leveled and adjusted to correct height. Anchor to supporting substrate where indicated, and where required for sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation. Conceal anchorages wherever possible. Adjust counter tops and other work surfaces to a level tolerance of 1/16 inch (maximum offset, and plus or minus on dimension, and maximum variation in 2'-0" run from level or indicated slope). Provide anchors, supports, bracing, clips, attachments, etc., as required to comply with the local seismic restraint requirements. The Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Kitchen Equipment, as prepared for the Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles and endorsed by S.M.A.C.N.A., should be followed.

Complete field assembly joints in the work (joints which cannot be completed in the shop) by welding, bolting-and-gasketing, or similar methods as indicated and specified. Grind welds smooth and restore finish. Set or trim flush, except for "T" gaskets as indicated.

Provide closure plates and strips where required, with joints coordinated with units of equipment.

Provide sealants and gaskets all around each unit to make joints airtight, waterproof, vermin-proof, and sanitary for cleaning purposes.



Joints up to 3/8 inch wide, to be stuffed with backer rod, to shape sealant bead properly, at 1/4 inch depth.

At internal corner joints, apply sealant or gaskets to form a sanitary cove, of not less than 3/8 inch radius.

Shape exposed surfaces of sealant slightly concave, with edges flush with faces of materials at joint.

Provide sealant filled or gasketed joints up to 3/8 inch joint width. Wider than 3/8 inch, provide matching metal closure strips, with sealant application each side of strips. Anchor gaskets mechanically, or with adhesives to prevent displacement.

Treat enclosed spaces, inaccessible after equipment installation, by covering horizontal surfaces with powdered borax at a rate of 4 ounces per square foot.

Insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals.

Cut and drill components for service outlets, fixtures, piping, conduit, and fittings.

Verify and coordinate the mounting heights of all wall shelves and equipment, with equipment located below them, for proper clearances.

Coordinate with the Plumbing and Electrical Divisions, and provide holes in food service equipment for plumbing and electrical service to and through the fixtures, as required. This includes welded sleeves, collars, ferrules, or escutcheons. These services are to be located so that they do not interfere with intended use and/or servicing of the fixture.

3.04 ADJUSTING

Test and adjust equipment, controls and safety devices to ensure proper working order and conditions.

Repair or replace equipment which is found to be defective in its operation, including units which are below capacity or operating with excessive noise or vibration.

3.05 CLEANING AND RESTORING FINISHES

After completion of installation, and completion of other major work in foodservice areas, remove protective coverings and clean foodservice equipment, internally and externally.

Restore exposed and semi-exposed finishes, to remove abrasions and other damages; polish exposed metal surfaces and touch-up painted surfaces. Replace work, which cannot be successfully restored.

Polish glass, plastic, hardware and accessories, fixtures and fittings.

Wash and clean equipment, and leave in a condition ready for the Owner to sanitize and use.

3.06 TESTING, START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS

Begin the start-up of equipment after service lines have been tested, balanced, and adjusted for pressure, voltage and similar considerations; and until water and steam lines have been cleaned and treated for sanitation.



Make arrangements for demonstration of foodservice equipment operation and maintenance, in advance with the Owner/Operator.

Manufacturer’s technical representative and K.E.C. shall demonstrate foodservice equipment, to familiarize the Owner and the Operator on operation and maintenance procedures, including periodic preventative maintenance measures required. Include an explanation of service requirements and simple on-site service procedures, as well as, information concerning the name, address and telephone number of qualified local source of service. The individual performing the demonstration shall be knowledgeable of operating and service aspects of the equipment.

Manufacturer’s technical representative shall provide a written report of the demonstration, to the Owner, outlining the equipment demonstrated and malfunctions or deficiencies noted. Indicate individuals present at demonstration.

Final Cleaning: After testing and start-up, clean the foodservice equipment, and leave in a condition ready for the Owner to sanitize and use.

3.07 CLEAR AWAY

Throughout the progress of their work, the Contractor shall keep the working area free from debris, and shall remove rubbish from premises resulting from work being done by them. At the completion of their work, the Contractor shall leave the premises in a clean and finished condition. PART 4 ITEMIZED SPECIFICATIONS 4.01 ITEMIZED SPECIFICATIONS

Note: All Items are to be provided by K.E.C. (Kitchen Equipment Contractor) unless otherwise Noted. Nomenclature:

N.I.C = Not in Contract O.F.C.I. = Owner Furnished Contractor Installed (G.C. to determine who the “Contractor” will be to

install Owner Furnished Equipment) O.F.O.I. = Owner Furnished Owner Installed O.F.V.I. = Owner Furnished Vendor Installed G.C. = General Contractor (fully responsible for procurement and installation) SST = Stainless Steel

Item 1 Mop Sink One (1) Required By G.C. Item 2 Shelving Two (2) Required Metro, Model Super Erecta Include: Four (4) Model 74P posts per section Five (5) Model 1848NC shelves per section (1 section) Item 3 Hand Sink One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model 7-PS-62



Item 4 Lockers One (1) Lot Required By Owner Item 5 Spare Number Item 6 Spare Number Item 7 Walk-in Cooler One (1) Required RMI Refer to specifications Section 2.6. Item 8 Cooler Coil One (1) Required RDT Refer to specifications Section 2.7. Item 9 Walk-in Freezer One (1) Required RMI Refer to specifications Section 2.6. Item 10 Freezer Coil One (1) Required RDT Refer to specifications Section 2.7. Item 11 Refrigeration System One (1) Required RDT Refer to specifications Section 2.7. Item 12 Walk-in Shelving Twenty Four (24) Required Metro, Model MetroMax Q Include: Four (4) Model MQ63UPE posts per section. Four (4) Model MQ2448G shelves per section. (12 sections) Four (4) Model MQ2442G shelves per section. (12 sections) Two (2) Model 5MPX casters per section. Two (2) Model 5MPBX casters per section. Item 13 Dunnage Racks Three (3) Required Metro, Model MHP55K3

Flavien

Cloud+

Flavien

Cloud+

IS THIS DIFFERENT THAN LOCKERS IN ARCHITECTURAL SECTION?



Item 14 Dry Storage Shelving Five (5) Required Metro, Model Super Erecta Include: Four (4) Model 74P posts per section. Five (5) Model 2448NC shelves per section (3 sections). Five (5) Model 2442NC shelves per section (1 section). Item 15 High Density Shelving One (1) Lot Required Metro, Model Super Erecta Include: One (1) Model TTS17NA track set. One (1) Model TTE24C end unit kit. Six (6) Model TTM24C mobile unit kits. Forty (40) Model 2448NC shelves. Item 16 Spare Number Item 17 Table One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model KSS-305 Include: One (1) Model APT-2020 drawer. Item 18 Table One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model KSS-305 Include: One (1) Model ADT-2020 drawer. Item 19 Mobile Food Carts One (1) Lot Required By Owner Item 20 2 Compartment Sink One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model 94-22-40-24RL Include: 10” depth at left compartment sink. Item 21 Disposer One (1) Required InSinkErator, Model SS-200 Include: #7 collar adapter kit. Model AS-101 control center. Two (2) T & S, Model 461, angle slip flanges for vacuum breaker. Item 22 Pre-Rinse w/Faucet One (1) Required Fisher, Model 53465



Item 23 Overshelf/Utensil Rack One (1) Required Custom built. Refer to details on Sheet FS5.1. Item 24 Hand Sink One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model 7-PS-62 Include: Left side splash guard. Item 25 Table w/Sink One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model KSS_307 Include: One (1) Model K-470 16” x 10” x 10” deep sink at right end of table. One (1) Model ADT-2020 drawer. Item 26 Mixer (60 qt.) One (1) Required Hobart, Model HL600 Include: Standard accessory package. Electrical: 208/60/3 Item 27 Utensil Rack One (1) Required Advance Tabco ALW-24 Item 28 Spare Number Item 29 Mobile Tables Two (2) Required Advance Tabco, Model SS-308 Include: One (1) Model ADT-2020 drawer. Item 30 Overhead Electrical Chase One (1) Required Gaylord, Model DB-CM-E3-8 Refer to details on Sheet 3FS6.12. Item 31 Spare Number Item 32 Spare Number Item 33 Spare Number Item 34 Exhaust Hood (Type I) One (1) Required Gaylord, Model ELX-GBDAV-A-AV-66 Include:



Refer to details on Sheet 3FS6.3. Size: 20’-6” long x 5’-6” wide, built in two sections. In accordance with NFPA 96, UL listed and NSF approved. Eight (8) LED lights. Pre-piped Ansul surface fire suppression system. Remote fire switch. All necessary trim and closure panels. Hanger rods, seismic restraints and accessories required for installation. Installation by a certified installer. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 35 Make-Up Air Plenum One (1) Required Gaylord, Model PBW-23 Item 36 Fire Protection System One (1) Required Ansul, Model R-102-ASEF-2T-ION Include: Refer to Sheet 3FS6.6.

Ansul Fire System factory piped wet chemical lines including duct, Plenum and appliance drops with all nozzles installed per cooking equipment arrangement on Gaylord drawings. Designed to protect the cooking shown on the drawings and listed in the specifications. All exposed chemical piping chrome plated or chrome sleeved. Includes factory pre-piped concealed detection lines with recessed detector brackets. The fire protection system and its installation shall meet NFPA 95, NFPA 17A, and all applicable local and state codes. Installation by certified installer.

Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 37 DCV Control Panel One (1) Required Gaylord, Model DCV-1 Refer to Sheet 3FS6.8. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 38 Convection Oven (Double) One (1) Required Blodgett, Model DFG-200 DBL Include: 6” casters. Gas manifold. Draft diverter. One (1) Dormont, Model 1675KITCF2S48, gas connector Electrical: 120/60/1



Item 39 Convection Oven (Double) One (1) Required Blodgett, Model DFG-200 DBL Shall be as specified for Item 38. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 40 Combi Oven/Steamer One (1) Required Convotherm, Model C4 ED 10.10GS Include: Model CST100B-4 stand. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 41 Water Filter One (1) Required Convotherm, Model Kleensteam II 9797-40 Item 42 Tilting Kettle (80 gal.) One (1) Required Cleveland, Model KGL80T Include: Model FBKT faucet mounting bracket. Model DBK faucet. Model TD2 draw-off valve. Model CHS-1 stainless steel cover. Model KAK accessory kit. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 43 Trench Drain One (1) Required BSI, Model FT-AS-NL-JLR Include: Dimensions: 30” x 36”. Fiber glass antislip grate. 3” drain. 6” depth. Item 44 Tilting Kettle (80 gal.) One (1) Required Cleveland, Model KGL80T Shall be as specified for Item 42. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 45 Trench Drain One (1) Required BSI, Model FT-AS-NL-JLR



Shall be as specified for Item 43. Item 46 Mobile Heated Cabinet One (1) Required CresCor, Model H-137-SUA-12D Include: Perimeter bumper Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 47 Wall Flashing One (1) Required Custom built. Refer to details on Sheet FS5.1. Item 48 Exhaust Hood (Type I) One (1) Required Gaylord, Model ELX-GBDAV-A-AV-66 Include: Refer to details on Sheet 3FS6.9. Size: 14’-0” long x 5’-6” wide, built in one section. In accordance with NFPA 96, UL listed and NSF approved. Five (5) LED lights. Pre-piped Ansul surface fire suppression system. Remote fire switch. All necessary trim and closure panels. Hanger rods, seismic restraints and accessories required for installation. Installation by a certified installer. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 49 Make-up Air Plenum One (1) Required Gaylord, Model PBW-16 Item 50 Fire Protection System One (1) Required Ansul, Model R-102-ASEF-2T-10N Shall be as specified for Item 36. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 51 Convection Oven (Double) One (1) Required Blodgett, Model DFG-100 DBL Shall be as specified for Item 38. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 52 Convection Oven (Double) One (1) Required Blodgett, Model DFG-100 DBL



Shall be as specified for Item 38. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 53 Open Burner Range One (1) Required Vulcan, Model V2B18B Include: Cap and cover front manifold. Less legs for dolly mounting. Model VOVER-36ST stub riser. Model VDOLLY36 dolly frame. ¾” gas pressure regulator. Common front rail. One (1) Dormont, Model 1675KITCF2S48, gas connector. Item 54 Spreader One (1) Required Vulcan, Model V118HB Specifications included in Item 53. Item 55 Steamer One (1) Required Vulcan, Model C24GA10-BSC Include: Model SMF600 scale blocker water treatment system. Basic controls. Electrical: 120/60/3 Item 56 Spare Number Item 57 Spare Number Item 58 Pre-Rinse/Faucet One (1) Required Fisher, Model 53465 Item 59 Washer/Dryer One (1) Required By Owner Item 60 Ice Machine One (1) Required Manitowoc, Model IY-0906A Electrical: 208/60/1 Item 61 Ice Bin One (1) Required Manitowoc, Model B-970 Include:



Stainless steel legs. Bin top to accommodate Item 60. Item 62 Water Filter One (1) Required Manitowoc, Model AR-PRE/AR-20000 Item 63 Trench Drain One (1) Required BSI, Model FTS-NL-JLR Include: Dimensions: 12” x 48”. Fiberglass antislip grate. 2” drain. 2” depth. Item 64 Eye Wash One (1) Required Guardian, Model G1778 Item 65 Hand Sink One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model 7-PS-62 Include: Right side splash guard. Item 66 3 Compartment Sink One (1) Required Custom built. Refer to details on Sheet FS5.1. Item 67 Wall Shelf One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model WS-12-60 Item 68 Wall Mounted Pot Rack One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model SW-60 Item 69 Mobile Pot and Pan Shelving Two (2) Required Advance Tabco, Model MetroMax Q Include: Four (4) Model MQ63UPE posts per section. Four (4) Model MQ2448G shelves per section. Two (2) Model 5MPX casters per section. Two (2) Model 5MPBX casters per section. Item 70 Soiled Dish Table One (1) Required Custom built. Refer to details on Sheet FS5.1.



Item 71 Disposer One (1) Required InSinkErator, Model SS-300 Shall be as specified for Item 21. Electrical: 208/60/3 Item 72 Pre-Rinse/Faucet One (1) Required Fisher, Model 53465 Item 73 Corner Loader One (1) Required Hobart, Model SL30 Item 74 Dishwasher One (1) Required Hobart, Model CL54eN Include: Left to right operation. Single point electrical connection. 6” higher than standard chamber. Conveyor dwell. Table limit switch Electrical: 208/60/3 Item 75 Booster Heater One (1) Required Part of Item 74. Electrical: 208/60/3 Item 76 Condensate Hood One (1) Required Gaylord, Model VH2-W-48 Refer to Sheet 3FS6.10 Item 77 Clean Dish Table One (1) Required Custom built. Refer to details on Sheet 3FS5.1. Item 78 Wall Shelf One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model WS-12-72 Item 79 Hand Sink One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model 7-PS-62



Item 80 Pass-Thru Window Trim One (1) Required Custom built. Refer to details on Sheet 3FS5.1. Item 81 Mobile Dish-up Tables Two (2) Required Custom built. Refer to details on Sheet 3FS5.1. Item 82 Spare Number Item 83 Grab & Go Cooler One (1) Required RMI Refer to specifications Section 2.6. Item 84 Cooler Coil One (1) Required RDT Refer to specifications Section 2.7. Item 85 Shelving Two (2) Required Metro, Model MetroMax Q Include: Four (4) Model MQ63UPE posts per section. Four (4) Model MQ1860G shelves per section. Two (2) Model 5MPX casters per section. Two (2) Model 5MPBX casters per section. Item 86 Gravity Shelving One (1) Lot Required Anthony International, Model GFS Include: 24” depth. 10’-0” net opening 24” x 24” white GFS Adjustable front stops. Rear stops. Slide stops. Slip sheets. Set up as gravity feed units. Five (5) product dividers per shelf. Five (5) standard packages. Item 87 Entrée Counter One (1) Required Atlas Metal BLU Include: Provide for Items 88, 89 and 90.

Plastic laminate front and end panels (color selection, PL-3 per specification section 06 4100).



One (1) stainless steel Model TS tray slide. Bottom shelf. 9’-4” length Provide cord and plug single connection for Items 88 and 89. Item 88 Hot/Cold Food Wells One (1) Required LTI, Model QSCHP-3 Electrical: 120/208/60/1 Item 89 Hot/Cold Food Wells One (1) Required LTI, Model QSCHP-3 Electrical: 120/208/60/1 Item 90 Food Guard One (1) Required BSI, Model DECO-253-N Include: 9’-0” overall length #4 brushed stainless steel finish Coordinate leg placement with counter top and counter equipment. Item 91 Grill Counter Atlas Metal, Model BLU-6 (Modified) One (1) Required Include: Provide for Items 93, 94 and 95.


One (1) stainless steel Model TS tray slide. Bottom shelf. 10’-0” length. Provide cord and plug single connection for Item 93. Item 92 Spare Number Item 93 Hot/Cold Food Wells One (1) Required LTI, Model QSCHP-3 Electrical: 120/208/60/1 Item 94 Food Guard One (1) Required BSI, Model DECO-253-N Include: 4’-8” overall length. #4 brushed stainless steel finish Coordinate leg placement with counter top and counter equipment.



Item 95 Heated Pass-Thru One (1) Required Hatco, Model GR2SDS-48D Include: Unit and inset panel color selection by Architect. Flip-up control cover. Electrical: Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 96 Pizza Counter One (1) Required Atlas Metal, Model BLU-6 (Modified) Include: Provide for Items 97, 99, 100 and 101.


One (1) stainless steel Model TS tray slide. Bottom shelf. 8’-6” length. Provide cord and plug single connection for Items 97 and 99. Item 97 Heated Shelf One (1) Required Hatco, Model GRSBF-48-I

Include: Flush mount recessed electronic control box. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 98 Spare Number Item 99 Food Guard w/Heat Lamp One (1) Required BSI, Model DECO-253-N Include: 8’-0” overall length. One section 3’-0” and one section 4’-8”. #4 brushed stainless steel finish. One (1) Model 490 warmer. Coordinate leg placement with counter top and counter equipment. Item 100 Hot/Cold Food Wells One (1) Required LTI, Model QSCHP-2 Electrical: 120/208/60/1 Item 101 Spare Number Item 102 Deli/Taco/International Counter One (1) Required Custom built. Refer to details on Sheet 3FS5.2.



Item 103 Refrigerated Sandwich Unit One (1) Required True, Model TSSU-72-18-HC Include: Model TFP-72-30-MB-ST flat insulated lids. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 104 Food Guard One (1) Required BSI, Model DECO-253-N Include: 7’-0” overall length. Single front leg in middle. #4 brushed stainless steel finish. Coordinate leg placement with counter top and counter equipment. Item 105 Hot/Cold Wells One (1) Required LTI, Model QSCHP-3 Electrical: 120/208/60/1 Item 106 Refrigerated Cold Pan One (1) Required LTI, Model DI-2037TA Include: Skirt mounted control adapter. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 107 Hot Food Wells One (1) Required LTI, Model DI-EF-2D Electrical: 208/60/1 Item 108 Food Guard One (1) Required BSI, Model DECO-253-N Include: 12’-2” overall length (customer side left to right – 3’-3”; 4’-3”; 4’-8”). #4 brushed stainless steel finish. Coordinate leg placement with counter top and counter equipment. Item 109 Reach-in Refrigerator One (1) Required True, Model STA1R-1S-HC Include: Left hinged door. Electrical: 120/60/1



Item 110 Hand Sink One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model 7-PS-62 Item 111 Spare Number Item 112 Spare Number Item 113 Spare Number Item 114 Refrigerated Salad Bar One (1) Required Atlas Metal, Model BLC-4-RM Include: Provide for Item 115.


Two (2) stainless steel Model TS tray slides. Bottom shelf. Remote compressor in base (REM-COMP). Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 115 Food Guard One (1) Required BSI, Model ZG9930-2 Include: 5’-0” overall length. 3/8” tempered glass. #4 brushed stainless steel finish. Coordinate leg placement with counter top and counter equipment. Item 116 Refrigerated Salad Bar One (1) Required Atlas Metal, Model BLC-4-RM Shall be as specified for Item 114. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 117 Food Guard One (1) Required BSI, Model ZG9930-2 Shall be as specified for Item 115. Item 118 Refrigerated Salad Bar One (1) Required Atlas Metal, Model BLC-4-RM Shall be as specified for Item 114. Electrical: 120/60/1



Item 119 Food Guard One (1) Required BSI, Model ZG9930-2 Shall be as specified for Item 115. Item 120 Refrigerated Display Case One (1) Required Structural Concepts, Model CO47R Include: Laminate exterior (color selection, PL-3 per specification section 06 4100). Roll down security cover, locking. Mirror interior end panels. Solid shelves, LED lighted. Clean sweep coil cleaner. Electrical: 208/60/1 Item 121 Refrigerated Display Case One (1) Required Structural Concepts, Model CO47R Shall be as specified for Item 120. Electrical: 208/60/1 Item 122 Milk Cooler Four (4) Required Nor-Lake, Model ARO84SSS/0-A Include: Stainless steel exterior. Stainless steel interior. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 123 Spare Number Item 124 P.O.S. Stand Four (4) Required Atlas Metal, Model BLM-BU-L-R Include: Stainless steel finish. Model TS, 36” tray slides. Ferruled hole in top (Model FH). Convenience outlet (Model CO). 7 foot power cord. Item 125 P.O.S. System Four (4) Required By Owner Item 126 Spare Number



Item 127 Spare Number Item 128 Spare Number Item 129 Spare Number Item 130 Refrigerated Display Case One (1) Required Structural Concepts, Model CO47R Shall be as specified for Item 120. Electrical: 208/60/1 Item 131 Refrigerated Display Case One (1) Required Structural Concepts, Model CO47R Shall be as specified for Item 120. Electrical: 208/60/1 Item 132 Counter One (1) Required Custom built. Refer to details on Sheet 3FS5.3. Item 133 Counter Top Shelves One (1) Required By Vendor Item 134 Heated Display Case One (1) Required Hatco, Model GR2SDS-30D Include: Unit and inset panel color selection by Architect. Controls on customer side bottom left. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 135 Undercounter Refrigerator One (1) Required True, Model TUC-27-LP-HC Include: Left hinged door Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 136 Undercounter Heated Cabinet One (1) Required Alto-Shaam, Model 500-S Electrical: 120/60/1



Item 137 Wire Shelving One (1) Required Metro, Model Super Erecta Include: Four (4) Model 74P posts per section. Five (5) Model 2460NC shelves per section. Item 138 Spare Number Item 139 Hand Sink One (1) Required Advance Tabco, Model 7-PS-62 Item 140 Counter One (1) Required Custom built. Refer to details on Sheet 3FS5.3. Item 141 Display Case One (1) Required Structural Concepts, Model CGS3830 self service Include: Stainless steel interior/exterior. Electrical: 120/60/1 Item 142 Spare Number Item 143 P.O.S. System One (1) Required By Owner Item 144 Condiment Counter One (1) Required By G.C. Item 145 Condiment Carts Two (2) Required Atlas Metal, Model CAFT-5 Include: Laminate finish (color selection by Architect). Bottom shelf. Item 146 Spare Number Item 147 Corner Guards One (1) Lot Required Custom built. Refer to details on Sheet FS5.2.

END OF SECTION

LIBRARY EQUIPMENT


SECTION 11 5100

LIBRARY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Adjustable metal bookshelf units.


A. Section 06 4100 – Custom Cabinets and Countertops: Plastic laminate materials.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for each type of library equipment specified, including details ofconstruction, relative materials, dimensions, profiles, component parts, accessories, andfinishes.


A. Obtain each type of library equipment from a single manufacturer for entire project.

B. Provide bookstack design complying with structural and anchoring requirements for seismic riskzone 2B as established by authority having jurisdiction.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Spacesaver Corp.: www.spacesaver.com.

B. Aurora Storage Products: www.aurorastorage.com.

C. Brodart Co.: www.brodart.com.

D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366, cold-rolled sheet, commercial quality, Class 1, matte finish,stretcher-leveled.

B. Fasteners: Cadmium-plated or zinc-plated steel, manufacturer's standard types and sizes.

C. Sheet Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish; minimum of 1.0-mil dry filmthickness. Color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

D. Plastic Laminate: Selected by Architect from plastic laminates as specified in Section 06 4100.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Fabricate units to be self-supporting and rigid, with fixed top and bottom shelf, and intermediateshelves adjustable in not less than 2 inch vertical increments.

B. Freestanding Units @ Library: Provide custom casework tops.

C. Standard Unit Sizes: Except as otherwise indicated, provide units of standard 30" inch nominalwidth with other dimensions as follows:1. Shelf Depths: 9 inches nominal for single-faced units, 18 inches nominal for double-faced

units.2. Unit Heights:

a. 43 inches high with 2 adjustable shelves (plus fixed base shelf).

Flavien

Cloud

Flavien

Typewritten Text

ARE WE NEEDING THESE? OR ARE WE DETAILING THESE AS CASEWORK?

Flavien

Cloud

LIBRARY EQUIPMENT


D. Steel Shelves: Design to support not less than 40 lbs. per sq. ft., with 3/16 inch maximumdeflection, but not less than 0.040 inch (20 gauge) with three 90-degree bends forming frontedge.

E. Bases, Support Panels, Tops: 0.040 inch (20 gauge) steel, minimum.

F. Tops of Units: Plastic laminate, selected by Architect from plastic laminates as specified inSection 06 4100.

G. Back Panels, Insert Panels: 0.028 inch (24 gauge) steel, minimum.

H. Exposed End Panels: Plastic laminate, selected by Architect from plastic laminates as specifiedin Section 06 4100.

I. Casters for Freestanding Units: 4-inch, heavy-duty swivel type with brake, capacity not less than600 lbs.

J. Shelf Support System: Manufacturer's standard method and detail for adjustable shelves.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide manufacturer's standard accessory and special-use items as shown or scheduled.

B. Provide manufacturer's back depth adjuster at all shelves.

C. Provide wire-type book support for attachment to shelf above; tempered rod with cadmium,chromium, or nickel-plated finish. Provide one support per shelf.

D. Provide range finders and card holders.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate work in shop to greatest extent possible, before application of finishes. Removesharp and rough edges and corners from cut metal and grind welds smooth. Designcomponents, joints, and connections to withstand most severe possible loading condition withnormal safety factor.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Set units plumb and level; use noncorrosive metal shims as required.

C. Anchor single-faced ranges less than 12 inches deep and over 42 inches in height directly tobuilding wall or partition, using manufacturer's recommended method.

D. Install adjustable shelves at equal spacings unless otherwise indicated.

3.02 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces.

B. Touch-up or replace damaged marred finishes.

C. Adjust units after installation to ensure units are level and that moving parts operate freely.

END OF SECTION

PROJECTION SCREENS


SECTION 11 5213

PROJECTION SCREENS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Front projection screen assemblies.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking in walls and ceilings.

B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Suspended gypsum board ceilings for recessedscreens, and openings in gypsum board partitions for fixed and rear projection screens.

C. Section 26 0583 - Wiring Connections: Electrical supply, conduit, and wiring for electric motoroperated projection screens.

D. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical supply, conduit and wiring for electrical motor operatedprojection screens.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts and descriptive information on each product to beused, including:1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.4. Wiring diagrams for motor operators and actuators, and controls and switches.

C. Samples: For case and frame finishes, submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size, illustrating colorand texture of finish.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer's operation and maintenanceinstructions.

E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed inOwner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than five years of documented experience.



A. Deliver projection screens to project site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging, andinspect for damage and proper size before accepting delivery.

B. Store in a protected, clean, dry area with temperature maintained above 50 degrees F, andstack in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Acclimate screens to building temperatures for 24 hours prior to installation, in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations.


A. Maintain interior of building between 60 degrees F and __ degrees F during and after installationof projection screens.

1.07 WARRANTY


B. Provide 5 year manufacturer warranty for projection screen assembly.

PROJECTION SCREENS


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Da-Lite Screen Company: www.da-lite.com.

B. Draper, Inc: www.draperinc.com/#sle.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS

A. Front Projection Screens: Factory assembled unless otherwise indicated.1. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.

B. Matte Light Diffusing Fabric: Light diffusing screen fabric; washable, flame retardant andmildew resistant.1. Material: Matte white vinyl on fiberglass backing, with nominal gain of 1.0 over viewing

angle not less than 70 degrees from axis, horizontally and vertically.

C. Masking Borders: White, on four sides.

D. Concealed-in-Ceiling Screen Cases: Steel, with integral roller brackets.1. Door Slat: Self trim; self-closing and -opening.2. Case Finish: Baked enamel.3. Case Color: To match adjacent ceiling color.4. End Caps: Steel; finished to match case.5. Electrically-Operated Screens: 1-1/2 inch aluminum door roller.

E. Electrically-Operated Screens:1. Roller: Steel, 2 inch in diameter, with locking device.2. Vertical Tensioning: Screen fabric weighted at bottom with steel bar and plastic end caps.3. Horizontal Tensioning: Tab-guided cable system.

F. Provide mounting hardware, brackets, supports, fasteners, and other mounting accessoriesrequired for a complete installation, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations forspecified substrates and mountings.

2.03 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

A. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified andindicated.

B. Motors: Direct drive, 110 V, 60 Hz.1. Screen Motor: Mounted inside roller; three wire with ground; quick reverse type and

lifetime lubricated; equipped with thermal overload cut-off, internal junction box, electricbrake, and pre-set accessible limit switches.a. Electrical Characteristics: 1.2 amps.b. Motor mounted on sound absorber.

2. Door and Adjustable Masking Motor: Mounted inside roller; three wire with ground; quickreverse type; equipped with thermal overload cut-off.a. Electrical Characteristics: 1.2 amps.

C. Controls: Three (3) position control switch with plate.1. Provide two control stations to screen, with internal override to prevent more than one

signal reaching the screen.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate is finished and ready to accept screen installation.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactorypreparation before proceeding.

C. Verify that openings for recessed screens are correctly sized.

D. Verify type and location of electrical connections.

Flavien

Note

can we add the large projection screen for the Media Center here? - and this is concealed in soffit... Basis of design: Draper 139013 Surface Material: Matt White XT1000E Diagonal Size: 10'-6" x 14' Overall Size 126" x 168" Case Length: 182"

PROJECTION SCREENS


E. Do not install projection screens until climate control systems are in place and interior paintingand other finishes are completed.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate screen installation with installation of projection systems.

B. Coordinate installation with adjacent construction and fixtures, including ceilings, walls, lighting,fire suppression, and registers and grilles.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using manufacturer's recommendedhardware for relevant substrates.

B. Do not field cut screens.

C. Install screens in mountings as specified and as indicated on drawings.

D. Install plumb and level.

E. Install electrically operated screens ready for connection to power and control systems byothers.

F. Adjust projection screens and related hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructionsfor proper placement and operation.

G. Test electrical screens for proper working condition. Adjust as needed.

3.04 PROTECTION


B. Touch up, repair, or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

LABORATORY EQUIPMENT


SECTION 11 5300


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Contractor-furnished laboratory equipment.

B. Installation of Contractor-furnished (CFCI) equipment.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Backing for wall-mounted equipment.

B. Division 26 - Electrical.


A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority HavingJurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.


A. Coordination: Coordinate installation of laboratory equipment with laboratory casework andOwner-furnished, Owner-installed laboratory equipment.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide equipment dimensions and construction, equipment capacities, physicaldimensions, utility and service requirements and locations, point loads .

C. Operation Data: Include description of equipment operation and required adjusting and testing .

D. Maintenance Data: Identify system maintenance requirements, servicing cycles, lubricationtypes required and local spare part sources.


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in thissection, with minimum three years of documented experience.


A. Package each piece of equipment to ensure protection from damage during shipment anddelivery. Legibly indicate on the exterior of each container or crate, the shipping address and abrief description of its contents. Outside of the container, fasten a waterproof envelopecontaining a packing list and complete instructions for uncrating and setting the equipment inplace.

B. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering ofpolyethylene film or another suitable material.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sterilizers:1. Flinn Scientific; UV goggle sanitizer Model #SE1000: www.flinnsci.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor furnishes and installs equipment noted as CFCI.

B. Each item energized by a single switch.

C. Prewire and prepipe each unit of equipment complete with trim and fittings. Include reducedpressure or atmospheric type backflow preventer fitting to prevent backflow of polluted water orwaste into water supply system or equipment. Conform to applicable local codes.



D. Installation Accessories: Provide all rough-in frames, anchors, supports, accessories andclosure trim required for complete installation.

E. Use corrosion-resistant materials for all rivets, bolts, nuts, studs, spacers, and welding metal.

F. Fully assemble equipment in factory, except for those items which cannot be moved to theirfinal locations as single item due to new construction space restrictions.

2.03 STERILIZERS

A. Goggle Sanitizer:1. 36 goggle or safety glasses capacity.2. Front UV light viewing screen.3. Cleansing timer. Lockable case with door switches for automatic shut off upon opening.4. Long life, high intensity ultraviolet lightbulb #SE 1001.5. Cabinet of 24 gauge steel with baked enamel finish.

2.04 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

A. Lab Coat Hook: Heavy-duty chrome-plated double steel hooks, mounted on aluminum backplate, 6 hooks per unit.1. Basis of Design: Safco Wall Rack Coat Hook, Six Hook, Model #4162.2. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utility connections, rough-in frames, anchors and supports are accurately placed anddeliver building services at specified characteristics and/or within acceptable functional ranges.

B. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installationtolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of equipment noted as OFCI or CFCI is by Contractor. Coordinate with equipmentfurnished and/or installed by Owner.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install in accordance with standards required by authority having jurisdiction.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation.

B. Adjust moving parts for smooth, near silent, accurate sash operation with one hand. Adjustsashes for uniform contact of rubber bumpers. Verify that counterbalances operate withoutinterference.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean finished surfaces, including both sides of glass; touch up as required; and remove orrefinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Provide reasonable protective measures to prevent casework and equipment from beingexposed to other construction activity.

END OF SECTION

LABORATORY FUME HOODS


SECTION 11 5313


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Bench-top laboratory fume hoods.

B. Work surfaces.

C. Laboratory cup sinks in fume hoods.

D. Service fittings and outlets.

E. Airflow indicators and alarms.

F. Piping within fume hoods for service fittings.

G. Wiring within fume hoods for light fixtures, other electrical devices, and fan switches.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and nailers for anchoring fume hoods.

B. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Casework: Base cabinets for fume hoods.

C. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Reinforcements in metal-framed partitions foranchoring fume hoods.

D. Division 22 - Plumbing: Connections to fume hood sink.

E. Division 23 - HVAC: Connection for exhaust.

F. Division 26 - Electrical: Connection to fume hood light fixtures and power.


A. ASHRAE Std 110 - Methods of Testing Performance of Laboratory Fume Hoods; 2016.

B. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel StainlessSteel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2016.

C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless SteelSheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.

D. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2016.

E. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2014.

F. ASTM D256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance ofPlastics; 2010.

G. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2014.

H. ASTM D4101 - Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials;2014, with Editorial Revision (2016).

I. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2016.

J. NFPA 45 - Standard on Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals; 2015.

K. SEFA 1 - Laboratory Fume Hoods; 2010.

L. SEFA 2 - Installations; 2010.

M. UL 1805 - Standard for Safety Laboratory Fume Hoods and Cabinets; 2006.


A. Coordination: Coordinate installation of fume hoods with laboratory casework and otherlaboratory equipment.



B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the workof this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide fume hood exterior and interior dimensions and construction, utility andservice requirements and locations.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, large scale plans, elevations, cross sections, rough-in andanchor placement dimensions and tolerances, clearances required, locations and types ofservice fittings.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of exterior finish surfaces, 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating colorand finish.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. Provide documentation of successful Factory Acceptance Testing.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation requirements.

G. Operation Data: Include description of equipment operation and required adjusting and testing.

H. Maintenance Data: Identify system maintenance requirements, servicing cycles, lubricationtypes required and local spare part sources.

I. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have beencompleted in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

J. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed utility connections.



B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and withminimum three years of documented experience.

C. Pre-Construction Testing: Factory-test each type of hood as per referenced standard.


A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering ofpolyethylene film or another suitable material.


A. Ambient Conditions: Maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during andafter installation of fume hoods.

1.09 WARRANTY


B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for manufacturer's standard items (listed by partnumber in manufacturer's official publication).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fume Hoods:1. Kewaunee Scientific Corp: www.kewaunee.com.2. Basis of Design: AMS, The Eliminator 100 Series, Model EH-111-48:

www.airmastersystems.com.3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 CONSTANT AIR VOLUME (CAV) FUME HOODS

A. Bypass Fume Hoods:



1. Include a built-in compensating bypass arrangement to maintain constant exhaust volumeregardless of sash position.


A. Fume hoods conforming to the following when tested according to ASHRAE Std 110:1. As-Manufactured (AM) Rating: AM 0.01 (0.01 ppm).2. As-Installed (AI) Rating: AI 0.10 (0.10 ppm).3. Average Face Velocity: 100 FPM (0.51 m/s) plus or minus 10 percent with sashes fully

open.4. Face-Velocity Variation: Not more than 10 percent of average face velocity across the

face opening with sash(es) fully open.5. Release Rate: 4.0 L/min.6. Static-Pressure Loss: Not more than 1/2-inch w.g. (124 Pa) at 100 FPM (0.51 m/s) face

velocity with sash fully open when measured at four locations 90 degrees apart around theexhaust duct and at least three duct diameters downstream from duct collar.

2.04 FUME HOODS

A. General Requirements:1. Conform to SEFA 1.

B. Fume Hood:1. Ventilation: Constant Air Volume (CAV).2. Configuration: Standing-height; bench mounted.3. Nominal Interior Height: 48 inches.4. Sash Type: Vertical rising.

a. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.b. Leak-free enclosure box, manufacturer's standard construction, for vertical rising

sash.c. Glazing: Laminated safety glass.d. Sash Guides: Corrosion-resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) track.e. Vertical Sash mechanism: Designed to prevent sash drop in case of mechanism

failure.1) Cable: Minimum 3/32 inch (2 mm) thick stainless steel of construction standard

with the manufacturer.f. Vertical Sash Pull: Type 316 stainless steel, with No.4 finish.

5. Top Front Panel: Standard integral grille stamped into panel of same materials as fumehood exterior.

6. Exterior: Sheet steel.a. Color/Finish: Powder Coat finish to match Architect's sample.

7. Interior Lining: Polypropylene.a. Color/Finish: White.

8. Service Fittings and Fixtures:a. Cup Sink : Drop-in Polypropylene, complete with removable stainer and waste fitting.

1) Shape: Oval.2) Size: 3 inches by 9 inches (75 by 228 mm).

b. Natural Gas Fitting Assembly: Model: ________ manufactured by __________.c. Vacuum Outlet Fitting Assembly: Model: ________ manufactured by __________.

9. Access Panels: Provide removable panels on both sides hood exterior and interior liningpanels.

10. Work Surface:a. Work Top for Fume Hoods Other Than Floor-mounted Type: Epoxy resin.

1) Edge: Raised rim with rounded edges and corners.

C. Fume Hood Base Cabinets:1. Exterior construction: Type indicated on drawings.2. Material: Wood.3. Color/Finish: As indicated on drawings.



D. Light Fixtures: UL labeled, vaporproof, one-tube, T-8 fluorescent light fixtures. Number andlength of fixtures as necessary for fume hood width. Mounted above sealed safety glass panel. White baked-enamel finish on fixture interior.1. Average Interior Illumination Level: 80 footcandles.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. General: Assemble fume hoods in factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble fume hoodsonly as necessary for shipping and handling limitations, or as necessary to permit movementthrough a 35 inches by 79 inches clear door opening.

B. Steel Exterior: Fabricated from steel sheet, 0.048 inch thick, with component parts screwedtogether to allow removal of end panels, front fascia, and airfoil and to allow access to plumbinglines and service fittings. Chemical-resistant finish applied to interior and exterior surfaces ofcomponent parts before assembly.

C. Ends: Fabricated with double-wall end panels. Close area between double walls at front offume hood and as needed to house sash counterbalance weights, utility lines, andremote-control valves.

D. Lining Assembly: Unless otherwise indicated, assembled with stainless-steel fasteners orepoxy adhesive, concealed where possible. Joints sealed by filling with chemical-resistantsealant during assembly.1. Punched fume hood lining side panels for service fittings and remote controls. Removable

plug buttons for holes not used for indicated fittings.

E. Rear Baffle: Same material as fume hood lining unless otherwise indicated, at rear of hood withopenings at top and bottom, with corrosion-resistant fasteners. Fabricated for removal tofacilitate cleaning behind baffle.

F. Exhaust Plenum: Full width of fume hood, sized and configured to provide uniform airflow, ofsame material as hood lining, and with duct stub for exhaust connection.1. Duct-Stub Material: Epoxy-coated steel unless otherwise indicated.

G. Airfoil: At bottom of fume hood face opening, with 1 inch gap between bottom of airfoil and worktop. Sash to close on top of airfoil. Designed to direct airflow across work.1. Fabricated from 14 gage, 0.0781 inch stainless steel with No.4 finish.

H. Ceiling Extensions: Filler panels matching fume hood exterior to enclose space above fumehoods at front and sides of fume hoods, and extending from tops of fume hoods to ceiling. Flange, notch, and reinforce ceiling extensions as required for rigidity. Fabricate to formwell-fitting closures, free from oil-canning.1. Provide bottom-hinged access panels within the front ceiling extension filler panel to

facilitate access to light fixture and other fume hood components at top of hood not readilyaccessible by other means.

I. Conform to requirements in other sections for factory installation of water and laboratory gasservice fittings, piping, electrical devices, and wiring. Securely anchor fittings, piping, andconduit to fume hoods, unless otherwise indicated.

2.06 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, conforming to ASTM A1008/A1008M;matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher-leveledstandard of flatness.

C. Polypropylene: Unreinforced polypropylene conforming to ASTM D4101, Group 01, Class 1,Grade 2.

D. Laminated Safety Glass: ASTM C1172.

E. Polycarbonate Glazing: Clear, uncoated polycarbonate sheet manufactured by extrusionprocess and conforming to the following requirements:



1. Impact Resistance: 12 to 16 foot-pounds of force per inch according to ASTM D256,Method A.

2. Elongation and Modulus of Elasticity: 110 percent maximum and 340,000 pounds persquare inch, respectively, according to ASTM D638.

3. Heat Deflection: 270 degrees F at 264 pounds per square inch according to ASTM D638.4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less according to ASTM E84.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel, where exposed to fumes.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Airflow Monitors/Indicators and Alarms: Provide each fume hood with an airflowmonitor/indicator complete with an audible and visual alarm that activates when airflow sensorreading is outside of preset range.1. Source: Fume hood manufacturer.2. Airflow Monitor/Indicator Functionality:

a. Type: A sensor module that monitors fume hood face velocity, and a display modulethat presents data as digital readout.1) Input power: 9 to 30 V AC/DC. Include power supply module or functionality.2) Display Range: 0 to 1,000 FPM.3) Alarm Condition Range: 0 to 200 FPM.4) Mounting: Flush.5) Readings: Remote sensor inserted in airflow stream.6) Accuracy: Maximum plus or minus 5 percent of set point.7) Visual Status Display: Green, yellow, and red LEDs.8) Airflow Display: Digital display of face velocity reading.9) Operating temperature: 55 to 86 degrees F .

3. Airflow Alarm functionality: Audible (85 dB @ 4 inch distance), and visual alarm thatactivates when airflow sensor reading is outside of preset range.a. Reset and test mode.b. Programmable Switch: Designed to silence audible alarm and automatically reset

when airflow returns to within preset range. Warning light to stay on when alarm issilenced.

c. Capability for realtime graphic displays using network software or fr direct connectionto a BMS system.

d. Alarm included as an integral feature of the airflow monitor/indicator.

B. Fume Hood Controller: Airflow Indicator/monitor with built-in electronics to control a dedicatedexhaust fan and/or exhaust valve.1. Fume hood manufacturer's standard controller.

2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Factory testing of each type of fume hood.

C. Non-Conforming Work: See Section 01 4000.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support fume hoods by fieldmeasurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installationtolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fume hoods.




3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fume hoods according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install level,plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims, and securely anchor to building andadjacent laboratory casework. Securely attach access panels but provide for easy removal andsecure reattachment. Where fume hoods abut other finished work, apply filler strips and scribefor accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.

B. Conform to indicated requirements for installing water and laboratory gas service fittings, andelectrical and telecommunications devices.1. Install fittings according to shop drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2, and

manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink and work top-mountedfittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or work-top material. Securelyanchor fittings to fume hoods.


A. Field test fume hoods as specified below.1. General: Test fume hoods as installed to assess airflow velocity. Perform tests with static

mode (set sash position) conditions. Conduct testing as outlined below for 100% of the hoods provided in the Project.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts for smooth, near silent, accurate sash operation with one hand only. Adjustsashes for uniform contact of rubber bumpers. Verify that counterbalances operate withoutinterference.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean finished surfaces, including both sides of glass; touch up as required; and remove orrefinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate proper operation of fume hoods and their accessories to Owner's designatedrepresentative.

END OF SECTION

CURTAINS AND TRACKS


SECTION 11 6143

CURTAINS AND TRACKS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Curtain fabrics

B. Curtain track support systems.


A. Division 26 - Electrical: Conduit from electric circuit to operator and from operator to controlstation.


A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and SteelHardware; 2016a.

B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) orZinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

C. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition.

D. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority HavingJurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

F. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2015.

G. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.


A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of thework of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide for each type of product as follows:1. Band Room Curtains: Provide information on type of curtain, weight, location for use on

project, and type of flame retardancy.2. JROTC Curtain: Provide information on type of curtain, weight, location for use on project,

and type of flame retardancy.3. Tracks: Provide capacity of each curtain track to support curtain weight and control curtain

operation.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate installation information for components not dimensioned or detailed inproduct data.1. Submit floor plans, elevations, sections, attachment details of curtains and operating

clearances.2. Submit fabric assembly and support details.3. Submit documentation indicating load capacity of each batten, track, attachment, and

rigging components.4. Submit attachment locations for mid-auditorium curtain, and corresponding loads imposed

on structure.5. Submit locations of equipment components, switches, and controls; identify between

manufacturer installed and field installed wiring.6. Submit wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Selection Samples: Submit color chart for each type of stage curtain indicated that includes fullrange of colors, textures, and patterns available, along with 12 inch square fabric sample, in anycolor, of each fabric type and seam.

CURTAINS AND TRACKS


E. Verification Samples: Submit fabric full width by at least 12 inch long section of each selectedfabric from dye lot to be used for this work, with specified treatments applied and showingrepeat of patterns; mark top and face of fabric.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For stage curtains and rigging operations.

G. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have beencompleted in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Designer Qualifications: Perform design of track support system under direct supervision of aProfessional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State inwhich the Project is located.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than three years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and withminimum three years of documented experience.


A. Ambient Conditions: Do not install stage curtains until spaces are fully enclosed and watertight,and the following:1. Wet work in adjacent areas is complete and surfaces are dry.2. Work at and above ceiling level has been completed.3. Ambient temperatures and humidity of adjacent areas are maintained at levels when

occupied for intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Confirm supporting structural element locations and adjacentconstruction for stage curtains and rigging, and complete field measurements prior to fabricationand include these dimensions on shop drawings.

1.08 WARRANTY


B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion.1. Defective Work includes, but is not limited to, stage curtain support and rigging that is not

operating properly.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Band Room Curtain Fabrics:1. S & K Theatrical Draperies: www.sktheatricaldraperies.com.2. Rose Brand: www.rosebrand.com.3. KM Fabrics: www.kmfabrics.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. JROTC Curtain Fabrics:1. Seattke Fabrics, Inc.: www.seattlefabrics.com.2. Rockywoods: www.rockywoods.com.3. Canvas Etc.: www.canvasetc.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Curtain Track Systems:1. H&H Specialties, 400 Series: www.hhspecialties.com.2. S & K Theatrical Draperies, Silent Steel 280 Series: www.sktheatricaldraperies.com3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

Flavien

Cloud

Flavien

Typewritten Text

SEATTLE?

CURTAINS AND TRACKS



A. Curtain Systems Design: Engage qualified designer to develop design of stage curtain system,including comprehensive project specific analysis of necessary structural system attachments incompliance with performance requirements.

B. Structural Performance: Ensure attachment of curtain system to structure withstands materialweight and operational loads applicable for this project and in compliance with local buildingcodes and authorities having jurisdiction.1. Design Loads: Weight of stage curtains and track system.

C. Fire-Test Characteristics: Curtain fabrics in compliance with NFPA 701 flame propagation firetest requirements conducted by authorized testing agency, listed by UL (DIR), ITS (DIR), or FM(AG) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.1. Permanently attach label to fabric of each curtain assembly indicating fabric treatment as

follows:

D. Electrical Components: Devices that are listed and labeled in compliance with NFPA 70, by aqualified testing agency, and marked for designated application.

2.03 CURTAIN FABRICS

A. Provide curtains of matching fabric and color from single dye lot, and when size and quantity ofcurtains exceeds maximum dye lot size, provide curtain or adjacent pair of curtains from onlyone dye lot, and arrange curtain dye lots to minimize exposure of any differences.

B. Polyester Velour: Weighing at least 20 ounces/linear yard, napped fabric of 100 percentpolyester with minimum pile height of 75 mils, 0.075 inch and minimum width of 62 inch.1. Application: Draw curtains.2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.3. Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.4. Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Ballistic Nylon: Weighing at least 15 ounces/linear yard, urethane coated nylon; 60 inchminimum width.1. Application: Draw curtains.2. Color: Black.3. Location: JROTC room.

2.04 CURTAIN TRACK

A. Steel Track: Commercial quality, roll-formed, galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, withG60 coating designation; with continuous bottom slot and each half of track in single continuouspiece; black paint finish; including support and operation accessories.1. Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer for curtain loads and operation.

B. Curtain Rails: Provide single curtain capacity as indicated on drawings, and end stops.

C. Clamp and Bracket Hangers: Steel clamps and brackets of required strength to support loadsfor attaching track to overhead support.

D. Operation:1. Manual Cord Operation: Curtain track with cord, pulleys; must manually open and close

the curtain.a. Operating Line: 3/8 inch diameter, stretch-resistant operating cord with braided

synthetic-fiber cover over solid, synthetic-fiber, linear filaments.b. End Pulleys: One single dead-end and one double live-end pulley, with sheaves

having shielded ball bearings housed in plated-steel covers that match track finish,and provide with bracket for securing off-stage end of curtain.

E. Track System: Provide heavy-duty curtain track with components as recommended bymanufacturer for loads and operation, including track end stops.1. Carriers: Standard plated-steel carriers with a pair of nylon tired ball-bearing wheels

riveted parallel to body, and equip carriers with rubber or neoprene bumpers to reduce

CURTAINS AND TRACKS


noise and plated-steel swivel eye and trim chain for attaching curtain snap or S-hook, andrequired number of curtain carriers for track length and curtain fabrication.a. Master Curtain Carriers: One plated-steel master carrier for each leading curtain

edge, with two pairs of nylon tired ball-bearing wheels and with two line guides percarrier.

2. Pulleys: One dead-end, single-wheel pulley; one live-end, double-wheel pulley; and oneadjustable pulley to maintain proper tension on operating line; each with molded-nylon-tiredball-bearing sheaves enclosed in steel housings; pulleys with steel housing finished tomatch track and with bracket for securing off-stage end of curtain.

2.05 FABRICATION - CURTAINS

A. General: Provide vertical seams unless otherwise indicated, locate vertical seams so they donot fall on faces of pleats, and only use fabric that is cut greater than half the width of fabric.

B. Vertical and Top Hems: Machine sew hems as follows, unless otherwise indicated:1. Vertical Hems: Fabricate at least 2 inch wide, and at least 4 inch wide at borders,

valances, teasers, and tormentors with at least 1 inch tuck and without visible selvedgematerial from front of curtain; sew open ends of hems closed.

2. Turnbacks: Fabricate leading-edge and trailing-edge turnbacks for traveler curtains byfolding back at least 12 inch of face fabric, with at least 1 inch tuck, and vertically securedby sewing.

3. Top Hems: Fabricate by double-stitching 3-1/2 inch wide, heavy jute or laminatedsynthetic webbing to top edge at back side of curtain with at least 2 inch of face fabricturned under.

C. Fullness:1. 50 Percent Fullness: Provide this fullness, exclusive of turnbacks and hems, and spaced

at 12 inch on center along top hem reinforcement as follows:

D. Grommets:1. Pleated Curtains: Provide grommets centered on each box pleat and placed 1 inch from

corner of curtain; for snap hooks or S-hooks.

E. Bottom Hems: Machine sew hems as follows, unless otherwise indicated:1. For Curtains With Fullness:

a. Curtains That Don't Hang to Floor: Hems at least 3 inch deep, with weight tape, 3/4inch, and open ends of hems sewn closed.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. S-Hooks: Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty plated wire hooks, at least 2 inch long.

B. Snap Hooks: Manufacturer's standard heavy-duty snap hooks, sewn into top edge of curtain.

C. Tie Lines: No. 4 or No. 4-1/2 cord or braided soft cotton tape, colored to best match curtain; atleast 5/8 inch wide by 36 inch long and threaded through grommets.

D. Support, Clamps, and Anchors: Galvanized after fabrication sheet steel, Class B in accordancewith ASTM A153/A153M; manufacturer's standard thickness.

E. Individual Curtain Bottom Weights: Curtain manufacturer's standard segmented weights incompliance with requirements for curtain type and location.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements forsupporting structural members, blocking, clearances, installation tolerances, and otherconditions that may impact performance of stage curtain assembly.

B. Examine placement and condition of inserts, clips, blocking, or other supports installed byothers and for use in supporting track and battens of stage curtain assembly.


CURTAINS AND TRACKS


3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install stage curtain assembly in accordance with curtain and track manufacturers writteninstructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION - CURTAIN

A. Track Hung: Secure curtains to track carriers with S-hooks.

3.04 INSTALLATION - TRACK

A. Mounting of Track Assembly:1. Ceiling Mounted: Provide ceiling supports for mounting track direct to ceiling structure and

within intervals indicated in manufacturer's written instructions for on center spacing.

B. Track Support Spacing: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for applied loads, andnot to exceed the following dimensions between track supports:

C. Install track for center-parting curtains with at least 24 inch overlap of track sections atcenter-line, and supported with track lap clamps.

D. Verify location of live and dead end pulleys with Architect.


A. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative.

B. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system.1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with

additional training materials as required.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed stage curtain assembly from subsequent construction operations until Date ofSubstantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT


SECTION 11 6623

GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Basketball backboards, goals, and support framing.

B. Gymnasium exercise equipment.

C. Floor anchors for tensioned elements.

D. Floor sleeves for net and goal posts.

E. Wall mounted protection pads.

F. Gym divider curtains.

G. Volleyball nets and posts.

H. Scoreboards.


A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete floor slab to receive floor sleeves andanchors.

B. Section 09 6466 - Wood Athletic Flooring: Gymnasium flooring.

C. Section 09 6566 - Resilient Athletic Flooring: Gymnasium flooring.

D. Section 12 6613 - Telescoping Bleachers.

E. Section 12 9300 - Site Furnishings: Exterior athletic equipment.

F. Division 26 - Electrical: Wiring Connections.



B. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata).

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority HavingJurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

D. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; 2015.


A. Large Components: Ensure that large components can be moved into final position withoutdamage to other construction.

B. Electrically Operated Equipment: Coordinate location and electrical characteristics of serviceconnection.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data showing configuration, sizes, materials, finishes,hardware, and accessories; include:1. Electrical characteristics and connection locations.2. Fire rating certifications.3. Structural steel welder certifications.4. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: For custom fabricated equipment indicate, in large scale detail, constructionmethods; method of attachment or installation; type and gage of metal, hardware, and fittings;plan front elevation; elevations and dimensions; minimum one cross section; utility requirementsas to types, sizes, and locations.

D. Samples: Submit samples of wall pad coverings in manufacturer's available range of colors.

GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT


E. Operating and maintenance data, for each operating equipment item.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed inOwner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified withminimum 3 years of experience.


A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original packaging with factory original labelsattached.

B. Store products indoors and elevated above floor; prevent warping, twisting, or sagging.

C. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; protect from extremes ofweather, temperature, moisture, and other damage.

1.08 WARRANTY


B. Provide warranties as listed in specific items below.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Gymnasium Equipment:1. Draper, Inc: www.draperinc.com/#sle.2. Performance Sports Systems: www.perfsports.com.3. Porter Athletic Equipment Company: www.porterathletic.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. See drawings for sizes and locations, unless noted otherwise.

B. Provide mounting plates, brackets, and anchors of sufficient size and strength to securely attachequipment to building structure; comply with requirements of contract documents.

C. Hardware: Heavy duty steel hardware, as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Electrical Wiring and Components: Comply with NFPA 70; provide UL-listed equipment.

E. Structural Steel Fabrications: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, using certifiedwelders.

2.03 DIVIDER CURTAINS

A. Gymnasium Divider Curtains:1. Curtain Material: Class A rated, self-extinguishing vinyl coated polyester meeting NFPA

101.a. Upper Section: 7 oz/sq yd vinyl mesh fabric.

1) Color: 12 Black.b. Lower Section: 18 oz/sq yd solid vinyl coated polyester.

1) Color: 12 Black.2. Operation: Vertical lift roll-up, curtain coils on bottom rail .3. Controls: Powr-Touch® 2.5 Key Pad Control System.4. Size: As indicated on drawings.5. Color: Architect to choose from manufacturer's standard range.6. Components:

a. Gym divider curtain shall be center roll-up type compactly storing to a height not toexceed 14” (35.56 cm) below structural attachment support without the use of hoistcables or belts.

b. Top and Bottom of curtain shall be fabricated with a pocket to conceal continuous,1-5/16” O.D. tubes extending the full length of the fabric to ensure proper support.

GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT


Top tube shall be supported from the overhead support structure with threadedrod-type support fitting to provide proper horizontal alignment with floor.

c. Bottom, edge of the upper section and the top edge of the lower section shall behemmed and contain a 3/16” (4.75 mm) diameter cable to fit and hold the curtainsections in a 3” O.D. (76 mm) grooved center drive anodized aluminum batten tube.

d. Upper and lower curtain sections shall roll flat and compact to the overhead storageposition by means of dual tubular-type motors (115 volt, 3.8 amp each, single-phase),gear reducer, brake mechanism concealed inside the horizontal batten tube.

e. Motors shall be equipped with up and down, push-button type limit switches and anautomatic reset, thermal overload protection.

f. Electrical power to each motor shall be accomplished by means of a self-retractingcable reel system.

g. The torque reaction of the motors shall be contained in a special, cantilevered-typetension strap mechanism that automatically retracts as the curtain is raised to thestorage position.

h. Curtain raises or lowers at a rate of approximately 26’/minute.7. Accessories:

a. Bottom Pad: Bottom support tube shall be encased in a 2-1/8” O.D., closed-cell shockabsorbing type protective foam rubber padding.

b. Line Shaft Safety Lock (No. 10796000): Curtain shall incorporate internal centrifugalforce type lock mechanism into the line shaft to automatically lock equipment iflowering speed surpasses expected and safe velocity. Two shall be required forcurtains with the line shafts exiting both sides of winch.

8. Manufacturers:a. Basis of Design: Porter Center-Roll Gymnasium Divider Curtain, Model 90208500..b. Alternate Manufacturers: Use of Gym Divider Curtain products other than the Basis of

Design products may be used upon approval of pre-bid substitution request. Approvalcriteria include, but are not limited to, aesthetic acceptability as determined by theArchitect, and whether use of a product other than the basis of design product willresult in revisions to other components of the Work.

9. Warranty: Manufacturer’s 5 year limited warranty.

2.04 BASKETBALL

A. Basketball System: Backstop assembly, backboard, and goal.

B. Ceiling-Suspended Backstop Assemblies: Capable of mounting both rectangular andfan-shaped backboards.1. Framing: Center strut; forward folding and back folding framing.2. Folding Control System: Electric hoist that folds backstop with 115 volt actuator, integral

limit switches that provide automatic shut-off in both positions, and safety catch withautomatic reset.

3. Height Adjuster: Raises or lowers assembly by 2 feet to adjust goal height.a. Height Control System: Electric hoist that adjusts backstop with 115 volt actuator,

and integral limit switches that provide automatic shut-off in both positions.4. Framing Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard selection.5. Manufacturers:

a. Forward Folding: Porter Athletic, 949 Front Fold: www.porterathletic.com.b. Back Folding: Porter Athletic, 923 Back Fold: www.porterathletic.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Backboards: Tempered glass, rectangular shaped.1. Frame: Brushed aluminum edge, steel mounting.2. Dimensions: 42 inches high by 72 inches wide3. Markings: Painted.4. Provide safety padding for bottom edge of backboard.5. Provide mounting kit.6. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard selection.

GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT


7. Manufacturers:a. Porter Athletic, Model B-208.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Goals: Steel rim, mounted to backboard, with attached nylon net; complete with mountinghardware.1. Net Attachment Device: Tube-tie.2. Breakaway mechanism, adjustable.3. Finish: Powder coat orange.4. Manufacturers:

a. Porter Athletic, Model 00256-500.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.05 FLOOR-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

A. Volley Ball Nets and Posts: Two court system of adjustable posts, net, and tensioning winchmeeting requirements for FIVB, USA Volleyball, NCAA and NFHS competition requirements.1. Posts: 3-1/2 inch O.D. schedule 80 aluminum tube with 1 inch height adjustments

between 42 and 96 inches.2. Net: 4 inch square #24 nylon cord with a 2 inch vinyl coated polyester hem, double

stitched around the perimeter.a. Top rope cable of 1/4 inch diameter nylon braided cord with a Kevlar core yarn; swag

loop on end for attaching directly to winch device.b. Size: Regulation size.c. Basis of Design: Porter Athletic, Model 2295.

3. Tensioning Winch: Power heavy duty, self-locking worm gear mechanism.a. Porter Athletic, Powr-Winch.

4. Protective Pads: Polyethylene foam covered with polyester reinforced vinyl fabric.a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard range.

5. Volleyball Post Wall Storage Rack: Porter Athletic, Model 825.6. Manufacturers:

a. Porter Athletic, Powr-Line.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Floor Sleeves for Posts: Metal sleeve, with latch cover, cast into concrete subfloor to hold polesfor nets and goals; installed flush with finish floor surface.1. Latch Cover: Brass, round; tamper resistant lock with key.2. Sleeve: Aluminum.3. Round Pole Diameter: 4 inches.4. Depth of Sleeve: 9 inches from floor surface to bottom, including latch cover.

C. Pickleball Nets and Posts: Adjustable posts and nets.1. Posts: 54 inch by 3 inch diameter, heavy-duty 11 gauge.2. Net: 36 inch high by 22 feet long, to meet USAPA requirements for size.

a. 1-3/4" square mesh braided 3.0mm polyethylene.3. Manufacturer:

a. Douglas Sports: www.douglas-sports.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.06 EXERCISE EQUIPMENT

A. Chinning Bar: Wall mounted steel bar, parallel to floor; adjustable for height.1. Bar Diameter: 1 inch.2. Steel Bar Finish: Zinc-plated.3. Steel Frame Finish: Powder coating, color as selected from manufacturer's full line.4. Provide bar that is adjustable within a 18 inch range, in 6 inch increments.5. Manufacturers:

a. Porter Athletic, Model 00197100.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT


2.07 WALL PADDING

A. Wall Padding: Foam filling bonded to backing board, wrapped in covering; each panelfabricated in one piece.1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index (FSI) of 25 or less, smoke

developed index (SDI) of 450 or less, Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84as a complete panel.

2. Covering: Vinyl-coated polyester fabric, mildew and rot resistant; stapled to back of board.a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard range.

1) Different colors may be chosen for different rooms.2) Color at Weight Room: Black.

b. Texture: Embossed leather-look.c. Custom Graphics: To be supplied by Owner.d. Fabric Weight: 14 oz/sq yd.

3. Foam: Urethane, soft, 3.5 pcf nominal density.4. Foam Thickness: 2 inches.5. Backing Board: Oriented strand board.

a. Thickness: 7/16 inch.6. Panel Dimensions: 24 inches wide by 72 inches long, including nailing margins.7. Mounting: Removable; Z-clips fixed to wall and to padding.

a. Install bottom of wall padding at 4 inches above finished floor, maximum.b. Install wall pads from 4" a.f.f. to ceiling in Quiet Rooms.

8. Manufacturers:a. Draper, Inc: www.draperinc.com/#sle.b. Porter Athletic: www.porterathletic.com.c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Specially Shaped Padding: Same construction as standard padding; custom fabricate to fitirregularly shaped members, areas, and protrusions in gymnasium as indicated; providepadding for:1. Wall corners.2. Insert pad shape for cut-outs at electrical devices..3. All walls in Quiet rooms, floor to ceiling. Wall pads to cover doors, door frame and window

frame.

2.08 SCOREBOARDS

A. Digital Indoor Basketball/Volleyball/Wrestling Scoreboard:1. Basis of Design Product: Daktronics BB-2125 single-sided.2. Dimensions: 4'-0” high, 10'-0" wide, 0'-6" deep (1219mm, 3048mm, 152mm).3. Power: 120 V AC (200 W; 1.7 A).4. Approximate hanging weight: 150 lb (68 kg).5. Construction: Aluminum.6. Display Color: From Manufacturer’s standard paint pallet..7. Warranty: 5 year guarantee..8. Location: As indicated on Drawings..9. Wireless Control Consoles:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: All-Sport 5000 control consoles as manufactured byDaktronics.1) Provide number total to correspond to number of scoreboards.2) Provide 2.4 ghz radio transmitters capable of operating on different frequencies

to allow for independent or combined use for each scoreboard.

B. Shot Clocks: Shot clock system with hand-held shot clock control switch, out-of-hands resentswitch.1. Basis of Design: Daktronics BB-2114.2. Size: 2'-4” high, 2'-5” wide, 0'-6" deep.

Flavien

Cloud+

Flavien

Cloud+

AND SENSORY ROOM

GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT


3. Power: 200 W.4. Approximate hanging weight: 35 lb.5. Warranty: 5 year guarantee.6. Location: As indicated on drawings.7. Control Console: Provide wireless with (2) 2.4 ghz wireless receivers with 5 year parts

warranty.

C. Time Clocks:1. Basis-of-Design Product: Model TI-2011 manufactured by Daktronics.

a. Four (4) total to be coordinated with Owner for location in locker rooms.b. Control Console: Provide wireless with (1) 2.4 ghz wireless receiver.

D. Carrying Case:1. Basis of Design: : Daktronics Carrying case for console and all accessories.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Take field measurements to ensure proper fitting of work. If taking field measurements beforefabrication will delay work, allow for adjustments within recommended tolerances.

B. Inspect areas and conditions before installation, and notify Architect in writing of unsatisfactoryor detrimental conditions.

C. Do not proceed with this work until conditions have been corrected; commencing installationconstitutes acceptance of work site conditions.

D. Verify that electrical services are correctly located and have proper characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with contract documents and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Coordinate installation of inserts and anchors that must be built in to flooring or subflooring.

C. Install equipment rigid, straight, plumb, and level.

D. Secure equipment with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

E. Install wall padding securely, with edges tight to wall and without wrinkles in fabric covering.

F. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic corrosion.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Verify proper placement of equipment.

B. Verify proper placement of equipment anchors and sleeves, and use actual movable equipmentto be anchored if available.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove masking or protective covering from finished surfaces.

B. Clean equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

17.05 / KENNEWICK HIGH SCHOOL 12 2000 - 1

WINDOW COVERING SCHEDULE

WINDOW COVERING SCHEDULE PART 1

ROOM NO. ROOM NAME WALL 1 WALL 2 WALL 3 WALL 4 KEY NOTES

A102 BAND - - 12 2400 -

A103 OFFICE - 12 2113 12 2400 12 2113

A108 CHOIR/VOCAL - - 12 2400 -

B100C HALLWAY 12 2113 - - - 1

B100E HALLWAY 12 2113 - - - 1

B101 STORAGE - - 12 2400 -

B104 FLEX LAB ( DRAMA &PIANO LAB)

- 12 2113 12 2400 - 1

B109 COFFEE 12 2400 12 2400 - -

B114 CONFERENCE - 12 2400 12 2400 12 2113 1

B115 PRINCIPAL 12 2113 - 12 2400 - 1

B116 ASST PRIN 12 2113 - 12 2400 - 1

B117 ASST PRIN 12 2113 - 12 2400 - 1

B118 ASST PRIN 12 2113 - 12 2400 - 1

B119 ASST PRIN 12 2113 - 12 2400 - 1

B120 WORK ROOM - 12 2113 - 12 2113 1

B122 ASB 12 2400 - - -

B123 ATHLETIC RECEPTION 12 2400 - - 12 2113 1

B124 OFFICE - - - 12 2113 1

B125 BANK - - 12 2400 -

C100 CORE LEARNING - 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

C101 CORE LEARNING - 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

C102 CORE LEARNING - 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

C104 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

C105 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

C106 FLEX LAB (MARKETING) - 12 2113 - 12 2113 1

C113 GROUP 12 2113 - - 12 2400 1

C114 GROUP 12 2113 12 2400 - - 1

D100 CORE LEARNING - 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

D101 CLASSROOM - LIFESKILLS

12 2113 12 2400 - 12 2113 1

D102 KITCHEN - - - 12 2113 1

D103 CLASSROOM - LIFESKILLS

12 2400 12 2400 12 2113 12 2113 1

D104 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

D105 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

D106 FLEX LAB (BUSINESS) - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

D107 FLEX LAB (BUSINESS) - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

D108 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

D111 CLASSROOM - AUTISM 12 2400 12 2113 - 12 2113 1

F100 CORE LEARNING 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 - 1

F101 FLEX LAB (DRAFTING) 12 2113/ 12 2400 12 2113/ 12 2400 12 2400 - 1

F102 FLEX LAB (MAKERSPACE)

12 2113/ 12 2400 12 2113/ 12 2400 12 2400 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

F103 FLEX LAB (COMPUTERSCIENCE)

12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

F104 CORE LEARNING 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 - 1

F105 CORE LEARNING 12 2113/ 12 2400 12 2400 - - 1





F106 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 12 2400 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

F107 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

F108 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

F109 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

F110 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

F111 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

F114 GROUP - 12 2113 12 2400 - 1

F115 GROUP 12 2400 12 2113 - - 1

F121 SMALL BOX - JROTC 12 2113 12 2400 12 2113 - 1

G104 ISS - - 12 2113 12 2400 1

G108 SECURITY - 12 2400 12 2400 -

G111 OFFICE - - 12 2113 -

G112 CONFERENCE 12 2400 - - 12 2400

G115 GROUP - - 12 2400 12 2400

G116 GROUP 12 2400 - - 12 2400

G117 FLEX CLASSROOM - - 12 2113 - 1

G118 TEACHER BREAK - - 12 2113 - 1

G119 SMALL BOX (3D ART) 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

G119A KILN 12 2400 - - -

G120 FLEX LAB PLUS (AG) 12 2113 - - 12 2400 1

G121 FAB (METAL SHOP) - - 12 2113 12 2400 1

H106B OFFICE - - - 12 2113 1

H106E OFFICE 12 2113 - - - 1

J100 CAREER CENTER 12 2400 12 2400 12 2400 12 2400

J102 MAIN OFFICE - 12 2113 12 2400 12 2400 1

J103 CONFERENCE - 12 2113 12 2400 12 2113 1

J105 HEALTH - 12 2113 - 12 2113 1

J106 ATTENDANCE 12 2400 - 12 2113 12 2400 1

J108B OFFICE - 12 2400 12 2113 - 1

J108D OFFICE - 12 2113 - - 1

J109A OFFICE - - 12 2113 - 1

L103 TRAINING 12 2113 12 2113 - - 1

L103A OFFICE 12 2113 - - - 1

L104 FLEX LAB (SPORTSMEDICINE)

- 12 2113/ 12 2400 12 2113 - 1

L105 CONVENIENCE STORE - 12 2113 - - 1

L106B CASHIER 12 2113 - - - 1

L106F MANAGER'S OFFICE - - 12 2113 - 1

B200 CONFERENCE 12 2113 12 2113 - - 1

B202 CONFERENCE - 12 2113 12 2400 12 2400 1

B203 CORE LEARNING 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 - 1

B204 ASC 12 2113 - 12 2400 - 1

B205 OFFICE 12 2113 12 2400 12 2400 - 1

B206 OFFICE - 12 2400 - 12 2113 1

B207 OFFICE - 12 2400 - 12 2113 1

B208 OFFICE - 12 2400 - 12 2113 1

B209 OFFICE - 12 2400 - 12 2113 1





B210 OFFICE - 12 2400 - 12 2113 1

B211 OFFICE - 12 2400 - 12 2113 1

B212 OFFICE - 12 2400 - 12 2113 1

B213 OFFICE - 12 2113 - - 1

B214 OFFICE - 12 2113 - - 1

B215 OFFICE - 12 2113 - - 1

C200 CORE LEARNING - 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

C201 CORE LEARNING - 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

C202 CORE LEARNING - 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

C204 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

C205 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

C207 GROUP - 12 2400 12 2400 -

C208 GROUP - - 12 2400 -

D200 CORE LEARNING - 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

D201 CORE LEARNING - 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

D202 CHEMISTRY 12 2400 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

D204 CHEMISTRY - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

D205 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

D206 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

D207 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

D208 SCIENCE PREP 12 2113 - - - 1

E200 SCIENCE CLASSROOM 12 2400 12 2400 12 2113 - 1

E201 SCIENCE CLASSROOM 12 2400 - 12 2113 - 1





F200 CORE LEARNING 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 - 1

F201 CORE LEARNING 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 - 1

F202 CORE LEARNING 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 - 1

F203 CORE LEARNING 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 - 1

F204 SCIENCE PREP - 12 2113 - - 1

F207 CHEMISTRY 12 2400 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

F208 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

F209 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

F210 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

F211 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

F212 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

F220 CHEMISTRY - 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

G200 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

G201 CORE LEARNING 12 2400 - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1

G202 GROUP 12 2400 12 2400 - 12 2400

G204 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

G205 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

G206 FLEX LAB (FCS) - 12 2400 - 12 2113 1

G207 FLEX LAB (FCS) 12 2113/ 12 2400 - - - 1

G208 CORE LEARNING - - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 1



GENERAL NOTES: WINDOW COVERING SCHEDULE

1. FIELD VERIFY ALL WINDOW COVERING TYPES, QUANTITIES, SIZES AND LOCATIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING AND INSTALLATION.2. PROVIDE HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS AT ALL SIDELITES OF CLASSROOM DOORS & OTHER SCHEDULED ASSEMBLIES TO BEGIN AT WINDOW HEAD AND STOP AT CENTER MULLION.3. PROVIDE WINDOW SHADES AT EXTERIOR WINDOWS AS SCHEDULED. SEE SPECS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.4. PROVIDE BLINDS ON ALL HALF-LITE DOORS NOT RECEIVING INTEGRAL BLINDS, TYP.

KEY NOTES: WINDOW COVERING SCHEDULE

1. HORIZONTAL BLINDS AT ALL CLASSROOM DOORS WITH SIDELITES.



G210 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

H200 FLEX LAB PLUS(FCS/FOOD LAB)

- 12 2400 12 2400 12 2113/ 12 2400 1

H201 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

H202 CORE LEARNING - 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

H203 FLEX LAB PLUS (2DART)

- 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 1

H204 FLEX LAB PLUS (PHOTO) 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 - 1

J200 CORE LEARNING 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 - 1

J201 CORE LEARNING 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 - 1

J202 CORE LEARNING 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 - 1

J203 CORE LEARNING 12 2113/ 12 2400 - 12 2400 - 1

Flavien

Cloud+

Flavien

Cloud+

LET'S ADD THE WALL DESIGNATION GRAPHIC WE HAVE DEVELOPED ON A9.00 FOR CONSISTENCY AND NOT USE N, S, E, W

Flavien

Ai Comment

Window Covering Schedule - Unclear which "wall" is which in each room. Develop system for referring to each wall more clearly (north, east, etc.)

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS


SECTION 12 2113


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Horizontal slat louver blinds.

B. Operating hardware.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrailbrackets.


A. WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.


A. Coordinate the placement of concealed blocking to support blinds. See Section 06 1000.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment,clearances, and operation.

D. Samples: Submit two samples, 4 inch long illustrating slat materials and finish, cord type andcolor.


F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Slats: 20 of each type and size.3. Extra Lift Cords, Control Cords, and Wands: Two of each type.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Blinds to be GREENGUARD Gold Certified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Horizontal Louver Blinds:1. Hunter Douglas Architectural: www.hunterdouglasarchitectural.com/#sle.2. Levolor Contract: www.levolorcontract.com.3. SWFcontract, a division of Spring Window Fashions, LLC.: www.swfcontract.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 BLINDS

A. Description: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail.

B. Manual Operation: Control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angleadjustable by control wand.

C. Metal Slats: Spring tempered pre-finished aluminum; square slat corners, with manufacturingburrs removed.1. Width: 1 inch.2. Thickness: 0.008 inch.3. Color: As selected by Architect.



D. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration.

E. Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware,pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats.1. Height: 1 inches.2. Color: Same as slats.

F. Bottom Rail: Pre-finished, formed steel; with end caps.1. Color: Same as headrail.

G. Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop; complying with WCMA A100.1.1. Color: As selected by Architect.

H. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; hexagonal shape.

I. Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets.

J. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Determine sizes by field measurement.

B. Fabricate blinds to fit within openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/2 inch.

C. At openings requiring multiple blind units, provide separate blind assemblies with space of 1/2inch between blinds, located at window mullion centers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners.

C. Place intermediate head supports at 24 inch on center.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy.

END OF SECTION

WINDOW SHADES


SECTION 12 2400

WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Window shades and accessories.

B. Electric motor operators.

C. Motor controls.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrailbrackets.

B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Substrate for window shade systems.

C. Division 26 - Electrical: Control requirement for motorized shades.


A. ASTM D4674 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics Exposedto Indoor Office Environments; 2002a (Reapproved 2010).

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority HavingJurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

C. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2015.

D. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

E. WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Current Edition, Including AllRevisions.


A. Coordination:1. Where motorized shades are to be controlled by control systems provided under other

sections, coordinate the work with other trades to provide compatible products.2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide rough-in of electrical wiring as required for

installation of hardwired motorized shades.

B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work related to products ofthis section; require attendance of all affected installers.

C. Sequencing:1. Do not fabricate shades until field dimensions for each opening have been taken.2. Do not install shades until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets includingmaterials, finishes, fabrication details, dimensions, profiles, mounting requirements, andaccessories.1. Motorized Shades: Include power requirements and standard wiring diagrams.

C. Shop Drawings: Include shade schedule indicating size, location and keys to details.

D. Shop Drawings - Motorized Shades: Provide schematic system riser diagram indicatingcomponent interconnections. Include requirements for interface with other systems.

E. Certificates: Manufacturer's documentation that line voltage components are UL listed or ULrecognized.

F. Source Quality Control Submittals: Provide test reports indicating compliance with specifiedfabric properties.

WINDOW SHADES


G. Selection Samples: Include fabric samples in full range of available colors and patterns.1. Motorized Shades: Include finish selections for controls.

H. Verification Samples: Minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual materials, color andpattern.

I. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,preparation, and installation of product.

J. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control systems and showinterconnecting wiring.

K. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply,and operation and maintenance instructions; include copy of shop drawings.

L. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executedwarranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in thissection, with not less than five years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this type with minimumthree (3) years of documented experience.

1.07 MOCK-UP

A. Mock-Up: Provide full size mock-up of window shade complete with selected shade fabricincluding sample of seam when applicable.1. Obtain Architect's approval of light and privacy characteristics of fabric prior to fabrication.2. Full-sized mock-up may become part of the final installation.


A. Deliver shades in manufacturer's unopened packaging, labeled to identify each shade for eachopening.

B. Handle and store shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.10 WARRANTY


B. Provide manufacturer's warranty from Date of Substantial Completion, covering the following:1. Shade Hardware: One year.2. Electric Motors: One year.3. Electronic Control Equipment: One year.4. Fabric: One year.5. Aluminum and Steel Coatings: One year.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manually Operated Roller Shades:1. Basis of Design: Draper, Inc; Clutch Operated FlexShade XD: www.draperinc.com/#sle.2. Mariak: www.mariak.com.3. Mecho Systems: www.mechoshades.com4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Motorized Roller Shades, Motors and Motor Controls:1. Basis of Design: Draper, Inc; Motorized FlexShade: www.draperinc.com/#sle.2. Mariak: www.mariak.com.

WINDOW SHADES


3. Nysan Solar Control, Inc., a division of Hunter Douglas:www.hunterdouglasarchitectural.com/windowcoverings/index.jsp.

4. Mecho Systems: www.mechoshades.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 WINDOW SHADE APPLICATIONS

A. Interior Roller Shades: Translucent and Blackout shades.1. Type: Roll down, closed position is at window sill.2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.3. Mounting: Outside (face of jambs).4. Operation: Manual and motorized, in locations indicated.

2.03 ROLLER SHADES

A. Roller Shades: Fabric roller shades complete with mounting brackets, roller tubes, hembars,hardware and accessories.1. Drop: Regular roll.2. Size: As indicated on drawings.

B. Fabric: Non-flammable, color-fast, impervious to heat and moisture, and able to retain its shapeunder normal operation.1. Translucent Shades: Soften the light and reveal only shadow-like outlines to the outside;

substantial privacy; Openness Factor less than 1 percent.2. Blackout Shades: Block virtually all the light; Openness Factor equal to zero (0).3. Flammability: Pass NFPA 701 large and small tests.

C. Roller Tubes: As required for type of operation.1. Size: Manufacturer's standard, selected for suitability for installation conditions, span, and

weight of shades.2. Fabric Attachment: Utilize extruded channel in tube to accept vinyl spline welded to fabric

edge.

D. Hembars: Designed for weight requirements and adaptation to uneven surfaces, to maintainbottom of shade straight and flat.1. Style: Exposed aluminum bottom bar, flat profile with closed ends, containing a spline

groove top to receive and secure fabric end.2. Blackout Shades: Provide a slot in bottom bar with wool-pile light seal.

E. Manual Operation for Interior Shades: Clutch operated continuous loop; beaded ball chain.

F. Motor Operation: Motor system housed inside roller tube, controlling shade movement viamotor controls indicated; listed to UL 325.1. Audible Noise: Maximum 39 dBA measured 3 feet from the motor unit; no audible clicks

when motor starts and stops.2. Motors: Size and configuration as recommended by manufacturer for the type, size, and

arrangement of shades to be operated; integrated into shade operating components andconcealed from view.

3. Motor Type: Both AC and DC motors are acceptable; provide required transformers forDC motors.

4. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the controls to be installed.

2.04 MOTOR CONTROLS

A. Motorized shades to be controlled by lighting control system and associated control devices asspecified below.

B. Control Requirements:1. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit,

boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, systemprogramming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system that provides the controlintent indicated.

WINDOW SHADES


C. Wall-Mounted Controls: UV stabilized visible parts meeting ASTM D4674; furnished with backlitbuttons; provided by shade manufacturer.1. Control Functions:

a. Open: Automatically open controlled shade(s) to fully open position when button ispressed.

b. Close: Automatically close controlled shade(s) to fully closed position when button ispressed.

c. Raise: Raise controlled shade(s) only while button is pressed.d. Lower: Lower controlled shade(s) only while button is pressed.e. Stop shade(s) in motion by tap on any button.

2. Finish: To be selected by Architect.3. Button Engraving: Manufacturer's standard engraving, unless otherwise indicated.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Fascias: Size as required to conceal shade mounting.1. Style: As selected by Architect from shade manufacturer’s full selection.2. Material and Color: To match shade.

B. Brackets and Mounting Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer for mountingconfiguration and span indicated.

C. Interior Side Channels: As required for light sealing blackout shade applications.

D. Fasteners: Non-corrosive, and as recommended by shade manufacturer.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate shades to fit openings within specified tolerances.1. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/2 inch space between bottom

bar and window stool.2. Horizontal Dimensions - Outside Mounting: Extend shades 2 inches beyond jambs on

each side.

B. Dimensional Tolerances: As recommended in writing by manufacturer.

C. At openings requiring continuous multiple shade units with separate rollers, locate roller joints atwindow mullion centers; butt rollers end-to-end.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine finished openings for deficiencies that may preclude satisfactory installation.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactorypreparation before proceeding.

C. Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result forsubstrate under the project conditions.

B. Coordinate with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support shades.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings, usingmounting devices as indicated.

B. Installation Tolerances:1. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/16 inch.

C. Replace shades that exceed specified dimensional tolerances at no extra cost to Owner.

D. Adjust level, projection and shade centering from mounting bracket. Verify there is notelescoping of shade fabric. Ensure smooth shade operation.

WINDOW SHADES


3.04 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Motorized Shade System: Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative toperform system startup.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Replace shades that cannot be cleaned to "like new" condition.


A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation and maintenance of window shade system to Owner'spersonnel.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

SPECIALTY CASEWORK


SECTION 12 3583

SPECIALTY CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Musical instrument storage casework.


A. Section 01 6100 - Product Requirements.

B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

C. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring: Rubber base.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):1. ANSI A208.1 - Particleboard.

B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

C. ASTM International (ASTM):1. ASTM C 423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption

Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.2. ASTM C 1503 - Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror.3. ASTM E 488 - Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry

Elements.4. ASTM E 795 - Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption

Tests.

D. Audio Engineering Society (AES):1. AES-4id - AES information document for room acoustics and sound reinforcement

systems -- Characterization and measurement of surface scattering uniformity.

E. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA):1. ANSI/BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware.

F. GREENGUARD Environmental Institute (GEI):1. GREENGUARD certified low emitting products.

G. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)1. Requirements for listing and labeling of products.

H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):1. NEMA LD 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.

I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

J. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC):1. Requirements for listing and labeling of products.

K. US Green Building Council (USGBC):1. Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Green Building Rating System.

L. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST):1. DOC PS 1 - U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets, installation instructions, and maintenancerecommendations.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by manufacturer. Include elevations showing casework components,details of each condition of installation, and types and locations of hardware and fasteners.

SPECIALTY CASEWORK


Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, andattachments to other Work.1. Indicate seismic bracing and fastening requirements.

C. Samples: For each color and finish for each exposed casework component.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data.

E. Warranty: Submit sample meeting warranty requirements of this Section.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this section, with minimum 5 yearsexperience in manufacture of similar products in use in similar environments.

B. Obtain music education casework through one source from a single approved manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components: Listed and labeled per NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agencyacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Deliver, store, and handle casework in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Shipto jobsite only after roughing-in, painting work, and other related finish work has been completedand installation areas are ready to accept casework and recommended temperature andhumidity levels will be maintained during the remainder of construction.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of blocking and supports in frame wall assemblies under work of othersections where required for anchoring casework.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's written warranty indicating manufacturer's intent to repair orreplace components of music education storage casework that fail in materials or workmanshipwithin 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failures are defined to include, but are notlimited to, the following:1. Fracturing or breaking of casework components including doors, panels, shelves, or

hardware resulting from normal wear and tear and normal use other than vandalism.2. Delamination or other failures of glue bond of components.3. Warping of casework components not resulting from leaks, flooding, or other uncontrolled

moisture or humidity.4. Failure of operating hardware.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Wenger Corporation: www.wengercorp.com.


2.02 MATERIALS

A. Materials Meeting Sustainable Design Requirements:1. No Added Urea Formaldehyde Products: Provide music education storage casework made

with composite products and adhesives with no urea formaldehyde added.

B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, minimum 43 lb/cu. ft. (689 kg/cu. m) density, composite productsand adhesives, with no urea formaldehyde added.

C. Polyethylene Shelves: High-density, one-piece, blow-molded or polyethylene, with radiused frontedge, for abuse-resistant shelves. Same color throughout will not show scratches.

D. PVC Edge Banding: Radiused PVC extrusions, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

2.03 MUSICAL INSTRUMENT STORAGE CASEWORK

A. Basis of Design: UltraStor Storage Cabinets as manufactured by Wenger Corporation. Modularinstrument storage casework with integral bases, adjustable levelers, and through-bolted

SPECIALTY CASEWORK


fastening, (Traditional screw method of attachment will not be accepted) enabling ownerreconfiguration of unit layout.

B. Seismic Performance: Comply with ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and OtherStructures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads" based upon seismic design criteria indicated.

C. Storage Casework Component Load Capacities:1. Storage Casework Panel Door Hinge: Each weld capable of resisting 400 lbf (1779 N) pull

test without visible damage or permanent deformation.

D. Robe and uniform storage casework with integral bases, adjustable levelers, and through-boltedfastening, enabling owner reconfiguration of unit layout.

E. General: Provide through-ventilating instrument storage casework meeting requirements inSystem Description and Performance Requirements Articles.

F. Side Panels and Divider Panels: Particleboard thermoset panel with no urea formaldehydeadded, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. Side panels machined to accept unit-to-unit through-bolting.Traditional through screw method of attachment will not be accepted.

G. Panel Doors: Particleboard thermoset panel with no urea formaldehyde added, 3/4 inch (19mm) thick.1. Color: Architect to choose from manufacturer's full range.

H. Panel Edge Banding: 3 mm thick, heat-bonded, with radiused and profiled edges and corners.

I. Shelving: Sized with adequate gap between shelving and casework side panels to allow airmovement inside casework.1. Up to 27 inches (686 mm) wide: Removable molded polyethylene shelf, with

impact-resistant, radiused front edge, mounted to cabinet wall with self-locking clip.2. Over 27 inches (686 mm) wide: For large instrument casework: Removable formed

polyethylene shelf, ribbed, with high-impact-resistant, radiused front edge, supported bysteel tube frame.

3. Tubular steel supports are included for shelves over 19 inches (483 mm) wide.4. Corner cabinet revolving shelving: 0.053 inch (1.3 mm) min. thickness steel sheet bolted to

revolving steel center post, with radiused hardboard deflector panel.

J. Casework Panel Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

K. Filler Panels and Closure: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick particleboard thermoset panels with no ureaformaldehyde in Oyster color. Provide the following, cut to fit field conditions, where indicated:1. Wall filler between cabinet side and wall.2. Top filler between cabinet top and wall.3. Top of cabinet closure panel between cabinet and finished ceiling or soffits.4. Finished back panel for exposed cabinet backs.

L. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.090 inch (2.29 mm)thick metal, ANSI/BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with powder-coated finish, through-bolted to doorand side panels and welded to grille door frames. Provide 2 hinges on compartment doors, and4 hinges on full-height doors.

M. Slide Latch: 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) min. thickness steel, with padlock eye, powder-coat finish,through-bolted to panel door and side panel. Traditional screw method of attachment will not beaccepted. Latches securely without padlock. Provide with clear plastic label holder for use withstandard size labels; number system available for user to print. Padlocks furnished by Owner.

N. Panel Connectors: 1/4-20 by 1.77 inch (45 mm) panel connectors, with steel thread inserts,powder coated to match panels.

O. Cabinet Levelers: Leveling glides with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter threaded steel rod in steelcorner brackets, minimum two each per cabinet side, accessible from within unit, and concealedin completed installation.

P. Carcass joinery includes lag screws powder coated to match substrate.

SPECIALTY CASEWORK


Q. Back panel 7/32 inch (5.6 mm) reinforced with 3/4 inch (19 mm) stretchers panels held in adado groove and lag screwed in place.

R. Fasteners: Manufacturer-recommended fasteners as required for casework substrate andproject performance requirements, consisting of one or more of the following:1. Sheet Metal Screws: SAE J78, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel

drill screws.2. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.3. Expansion Anchors in Concrete and Concrete Masonry Units: Carbon-steel, zinc plated.4. Hardware supplied to anchor the cabinets to the wall and to adjacent casework

S. Finish: Steel Sheet, Steel Wire, and Exposed Fasteners. Urethane-based electrostatic powdercoating, color as indicated. Refer to Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine casework installation areas for compliance with requirements for installationtolerances, location of blocking and other anchoring reinforcements, and other existingconditions affecting installation and performance of casework. Proceed with caseworkinstallation upon correction of unsatisfactory conditions.

3.02 CASEWORK INSTALLATION

A. Install plumb, level, and true; using integral levelers. Install in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations and approved submittals.1. Install seismic bracing and fastening in accordance with approved shop drawings.

B. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat. Adjust and align hardware somoving parts operate freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow for final adjustment afterinstallation.

C. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bindand close with uniform reveals.

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Repair or replace defective work as directed by Architect upon inspection.

B. Clean casework surfaces. Touch up, refinish, or replace damaged components in a manneracceptable to Architect.

C. Turn over operation and maintenance instructions to Owner.

3.04 SCHEDULE

A. SC-1: Wenger #01N

B. SC-2: Wenger #02N

C. SC-3: Wenger #04N

D. SC-4: Wenger #05

E. SC-5: Wenger #05N

F. SC-6: Wenger #07N

G. SC-7: Wenger #08

H. SC-8: Wenger #08N

I. SC-9: Wenger #09

J. SC-10: Wenger #10N

K. SC-11: Wenger #11N

L. SC-12: Wenger #12

M. SC-13: Wenger #13N

SPECIALTY CASEWORK


N. SC-14: Wenger #15

END OF SECTION

ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES


SECTION 12 4813

ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Carpet mat.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data indicating properties of walk-off surface, component dimensions.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions.

D. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating pattern, color, finish, edging.

E. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning instructions, stain removal procedures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Floor Mats:1. Mohawk, First Step II: www.mohawkgroup.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATS

A. Carpet Mat: Modular Walk-Off Mat, 24 x 24 inch tiles.1. Stitches per Inch: 5/32.2. Finished Pile Thickness: 0.203 inches.3. Backing: EcoFlex ICT.4. Color: Cobalt 955.5. Edging: Aluminum edging system by same manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that floor opening for mats are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Mats: Verify size of floor recess before fabricating mats.

B. Vacuum clean floor recess.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install walk-off surface in floor recess flush with finish floor after cleaning of finish flooring.

END OF SECTION

FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING


SECTION 12 61 13


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1-General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section.


A. Work Performed by the Contractor: Auditorium building, including electrical work indicated. Coordination and cooperation with Supplier, Owner and Architect.

B. Work Performed by the Contractor via the Seating Supplier: Include all labor, material, equipment, transportation, and services to provide submittals, manufacture, furnish, install and make useable the auditorium seating as shown on the drawings and specified herein.


A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete

B. Division 26 – Electrical: Coordination of electrical components.


A. Vendor / Installer shall be qualified as a “specialist” with regard to fixed, upholstered audience seating systems. “Specialist” is defined as having 5 or more years as a fully trained and professionally experienced construction installer, accustomed to working with other trades for coordination of work. In addition, the Installer shall be certified by the seating manufacturer as fully trained in the particulars of the products which they are installing, and shall have successfully installed not less than (10) similar installations of the product system specified for this project.

B. All products shall be manufactured in the U.S.A. All products shall be new and unused.

C. In addition to the requirements of Division 1, proposals for substitute products shall include actual chair samples which are equivalent to the product specified, complete specifications, fabrics, photos, or other product and performance information as requested. Provide a list of recently completed projects in the Pacific Northwest; state the name of the owner and their telephone number.

1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. All work in this Section shall be in accordance with the current edition of the International Building Code, Uniform Fire Code, and other codes and regulations as applicable or in force. Verify with local authorities for any special requirements. Submit a seating plan to the local authority for review and approval. Verify all aisle widths, egress requirements, and clearances. In case of conflict, notify Architect immediately, in writing.

1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Deliver products to job site only after notification that temporary storage is available that is clean, dry and protected from the weather. Containers shall remain sealed tight so as to protect the products until actual installation begins.

B. Provide protection from damage and soil. Assume responsibility for any and all damage which may occur during transit, storage and prior to acceptance. All material shall be shipped in containers which shall provide adequate protection during shipping and storage. Damaged or unapproved goods which are delivered to the job site shall be removed from the job site; at no additional cost to the Owner.



1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. General: In addition to the requirements of Section 01 30 00, submit, to cause no delay in the work, shop drawings which show the fabrications and installation requirements of the work. Provide complete product specifications, dimensions, and other data as directed. Provide physical samples of fabrics, materials, colors, finishes, and other data as directed.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepare a seating plan and section at 1/8" = 1'0" (minimum 1/4" preferred) showing the actual job conditions and field measurements. Show all chair sizes, chair dimensions, mounting methods, anchors, and aisle light locations and connection details. The approximate locations aisle light stub-ups and j-boxes are shown on the Seating Plan. Coordinate this work with the electrical contractor. Deliver to the electrical subcontractor the exact location of all stub-ups; such locations shall be within 1/2" tolerance. Installer shall check the dimensions to verify that the seating plan, with the chair widths shown, will fit the stub-up locations. Architect reserves the right to modify seating plan in order to conform to conditions.

C. Review: All submittals must be reviewed and approved by the Architect prior to starting work, but such approval does not relieve the Supplier of responsibility for deviations from drawings and specifications. Bring all deviations to attention of the Architect, in writing at time of submittal. After review, submittals will be returned to Contractor.

D. Configuration of Submittal:

1. The submittal shall incorporate documentary evidence of compliance with the layout on the drawings and all the equipment and installation requirements of the specifications, in a single, comprehensive package. It shall not be acceptable for the Contractor to allow the seating fabricator or local installer / dealer to “trickle” in multiple small submittals with or without being requested to do so by the Architect.

2. Specified finish and material samples shall be clearly listed and accompanied by small physical samples which are labeled in reference to the specification section and article where defined. Physical selection samples shall include: Fabric color, armrest color, plastic laminate, steel parts, and other data as directed.

3. Where the manufacturer’s standard literature lists multiple choices for any single item, the item being submitted as meeting the specification requirements shall be appropriately marked, highlighted or otherwise clearly identifying the submitted choice.

4. Seating layout drawings shall clearly identify all critical dimensions, and if submitted prior to obtaining field verified dimensions, shall indicate in large bold print, that the layout is prior to field confirmation, and that the Contractor is responsible for obtaining confirmed field dimensions and re-submitting the ENTIRE submittal package with all corrections from the prior review(s) incorporated and highlighted, along with a new seating layout plan that shows verified dimensions and any changes to the seating layout or size mix, with updated Seat Count Table, also highlighted.

E. Failure to notice deviations from the contract documents, when submittals have been reviewed by the Architect or Consultant, is not a waiver of the contract document requirements for the items in question. The contract documents shall prevail. Deviations on the submittals shall only be permissible if intentionally acknowledge and directed by the Architect and/or Consultant on the submittal.

F. Claim for Extras: No claim for extras may be based on work shown on shop drawings which deviates from the contract documents.



1.08 RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Contractor is solely responsible for compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications and the proper design, manufacture, delivery, construction coordination with work of other trades, protection, installation and worker safety for the work of this section. Contractor shall advise the Architect of any discrepancy in, or disagreement with the specifications and/or drawings prior to starting work and not proceed until issue is resolved. Contractor shall use fabricators and seating installers who are fully experienced and entirely knowledgeable to perform the work specified herein. Commencement of work shall indicate Contractor's acknowledgment of his fabricator and installer’s mutual expertise in this type of work. Any delay resulting from failure to comply with this procedure will not be basis for an extension of the completion date or additional compensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Chair Widths: Furnish and install as and where shown or directed. Design is based on a 21" wide seat as the standard, with 22", and 20" widths allowed (in preference order) as first choice for aligning ends of rows and creating sightline offsets. Nineteen inch (19”) wide chairs may be used only as shown on the TS drawings, or with approval of the Architect and Theater Consultant, when no other seating size combination will provide proper alignment.

B. All Chairs: Self-rising by spring-assist, with maximum depth not to exceed 20.5" with the seat in the 75% "full lift" position. Seat shall rise to 75% full lift without human intervention or assistance. All chairs shall have minimum 3-position, adjustable back pitch, with leanback angle selectable between 13 and 19 degrees. Demountable components shall be accessible for servicing and reupholstering, without special tools or knowledge. Seat rise stops shall be extremely quiet when allowed to flip up without assistance or restraint.

C. Surfaces and Edges: Smooth and free from burrs or sharp edges. Fasteners to be concealed or smooth surfaced.

D. Fasteners: Provide all the necessary fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer for the complete assembling, mounting, and installation, including anchor bolts for the chair standards on concrete floor slab and risers. Floor mounted chairs shall use steel "acorn cap" nuts and shim washers so that when seat is firmly anchored, there shall be no exposed threads above the nut. An acceptable alternative shall be provision at each chair standard, a durable, protective, decorative foot cap in same finish color as chair standard.

E. Auditorium chairs shall be provided which display a continuity of design, and all components shall complement one another in form, style and texture, thereby evincing a contemporary, timely appearance of the completed auditorium. Comfort shall be of prime importance in the design of the chair components, and design shall be based on nationally recognized studies of human form and dimensions. Human engineering and ergonomics shall dictate contours and details of support structure in the components.

F. The face of the seat and the face of the back shall be upholstered; the rear-of-the-back shall be injection molded plastic / polymer and the seat shell bottom shall be injection molded plastic / polymer.

G. Handicapped Access / Designated Aisle Seat End Standards: Aisle standards designated on the contract drawings shall be arranged for easy access by handicapped individuals and shall be designed to allow the individual to transfer easily from a wheelchair to the theatre chair. The aisle standard support column shall be inclined to the rear at the top by 16 degrees, and shall be equipped with an armrest capable of lifting to a position parallel with the chair back, permitting sideways access to the seat. Aisle standards so equipped shall be provided with a permanently affixed, durable label, displaying an easily recognizable "handicapped" symbol. Decorative requirements of aisle standards are



waived for the Handicapped Access Standards. Seats marked on drawings as Handicapped Access shall accept Aisle lighting fixtures in standard high mount position. Handicapped Access Aisle seats shall not have decorative end panel but shall be aesthetically balanced in appearance to those seat that do have the end panel.

H. Armrests shall be injection molded plastic, with all edges well rounded and smooth, with no rough ridges or sharp edges. Armrest shape style shall be “comfort-curved” as defined by Irwin Seating, or acceptable equivalent by other approved manufacturers. Finish Black for Irwin, Graphite for Hussey or as selected by Architect, from manufacturer’s standard available finishes. Armrests shall be furnished with two (2) keyhole slots in the bottom and shall lock securely to dovetail lugs provided on aisle and center standards.

I. A numbering system shall be provided for identification of all chairs. Number and letter plates shall be furnished as shown on the approved seating layout, and shall be metal, approximately 5/8" x 1-5/8" with a bronze finish and black Helvetica Medium letters and numerals. The seat pans shall be recessed at the center of the front edge for the number plates, and the plates shall be attached by two (2) pop rivets. Letter plates shall be attached in a recess in the aisle end standard by two (2) escutcheon pins. Attaching hardware shall have a bronze finish compatible to plates and shall be finished smooth, so as to not snag apparel or injure occupant.

J. Aisle lights shall be furnished for the aisle standards located as designated on the seating drawings in the contract documents.

1. Aisle lights shall be concealed in the armrest (balcony seating only), low voltage, non-hazardous, utilizing a minimum of 4 miniature LED light elements per standard, and providing adequate illumination for floor and/or steps adjacent to aisle standards. Seating manufacturer shall provide an aisle lighting fixture as a part of the aisle end chairs which, when set in locations per the seating drawings, will meet the code minimum requirements in the jurisdiction of the project for non-emergency egress illumination. Color of LED aisle light shall be Warm White, at approximately between 2700K and 2900 K correlated color temperature, with all LED’s from the same binning batch within a 3-step group.

2. The light assembly shall be recessed in the armrest on the aisle panel, with wiring concealed from sight and protected from damage. On Handicapped Access aisle positions, the concealed aisle light shall be recessed mounted in the aisle side armrest.

3. The standard shall be completely pre-wired with not less than 36" of steel-shrouded flexible wiring extending beyond the bottom of the platform/standard, in addition to any wiring that must be run in or on the standard. Wiring shall be concealed within the body of the steel end standard, or with cast-iron standards, neatly run and anchored tight to the standard and end panel, out of view and tampering reach to the maximum extent possible. The protective metal flex enclosure shall be as small as is practical, finished to not be noticeable, and shall stay tight to the standard until immediately above the anchor foot, whereupon it will exit laterally near the floor.

4. Seating supplier shall furnish as part of the aisle light package, multiple filtered, regulated voltage reduction driver devices specifically designed to serve LED loads in an environment where irregular voltage conditions may exist, suitably housed in a NEMA 1 steel safety enclosure and shall be equipped with primary and secondary fuses, terminal blocks, and safety disconnect; all components Underwriters' Laboratories listed, and assembled by licensed electricians to N.E.C. specifications, to facilitate safe connection to the building electrical system. All wiring connections from the electric distribution system to the aisle light standards, and installation and connection of the voltage reduction driver devices shall be covered under the scope of Division 26.



5. Selection of rectangular or round form of the aisle light shall be directed by the Architect, depending on style of aisle end panel, and shall be marked on the submittals.

6. Acceptable manufacturer / product is the Vista “LED Krystal-Lite (LKL)” or prior approved equal.

7. Mobile base “de-mountable” chairs (if used on this project) shall not receive aisle lighting.

K. De-mountable Chairs

1. Provide floor mount style chairs attached to a steel base assembly which allows for those chairs to be removed as complete assemblies by detaching the base from the floor. Chair design is to match the adjacent fixed chairs. The base shall be sized to not protrude past the extent of the envelope of the unoccupied chair. The base assembly’s steel components shall be joined by welding to provide robust support. Finish of the base shall be powder coat in a medium gray as standard with custom colors as optional. The tubular and plate steel base assembly shall anchor to expansion anchor threaded inserts in the floor with two anchors per chair standard. Design of the base assembly will be single units as required by the seating plan.

2. Demountable chairs shall be provided with dual armrests.

3. Provide all framework and threaded floor inserts and easy bolts to allow the users to install and remove without special tools.

4. Demountable chairs shall have anchor provisions which are proper for wood floors or concrete floors as per the particulars of the project, and shall coordinate with the work of other trades, to assure maximum anchorage strength and durability, without risk of weakening or failure of chair assembly or anchorage means.

L. Fabric, Plastics, Paint and Stain Finishes

1. Not all finish options listed below may be included in the chairs as specified in detail later in this section of the specifications.

2. Upholstery Fabric: Shall be Absecon Mills “Sherpa” or “Shire”, Maharam Mills “Sherpa” or “Shire”; color and pattern shall be as follows:

a) Add Alternate 1a: MG008 Bayou

b) Add Alternate 1b: MG008 Bayou

c) Add Alternate 1c: G Series/Color TBD

d) Add Alternate 1d: G Series/Color TBD

3. Injection molded polypropylene or nylon: Shall be pigmented, black for Irwin, graphite for Hussey, and have a dull, slightly textured surface.

4. Plastic Laminate: Shall meet requirements NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS for vertical surfaces and Grade HGS for horizontal surfaces. Color and pattern to be chosen by Architect, from manufacturer’s standard offering.

5. Steel Parts: shall be provided with a hybrid epoxy powder coat in one of the manufacturer’s standard colors: Black for Irwin, Graphite for Hussey. Finish treatment will be done using the following procedure:

a. Pre-powder coat cleaning in a 7-stage bonderizing process

1) 1st stage: acid clean

2) 2nd stage: water rinse

3) 3rd stage: zirconium immersion

4) 4th stage: deionized water rinse

5) 5th stage: seal spray





8) parts pass thru a dry off oven

b. Powder coat finishing of parts in an electrostatic system.

1) Parts shall be coated with a thermosetting epoxy powder.

2) Cured powder coat to have dry film thickness of 1.0 to 2.0 mils.

3) Parts shall be high temperature cured in a gas fired convection oven.

4) Cured powder coat must pass; ASTM D3363-74 Hardness 2H, ASTM

D2794-69 Impact Resistance 120 in-lbs without cracking, ASTM

D522-60 Flexibility no cracking or loss of adhesion, ASTM B117-73

Salt Spray 144 hours with no corrosion, ASTM D1654-79a Salt Spray

maximum 1/8” creep from scribe line, ASTM D3359-83 Adhesion 5B,

ASTM G53-96 Light Resistance 48 hour exposure with no chalking,

75% gloss retention and color change less than 1.5 deltaE CIE and

Hoffman Scratch Hardness Tester no substrate appearance with

1,000 gram load.

6. Finish colors for leg standards and seat pans (only if steel) shall be a powder coat, selected by Architect from manufacturer’s complete range of available standard finishes.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS: The following specific product system by Irwin Seating (defined in article 2.03) is the “Basis of Design”. Products by Hussey Seating (defined in article 2.05), shall be considered as equally acceptable. Seating is not part of the base bid and will be listed as add alternates listed below. Provide pricing for each add alternate:

2.03 Irwin Seating – “CITATION” #90 – Add Alternate 1a

A. Chair Back - #90

1. Chair back components shall be padded and upholstered on the face with an injection molded plastic rear "designer" panel. Backs shall feature an upholstered cover and an ergonomic, compound curved structure. Assembled chairs shall have a nominal back height of 34”. The back assembly shall be certified through routine ISO testing to withstand a 250 lb. static load test applied approximately 16” above the seat assembly and a 100,000 cycle 40 lb. swing impact test.

2. Seatback mounting wings shall allow for (3) seatback angles, from 13 deg to 19 deg. Set the leanback angle of front segment of seating at 19 degrees. Set the leanback angle of rear segment of seating at 13 degrees.

3. The upholstery panels shall be 7/16" 5-ply hardwood plywood formed with compound curves for proper body support. Panels are to be padded with not less than 2"thick polyurethane foam and covered with an upholstery fabric cover. Wings used for the attachment of the complete back assembly to the standards shall be not less than 14 gauge (.0747") steel. Wings shall be firmly secured to the inner panel through the use of threaded t-nuts fastened to the inner panel.

4. The rear back panel shall be injection molded, high impact resistant, textured, polyethylene, formed to enclose the edges of the inner upholstery panel at the top and both sides of the back; and shall be not less than 29" in length, extending below the seat level to protect the seat cushion from the rear. There shall be no exposed fasteners above the armrests. The molded plastic rear panel shall be contoured to conform to the shape of the inner plywood panel.

B. Seat Assembly - #12 Ergonomic

1. Quiet-rise seat, self-lifting by spring-assist to 75% vertical without human assistance.

2. Plastic pan bottom, matching the seat back panel

3. Injection molded, glass-filled polyethylene foundation with curved, thermoplastic resin panel as an ergonomic substrate.

4. 3” seat foam; molded polyurethane.



5. Upholstery fabric shall match fabric on face of seat back

C. Aisle End Panel - #60 “Rectangular” using Vermont Maple WM55228-5d laminate.

1. Aisle end panels shall be rectangular-shaped, constructed of medium density fiberboard (MDF) and surfaced with plastic laminate specified and a lacquered edge to match the dominant color of the laminate. Panels shall be provided with a seat bracket recess for precise location and support of the panel. Panel is secured to a 14 gauge formed steel bracket bolted to the top of the support column and directly to the support column with the use of a spacer. Panel bracket assembly is concealed behind a steel shroud attached with a tamper resistant screw.

2. Shall accommodate armrest as specified herein.

3. Shall accommodate specially fit LED fixture as specified herein and as shown on TS series drawings.

D. Chair Platform / Standards - #4

1. Chair support columns shall be a formed 14 gauge (.0747") steel tube with an integral back wing plate. Column shall exhibit a 10 deg rearward incline to help conceal back attachment hardware. Brackets for seat attachment shall be 7 gauge (.1875") steel for superior strength, formed with an integral support buttress. Floor attachment foot shall be formed from 12 gauge (.105) steel to 7-1/2” x 2-5/8” in size. All steel components shall be robotic welded for precise assembly and exceptional integrity. Foot-to-column welds are to be concealed on the inside of the foot for a clean appearance. The standard shall be fabricated to be compatible with the floor incline, and to maintain proper seat and back height and angle.

2.04 Irwin Seating – “CITATION” #90 – Add Alternate 1b

E. Chair Back - #90

5. Chair back components shall be padded and upholstered on the face with an injection molded plastic rear "designer" panel. Backs shall feature an upholstered cover and an ergonomic, compound curved structure. Assembled chairs shall have a nominal back height of 34”. The back assembly shall be certified through routine ISO testing to withstand a 250 lb. static load test applied approximately 16” above the seat assembly and a 100,000 cycle 40 lb. swing impact test.

6. Seatback mounting wings shall allow for (3) seatback angles, from 13 deg to 19 deg. Set the leanback angle of front segment of seating at 19 degrees. Set the leanback angle of rear segment of seating at 13 degrees.

7. The upholstery panels shall be 7/16" 5-ply hardwood plywood formed with compound curves for proper body support. Panels are to be padded with not less than 2"thick polyurethane foam and covered with an upholstery fabric cover. Wings used for the attachment of the complete back assembly to the standards shall be not less than 14 gauge (.0747") steel. Wings shall be firmly secured to the inner panel through the use of threaded t-nuts fastened to the inner panel.

8. The rear back panel shall be injection molded, high impact resistant, textured, polyethylene, formed to enclose the edges of the inner upholstery panel at the top and both sides of the back; and shall be not less than 29" in length, extending below the seat level to protect the seat cushion from the rear. There shall be no exposed fasteners above the armrests. The molded plastic rear panel shall be contoured to conform to the shape of the inner plywood panel.

F. Seat Assembly - #12 Ergonomic

6. Quiet-rise seat, self-lifting by spring-assist to 75% vertical without human assistance.

7. Plastic pan bottom, matching the seat back panel



8. Injection molded, glass-filled polyethylene foundation with curved, thermoplastic resin panel as an ergonomic substrate.

9. 3” seat foam; molded polyurethane.

10. Upholstery fabric shall match fabric on face of seat back

G. Aisle End Panel - #20 “Cast Iron” in black.

4. Aisle end panels shall be keystone-shaped, constructed of medium density fiberboard (MDF) and surfaced with plastic laminate specified and a lacquered edge to match the dominant color of the laminate. Panels shall be provided with a seat bracket recess for precise location and support of the panel. Panel is secured to a 14 gauge formed steel bracket bolted to the top of the support column and directly to the support column with the use of a spacer. Panel bracket assembly is concealed behind a steel shroud attached with a tamper resistant screw.

5. Shall accommodate armrest as specified herein.

6. Shall accommodate specially fit LED fixture as specified herein and as shown on TS series drawings.

H. Chair Platform / Standards - #4

2. Chair support columns shall be a formed 14 gauge (.0747") steel tube with an integral back wing plate. Column shall exhibit a 10 deg rearward incline to help conceal back attachment hardware. Brackets for seat attachment shall be 7 gauge (.1875") steel for superior strength, formed with an integral support buttress. Floor attachment foot shall be formed from 12 gauge (.105) steel to 7-1/2” x 2-5/8” in size. All steel components shall be robotic welded for precise assembly and exceptional integrity. Foot-to-column welds are to be concealed on the inside of the foot for a clean appearance. The standard shall be fabricated to be compatible with the floor incline, and to maintain proper seat and back height and angle.

2.05 Hussey Seating “Quattro” – Add Alternate 1c

A. Chair Back

1. The outer back panel shall be constructed of injection molded polypropylene plastic. The panel shall be no less than 33” in length and conceal the rear and sides of the upholstered inner panel. The panel shall extend below the rear of the seat to protect the chair occupant s back.

2. The inner upholstered panel shall be 5/8” (15mm) 11 ply thick-formed hardwood with an ergonomically engineered contour. The wings for attachment of chair back to standard shall be not less than 14 ga. (1.9mm) and will be attached via concealed fasteners. Wings shall position the chair back at one of three positions: 15, 18, or 21 degrees. There shall be no exposed fasteners above the seat. Chair back upholstery shall exhibit a high degree of workmanship and customization.

3. Soft Square - 33”: The top corners of the back are conically shaped for stylish looks and a timeless appearance. Overall back height is 33” above the floor allowing proper shoulder support of the chair occupant. The back surface shall be contoured to facilitate proper posture of a seated individual.

4. Back foam shall be not less than 2” thick, with upholstery fabric tailored in Waterfall style.

B. Seat Assembly

1. The seat assembly shall consist of a stylish padded and upholstered top surface, a polypropylene bottom shell with dual contours, and a dual sprung lifting mechanism to assist gravity. Seat shall have the ability to achieve a 75% full lift position by itself, without human assistance. Superior comfort shall be derived through careful ergonomic engineering.



2. Upholstery Pad: The upholstered seat topper shall consist of a 5/8” thick formed ply form base with contoured molded polyurethane foam padding and fabric upholstered cover. Seat padding shall be properly contoured to support the body without causing discomfort. The upholstered seat cover shall exhibit a high degree of tailoring and will be affixed to the base with upholstery staples. Support foam shall be PLUSH, waterfall style.

3. Seat Mechanism: Seat lifting mechanism shall use lubricated lifting springs to provide whisper quiet fail-safe operation. The seat structure shall rotate on a 3/4” [19mm] spanner bar to assure shaft alignment and eliminate binding due to irregular floor conditions. Seats shall be certified to withstand 350,000 lifting cycles and a 600lb static load without failure.

4. Seat hinges shall be fully contained within the seat pan and fitted with a pair of independent nylon bushings. Seat hinge and spring installation shall be designed not to require periodic adjustment or lubrication. Each of the independent seat hinges shall be fitted with double acting; self-centering, pre-loaded coiled seat return spring.

C. Aisle Panel

1. Soft Square Decorator panel constructed from 45 lb MDF. Panel shall be surface with decorative high-pressure plastic laminate.

2. Shall accommodate armrest matching seat at interior of rows. Shall accommodate concealed LED aisle light in armrest at locations shown on drawings.

3. Aisle panel shall be securely mounted to end standard platform frame, with no wiggle or vibration.

4. Designated aisle seats shall not have aisle end panel but shall have lifting armrest and other elements as specified herein.

D. Chair Platform

1. Standards shall be 1”[25mm] x 3”[76mm] x 16 gauge [1.5mm] seamless oval mechanical steel tubing. Standards utilizing an open seam (not welded) shall be considered unacceptable.

2. The top of the standard shall provide for vandal resistant attachment of the armrest, without the use of exposed fasteners on the surface of the arm.

3. Floor mounted standards shall have a 14 gauge [1.9mm] formed steel foot. The formed foot shall be full perimeter welded to the upright tubular member. The floor mount standards shall be manufactured to match floor inclines in order to maintain proper seat height and angle.

2.06 Hussey Seating “Quattro”- Add Alternate 1d

E. Chair Back

5. The outer back panel shall be constructed of injection molded polypropylene plastic. The panel shall be no less than 33” in length and conceal the rear and sides of the upholstered inner panel. The panel shall extend below the rear of the seat to protect the chair occupant s back.

6. The inner upholstered panel shall be 5/8” (15mm) 11 ply thick-formed hardwood with an ergonomically engineered contour. The wings for attachment of chair back to standard shall be not less than 14 ga. (1.9mm) and will be attached via concealed fasteners. Wings shall position the chair back at one of three positions: 15, 18, or 21 degrees. There shall be no exposed fasteners above the seat. Chair back upholstery shall exhibit a high degree of workmanship and customization.

7. Soft Square - 33”: The top corners of the back are conically shaped for stylish looks and a timeless appearance. Overall back height is 33” above the floor allowing



proper shoulder support of the chair occupant. The back surface shall be contoured to facilitate proper posture of a seated individual.

8. Back foam shall be not less than 2” thick, with upholstery fabric tailored in Waterfall style.

F. Seat Assembly

5. The seat assembly shall consist of a stylish padded and upholstered top surface, a polypropylene bottom shell with dual contours, and a dual sprung lifting mechanism to assist gravity. Seat shall have the ability to achieve a 75% full lift position by itself, without human assistance. Superior comfort shall be derived through careful ergonomic engineering.

6. Upholstery Pad: The upholstered seat topper shall consist of a 5/8” thick formed ply form base with contoured molded polyurethane foam padding and fabric upholstered cover. Seat padding shall be properly contoured to support the body without causing discomfort. The upholstered seat cover shall exhibit a high degree of tailoring and will be affixed to the base with upholstery staples. Support foam shall be PLUSH, waterfall style.

7. Seat Mechanism: Seat lifting mechanism shall use lubricated lifting springs to provide whisper quiet fail-safe operation. The seat structure shall rotate on a 3/4” [19mm] spanner bar to assure shaft alignment and eliminate binding due to irregular floor conditions. Seats shall be certified to withstand 350,000 lifting cycles and a 600lb static load without failure.

8. Seat hinges shall be fully contained within the seat pan and fitted with a pair of independent nylon bushings. Seat hinge and spring installation shall be designed not to require periodic adjustment or lubrication. Each of the independent seat hinges shall be fitted with double acting; self-centering, pre-loaded coiled seat return spring.

G. Aisle Panel

5. Polymer tapered style decorator panel constructed from 45 lb MDF. Panel shall be surface with decorative high-pressure plastic laminate.

6. Shall accommodate armrest matching seat at interior of rows. Shall accommodate concealed LED aisle light in armrest at locations shown on drawings.

7. Aisle panel shall be securely mounted to end standard platform frame, with no wiggle or vibration.

8. Designated aisle seats shall not have aisle end panel but shall have lifting armrest and other elements as specified herein.

H. Chair Platform

4. Standards shall be 1”[25mm] x 3”[76mm] x 16 gauge [1.5mm] seamless oval mechanical steel tubing. Standards utilizing an open seam (not welded) shall be considered unacceptable.

5. The top of the standard shall provide for vandal resistant attachment of the armrest, without the use of exposed fasteners on the surface of the arm.

6. Floor mounted standards shall have a 14 gauge [1.9mm] formed steel foot. The formed foot shall be full perimeter welded to the upright tubular member. The floor mount standards shall be manufactured to match floor inclines in order to maintain proper seat height and angle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL



A. Do not begin manufacturing before submittals and materials samples have been reviewed and approved by the Architect. In case of discrepancies, notify Architect immediately.

B. Installation shall follow Seating Plan as shown or directed. Architect reserves the right to make reasonable changes or modifications. Field verify all dimensions and report findings to Architect.

3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Examine site conditions and substrates under which the chairs are to be installed; notify Architect of conditions which are detrimental to the proper and timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Architect. Verify all building and chair dimensions prior to submittal of shop drawings.

B. The fixed chairs will be floor-mounted to a flat concrete floor slab which steps up per each row. Chair arc sizeline shall account for variations in riser height at different locations in room, and maintain the closest horizontal distance possible between seat outerback and the vertical riser face behind the chair. Allow only enough gap to prevent contact between chair outerback and riser/tread intersection when a 250 lb person applies their weight laterally against the front side of the chair back. Gap between chair outerback and riser/tread edge shall not exceed 3 inches.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Begin work only when directed and after all finishes, except carpet, in auditorium have been applied and completed. Do not uncrate materials until all dirt and dust-causing activities are complete.

B. Install chairs with a minimum of two anchors per standard in concrete substrate, with length and diameter as required for permanent, rigid installation. Indicate size and type of anchor at time of submittal.

C. Adjust seat backs to correct pitch, with center position slope at main level and forward position slope at balcony. All backs and seat pans in same row to be in alignment with one another and evenly matched. Seats shall rise automatically, quietly and without binding. Touch-up paint on all metal surfaces where damaged.

D. Chairs shall be installed so that no rows shall deviate beyond 1.5” total (+ and - combined) from a perfect endline along all row ends at all aisles. Use of wide chairs to achieve alignment, such that seat count total is diminished in excess of (4) chairs total is not acceptable.

E. Chairs on arc-lines to a radius shall be concentric row-to-row, and when viewed from any direction shall have their seatback tops and arms appears visually uniform across the sweep of arc, with no seatback or armrest appearing canted, tipped or at a different height above the reference floor level of the other seats in the same arc-line.

F. The seats shall operate quietly during all modes of use, including, but not limited to:

1. During lowering of the seat and initial sit-down of the occupant.

2. When the occupant moves or shifts position while seated.

3. When the occupant stands and the seat rises automatically.

4. "Quietly" shall be defined as the absence of any audible noise which, in the opinion of the Architect or the Acoustical Consultant, is objectionable. All seats will be tested after installation is complete, and any seat producing objectionable noise must be corrected or replaced at no cost to the Owner. The above requirements are applicable for entire Warranty period.

G. Incorrect work to be redone at no extra cost, as directed. The architect shall be the judge as to what is correct.

H. Notify electrician for electrical service connection. Cooperate and provide assistance where necessary.



I. Protect chairs from damage, dirt, dust and soiling prior to acceptance. All chairs shall be clean at time of acceptance. Should the chairs accumulate any dirt, dust or soil prior to acceptance, then the chairs (all of them) shall be vacuumed and wiped clean. Any chairs with stains, dirt/dust impregnation or other damage that cannot be fully removed to new status shall be replaced with new at no additional cost.

3.04 SPARE PARTS / ATTIC STOCK

A. Provide the following minimum complement of spare parts as attic stock, turned over to Owner in appropriate protective containers with a detailed inventory:

1. Extra made-up seat covers, in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total quantity of chairs in proportionate widths.

2. Extra upholstery fabric in the amount of not less than twenty (20) uncut yards.

3. LED lamp card replacements for aisle light fixtures; twenty (20).

4. Extra matching injection molded plastic armrests, (20), with fasteners.

5. Anchor bolts, fifty (50) of each size and type.

6. Touch up finish paint for cast iron and steel finishes; not less than 4 oz per color.

3.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide as set forth in Division 01.

B. In addition to the above, warranty the moving parts of the seat, including the hinge mechanism and seat springs, for 5 years. Refer to Sections 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures & 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals for the start of the warranty period.

3.06 CLOSE OUT

A. Provide "as-built" seating plan, 1/4" scale, delivered to Architect; include catalog data and replacement parts list. Refer to sections 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures & 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals for general requirements

B. Provide instruction manuals which clearly define periodic maintenance service required, and demonstrate how to disassemble and re-assemble a chair unit to replace or service any and all components. Coordinate with Division 01: Refer to Sections 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures & 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals for general requirements.

C. Provide certificate of flame-retardant upholstery fabric and cushion material.

D. Provide not less than (2) hours of training, familiarization and orientation to Owner’s designated representative. Obtain sign-off sheet from training participants, affirming satisfactory presentation and understanding of training. Submit original copy of signoff sheet with bound manuals.

E. Notify Architect for final inspection.

F. Perform punchlist adjustments, corrections and completions in a timely manner per contract document requirements.

3.07 FOLLOW-UP

A. Nine months after project is completed and Owner has occupied for use, return to the site and re-tighten all anchor bolts into floor. During same visit, inspect each seat for any loosening or premature wear, and make repairs as needed to restore to proper, original installation condition. This work shall be performed without additional cost for materials or labor.

END OF SECTION

TELESCOPING BLEACHERS


SECTION 12 6613


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Telescoping bleachers.

B. Electric motor operators, controls, and internal wiring.


A. Section 11 6623 - Gymnasium Equipment.

B. Division 26 - Electrical: Connection of electric motors and controls.



B. NFPA 102 - Standard for Grandstands, Folding and Telescopic Seating, Tents, and MembraneStructures; 2016.

C. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.

D. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata).

E. AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2008.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage handling and requirements.3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Complete layout with dimensions, seat heights, row spacing and rise, aislewidths and locations, points of connection to substrate, assembly dimensions, and materialtypes and finishes.1. Provide drawings customized to this project.2. Include Professional Engineer certification.3. Wiring Diagrams: Show locations of motors, electrical wiring, and rough-in connections.4. Graphics Layout Drawings: Indicate pattern of contrasting seat colors.

D. Selection Samples: For each material for which color selection is required, submit samples, 2by 2 inches in size, illustrating colors and finishes available.

E. Verification Samples: For each custom colored finish, submit samples of actual finish orproduct, for verification of color selection.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions,including annual inspection and maintenance and bi-annual inspection by a ProfessionalEngineer or manufacturer factory service personnel.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed inOwner's name and registered with manufacturer.



B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's installation crew.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,"Structural Welding Code - Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


A. Store, in original packaging, under cover and elevated above grade.



1.07 WARRANTY


B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. Replaceparts that fail under normal use at no extra charge to Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Telescoping Bleachers:1. Interkal LLC: www.interkal.com.2. Irwin Telescopic Seating Company: www.irwintelescopicseating.com.3. Basis of Design: Hussey Seating Company; Model MAXAM26: www.husseyseating.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS

A. Telescoping Bleachers: Factory assembled tiered benches that retract horizontally into depthapproximately the same as a single row depth, with fixed seats mounted on leading edge ofplatforms.1. Design to comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 102 and requirements of code

authorities having jurisdiction; where conflicts between requirements occur, comply withwhichever is more stringent.

2. Design with solid fascia (riser) or seat fronts that conceal interior mechanisms when fullyretracted, fitting tightly enough to prevent climbing up face; at front row provide key locked,hinged fascia (skirt) to cover gap between seat riser/fascia and floor.

3. Standard Extension: Top row fixed to floor, adjacent to wall, forward extension (away fromwall); attachment to wall acceptable.

4. Wheelchair Spaces: Permanent open spaces at locations indicated on drawings incompliance with ADA Standards.

5. Operation: Motor operated.

B. Design Loads: Design to withstand the following loading conditions:1. Live Load on Structural Supports: 100 psf, minimum, of gross horizontal projection.2. Live Load on Seats and Walking Surfaces: 120 pounds per linear foot.3. Lateral Sway Stress on Structural Supports: 24 pounds per linear foot of seat plank.4. Perpendicular Sway Stress on Structural Supports: 10 pounds per linear foot of seat

plank.

C. Dimensions: 1. Rise Per Row: 10 inches.2. Adjustable Row Depth: 22-26 inches.3. Seat Height Above Tread: 6 inches.

D. Structural Supports: Steel or aluminum; manufacturer's standard wheeled carriages supportingeach tier separately, with moving parts permanently lubricated and metal parts cushioned toprevent metal-to-metal contact during operation.1. Design so that each row carriage so that it will individually support the design loads and is

self supporting when fully assembled without dependence on platform panels or boards,seats, or fascia.

2. Welding: In accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3/D1.3M.3. Bolting: Use lock-washers or locknuts.4. Wheels: Minimum 5 inch diameter by 1-1/8 inch wide, with non-marring rubber tires; ball,

roller, or oil-impregnated metal bearings; minimum of 2 wheels at each floor support.5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel or powder coating.6. Row Locking: Automatically mechanically lock each carriage to adjacent carriages when

fully extended.7. Unlocking: Automatically unlock all rows before engaging retraction mechanism.



E. Motor Operation: Manufacturer's standard drive mechanism, using motor adequately sized forthe purpose.1. Provide UL listed electrical components and wiring.2. Controls: Start, Stop, Forward, and Reverse in a single control unit.3. Control Station: Removable plug-in low-voltage pendant station, with first-row plug-in

location for each motor.4. Limit Switches: Automatically stop operation when unit has reached fully open or fully

closed position.5. Provide all wiring internal to bleacher units, to junction box located where indicated; ensure

that wiring is not energized except during operation.6. Electrical Characteristics: 120V, single phase, 60 Hz.7. Provide access to motor from front side of bleachers; a hinged front skirt or hinged section

at least 30 inches wide is acceptable.

2.03 SEAT AND PLATFORM COMPONENTS

A. Seat/Fascia Assembly: Continuous, molded UV-stabilized high-density polyethylene plastic,seat minimum 1 inch thick, textured finish, homogeneous color throughout, color as selectedfrom manufacturer's standard selection; approximately 18 inch long sections independentlyremovable with tongue-and-groove or rabbeted interlock at end joints.1. Shape: Ergonomically contoured, with internal ribs spaced for natural flexibility; rear edge

cantilevered to provide toe room of not less than 3 inches; no openings to trap debris.2. Provide end caps of same material and finish on each exposed end.3. Supports: Internal steel reinforcement of each seat segment bolted to platform nose

member; minimum two bolts per segment.4. Seat and Row Numbers: Provide recessed pockets for number plates by others.

B. Platform, Tread, and Step Structure: Plywood continuously supported on front and rear withside joints tongue-and-grooved.1. Plywood: PS 1, 5-ply southern pine or polyethylene-overlaid douglas fir or southern pine,

Grade A-C.2. Plywood Thickness: 5/8 inch, minimum.3. Front (Nose), Rear, and Intermediate Supports: Steel channel or tube, hot-dipped

galvanized.4. Provide end caps of same material and finish on each exposed end.

2.04 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS

A. Provide the following railings:1. End of Row Guardrails: Self-storing, at open ends of sections beginning at row 2.2. Height: 42 inches above adjacent platform or tread.

B. Design handrails and railings to withstand the following loads:1. Concentrated Load on Guardrails: 200 pounds in any direction along top rail.2. Live Load on Guardrails:

a. Horizontal: 50 pounds per linear foot, applied at the guardrail height.b. Vertical: 100 pounds per linear foot, applied vertically to top of guardrail.

C. Railing Construction: Round steel pipe or tube, with formed elbows at corners and caps at endsof straight runs.1. Steel: 1-1/2 inch minimum outside diameter, with 11 gage, 0.12 inch minimum wall

thickness; textured powder coat epoxy finish.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Fillers and Closures:1. Ends of Retracted Units: Vinyl curtain.2. Top Row: Provide seat level rear filler panels to close openings between top row seat and

wall; finish to match platforms.



B. Fasteners: Provide hardware and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer92srecommendations.

C. Anchorage: As indicated on drawings; provide hardware in accordance with manufacturer92srecommendations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are consistent with those on the shop drawings.

B. Verify that electrical rough-ins have been installed and are accessible.

C. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared and area has beencleared of obstructions.

D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactorypreparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.


3.03 INSTALLATION


B. Do not field cut or alter seats, fascia, or structural members without approval.

C. Provide manufacturer's field representative to inspect completed installation.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Lubricate, test, and adjust each moving assembly to ensure proper operation in compliance withmanufacturer's recommendations.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed and semi-exposed assembly surfaces.

B. Touch up finishes on damaged or soiled areas.


A. Demonstration and Training: Provide manufacturer's field representative to demonstrate to andtrain Owner's operating personnel in proper operation of equipment.1. Location: On site using installed equipment.2. Time: As agreed between Owner and Contractor.

3.07 PROTECTION


B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

SITE FURNISHINGS

17.05 / Kennewick High School 12 9300 – 1

SECTION 12 9300

SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes bicycle racks, skateboard rack, player benches, basketball standards and striping, bollards, benches and trash receptacles; track and field equipment; soccer goals and football goals; bleachers.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 BICYCLE RACKS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Basis of Design: WLBR-13, surface-mount bike racks, as manufactured by LA Steelcraft

as located on Drawings, standard galvanized finish. Manufacturer: LA Steelcraft 1975 Lincoln Ave. Pasadena, CA 91103 (626)798-7401, 1-800-371-2438 fax-626-798-1482.

2.02 SKATEBOARD RACKS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Basis of Design: Spartan 14, embed-mount skateboard racks, as manufactured by LA

Steelcraft as located on Drawings, standard galvanized finish. Manufacturer: LA Steelcraft 1975 Lincoln Ave. Pasadena, CA 91103 (626)798-7401, 1-800-371-2438 fax-626-798-1482.

2.03 PLAYER BENCHES

A. Provide new Player Benches: Basis of Design: Model PBA-PF15 aluminum player bench, as manufactured by LA Steelcraft, Manufacturer: LA Steelcraft 1975 Lincoln Ave. Pasadena, CA 91103 (626)798-7401, 1-800-371-2438 fax-626-798-1482. Installed per manufacturer’s specifications with regards to dimensions and volume of concrete base. Coordinate placement with installation of concrete aprons under Section 32 31 13.

SITE FURNISHINGS


2.04 BASKETBALL STANDARDS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Basis of Design: Basketball Standards: Model 12C54 Curved single-basket pole, Model

12 Backboard and Model 600N Goal and nylon net and OTA/OBM Target and Border, as manufactured by LA Steelcraft, Manufacturer: LA Steelcraft 1975 Lincoln Ave. Pasadena, CA 91103 (626)798-7401, 1-800-371-2438 fax-626-798-1482 Installed per manufacturer’s specifications for size and quantity of concrete base. a. Concrete base requirements: Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for

concrete bases for basketball standards.

2.05 BOLLARDS

A. Basis of Design: Model TF6020 Anchor Style A for decorative installation; as manufactured by Belson Outdoors, 111 North River Road, North Aurora, IL 60542, 800-323-5664, email [email protected]. Installed per manufacturer’s specifications for size and quantity of concrete

base. Quantity: 6, color to be selected from manufacturer’s standard colors in ‘weatherstone’ option

2.06 BENCHES AND TRASH RECEPTACLES

A. Benches: Basis of Design: Model Q2-GROOVE72B “Groove” Bench as manufactured by QCP: 731 W Parkridge Av, Norco, CA 92860. Email: [email protected]. Installed per manufacturer’s specifications. Specialty color shall be Aspen Amber, in Standard steel-reinforced concrete.

B. Trash Receptacles: Basis of Design: Model QS-CAL2534W-C21 “California Square” Trash receptacle as manufactured by QCP: 731 W Parkridge Av, Norco, CA 92860. Email: [email protected]. Installed per manufacturer’s specifications. Specialty color shall be Aspen Amber, in Standard steel-reinforced concrete. Trash receptacles shall be located on paved surfaces and with mounting detail as recommended by manufacturer, wit h locations confirmed by Architect.

2.07 TRACK EQUIPMENT A. Track Equipment:

1. Long Jump/Triple Jump Take Off Boards with blanking lid: Basis of Design: UCS 519-2300. Contact: UCS Spirit, 1601 Fairview Drive #1, Carson City, NV 89701 1-800-526-4856 http://www.ucsspirit.com/

2. Pole Vault Box: Basis of Design: UCS, 711-1100 w/711-1401 flush cover. Contact: UCS

Spirit, 1601 Fairview Drive #1, Carson City, NV 1-800-526-4856 http://www.ucsspirit.com/

3. Discus Circle: Basis of Design: UCS 725-2565 Aluminum Throwing RIng. Contact: UCS

Spirit, 1601 Fairview Drive #1, Carson City, NV 89701 1-800-526-4856 http://www.ucsspirit.com/

4. Discus Cage : Basis of Design: UCS 570-0600R: Contact: UCS Spirit, 1601 Fairview

Drive #1, Carson City, NV 89701 1-800-526-4856 http://www.ucsspirit.com/

http://www.ucsspirit.com/




SITE FURNISHINGS


5. Shot Put Circle: Basis of Design; UCS 725-2575 with 716-1630 Toe Board. Contact: UCS Spirit, 1601 Fairview Drive #1, Carson City, NV 89701 1-800-526-4856 http://www.ucsspirit.com/

2.08 FOOTBALL GOAL POSTS

A. Provide two new football goal posts, either locally fabricated units or pre-fabricated units. Basis of Design, UCS 751-1140 with 6’ offset, 23’-4” High School Goal. South goalpost shall allow 90º pivoting to provide clearance for track and field events, through the use of a ground sleeve and removable bolts. Goal posts shall be painted yellow. Contact: UCS Spirit, 1601 Fairview Drive #1, Carson City, NV 89701 1-800-526-4856 http://www.ucsspirit.com/

2.09 SOCCER GOALS

A. Soccer Goals: Basis of Design Product: Provide two new soccer goals and nets, with net anchors. LA Steelcraft Model FGS-ES with 350-E4 Sleeves. Net shall be 3 millimeter nylon, in white, ‘Alumilite’ or approved equal. Manufacturer: LA Steelcraft 1975 Lincoln Ave. Pasadena , CA 91103 (626)798-7401, 1-800-371-2438 fax-626-798-1482. Installed per manufacturer’s

specifications with regards to dimensions and volume of concrete base.

2.10 BLEACHERS

A. Track and Field Bleachers: Basis of Design Product: Provide eight BL0521SA and one BL0515SA bleacher units at east side of new track, secured to pad with approved masonry anchors. Manufacturer: LA Steelcraft 1975 Lincoln Ave. Pasadena, CA 91103 (626)798-7401, 1-800-371-2438 fax-626-798-1482. Installed per manufacturer’s specifications.

B. Baseball Field Bleacher: Basis of Design Product: Provide one BL0515SA bleacher unit at baseball field, secured to pad with approved masonry anchors. Manufacturer: LA Steelcraft 1975 Lincoln Ave. Pasadena, CA 91103 (626)798-7401, 1-800-371-2438 fax-626-798-1482. Installed per manufacturer’s specifications.

2.11 HARDSCAPE PLAY AREAS

A. For basketball delineation, Use commercial/municipal grade yellow, traffic -rated pavement marking paint, 3” wide, two coats minimum.

2.12 FABRICATION

A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.

B. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full -length, full-penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

C. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.



SITE FURNISHINGS


D. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs, barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.

E. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.

2.13 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

2.14 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

B. PVC Finish: Manufacturer's standard, UV-light stabilized, mold-resistant, slip-resistant, matte-textured, dipped or sprayed-on, PVC-plastisol finish, with flame retardant added; complying with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.

2.15 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. Run directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. Directional Satin Finish: No 4. 3. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.

C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION 12 9300

FABRIC STRUCTURES


SECTION 13 3100

FABRIC STRUCTURES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Custom tensioned fabric structure, including fabric, structural steel supporting members, fittings,and accessories.


A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete foundations.

B. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Additional requirements for support steel.


A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013Supplements and Errata.

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.

C. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless; 2012.

D. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless CarbonSteel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.

E. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel andAlloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum TensileStrength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a.

F. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata).

1.04 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting at least two (2) weeks before startof installation of tensioned fabric structure.1. Require attendance of parties directly effecting work of this section, including Architect,

Owner, Contractor, and Tensioned Fabric Installation Superintendent.2. Review proper handling of fabric, preparation, installation, adjusting, cleaning, and

coordination with other work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including test reports on fabric showingcompliance with specified properties.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit construction drawings including plans, elevations, details, dimensions,support steel sizing, cables and hardware, clamp/corner plates, fittings, fabric, fabric layoutseams, and the following:1. Exact interface geometry determination and definitions.2. Coordination between fabric and structural supports3. Interfaces to foundation supports.4. Design loads used in structural calculations.5. Foundation reaction loads.6. Stamp or seal of design engineer.

D. Samples: Submit at least 6 inch by 6 inch sample of fabric.

E. Operating and Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions for fabric repair, re-tensioningcables, and cleaning fabric.

F. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have beencompleted in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

FABRIC STRUCTURES



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm that is capable of assuming complete responsibility fordesign, engineering, fabrication, delivery, preparation, installation, adjusting, cleaning ofstructure, and the following:1. Having minimum of five years experience in design and fabrication of tensioned fabric

structures of similar size and complexity to that specified.2. Employing a licensed professional engineer with minimum of five years experience in

tensioned fabric structures using large displacement finite element techniques to performor supervise the structural design and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

3. Employing a professional staff and qualified consultants experienced with tensioned fabricstructures of similar size and complexity to that specified.

4. Employing integrated CAD and finite element computer software programs to ensureadequacy of design and accurate 3-dimensional computer generated models forfabrication of structure; using CAD system to prepare construction drawings and interfacewith the plotting and cutting process, ensuring high precision fabric cutting.

5. Providing installation directly supervised by a superintendent, directly employed bycontractor, with five years of experience in installation of tensioned fabric structures ofsimilar size and complexity to that specified.


A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, withlabels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in a clean, dry, well ventilatedarea, above ground on blocking, and do not allow materials to become wet, stained, or dirty.

C. Handle materials so as to protect materials, coatings, and finishes during handling andinstallation to prevent damage or staining.1. Handle fabric in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.2. Use care in handling of fabric to avoid damage to fabric material and coating.3. Do not damage, crush, or kink cables.

1.08 WARRANTY


B. Provide manufacturer's standard ten year fabric warranty.

C. Provide installer's written one year workmanship warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Tensioned Fabric Structures:1. Birdair, Inc: www.birdair.com.2. Membrane Structure Solutions, Inc: www.membranestructuresolutions.com.3. Span Systems, Inc: www.spansystemsinc.com.4. Tension Structures:www.tensionstructures.com5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 TENSIONED FABRIC STRUCTURES

A. Tensioned Fabric Structure: Provide a custom tensioned fabric structure consisting of fabricstretched on steel structural supports, with the following characteristics:1. Capable of withstanding loads specified in ASCE 7 and local building code without damage

or failure; for designer's information, project falls under the following design categories:a. Basic Wind Speed: 110 mph.b. Exposure Category: C.

2. Capable of maintaining structural integrity in event of a tear propagating in fabric, withoutendangering occupants.

3. Shape geometry selected for equilibrium based on stress in fabric.

FABRIC STRUCTURES


4. Having a smooth uniform fabric surface with even curved edges and interfaces and withoutwrinkles, cuts, abrasions, stains, marks, surface defects, or seaming aberrations.

5. Configuration as indicated on drawings.6. Made of prefabricated components ready for installation.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Fabric: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and polyester fabric with 100 percent polyvinylidene fluoride(PVDF) top coating.1. Color: White.

B. Supporting Steel Members: As specified in Section 05 1200, unless otherwise specified in thissection; steel members are hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.1. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M.2. Structural Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B.3. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.4. High-Strength Bolts: ASTM F3125/F3125M.5. Welding: Perform in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Paint for Structural Steel Members, Tensioning Nuts, and Fabric Plates:1. As specified in 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.2. Color as selected by Architect.

D. Cables and End Fittings: Provide structural cables of same type having same modulus ofelasticity.1. Cables in Contact with Fabric: PVC sleeved.2. Cable Length Tolerance: As indicated on drawings.3. Swaged and Speltered Fittings: Design and install to develop full breaking strength of

cable.4. Thimble End Fittings: Design and install to develop a minimum of 90 percent of breaking

strength of cable.5. Swaged End Fittings, Pins, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.6. Tensioning Nuts and Fabric Plates: Galvanized steel, finished with two coats of epoxy

paint.

E. Shackles, Rigging Screws, Clamps, and Tensioning Hardware: Stainless steel architecturalfinished material only.

F. Interior Lighting: Pre-drill base plates to allow conduit to be installed and cabling to run insidesupport steel for mounting lights under canopy.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine area to receive structure; notify Architect if area is not acceptable, and do not begininstallation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine foundations and anchor bolts for location and elevation; notify Architect ofinaccuracies, and do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare an erection plan for all structural and fabric installation activity, including a detailedsequence of the work.

B. Prepare a clear, flat, smooth, and clean layout area on ground of sufficient size for assembly offabric panels; prepare area adjacent to location of structure installation.

C. Check contact surfaces to remove sharp objects, dirt, grease, oil, and other causes for rips,scratching, or other damage to fabric panels during installation.

D. Use temporary ground sheets where fabric panels are to be dragged across a surface toprevent chaffing or other damage to fabric panel surface.

FABRIC STRUCTURES


3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Conform to pre-established erection plan.

B. Do not undertake erection of fabric during inclement weather conditions; installer has soleresponsibility to determine when conditions are safe for erection.

C. Install structure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at location indicated ondrawings.

D. Concrete Foundations:1. Install concrete foundations and anchor bolts as specified in Section 03 3000 and as

indicated on drawings.2. Ensure exposed concrete surfaces are smooth, uniform and clean, with no "bug holes," air

voids, or other surface blemishes.3. Ensure concrete has obtained specified minimum compressive strength before erection of

support steel.

E. Support Steel:1. Erect support steel as specified in Section 05 1200 and as indicated on drawings.2. Erect support steel plumb, level, and square, to correct location and elevation.3. Do not perform field welding without approval of Architect; use experienced welders.

F. Install structure in necessary sequence and with sufficient bracing to ensure stability throughoutinstallation.

G. Architect will inspect installed concrete foundations, support steel, cables, and fittings beforeinstallation of fabric only to ensure compliance with data submittals.

H. Install and tension fabric in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.1. Use care in installation of fabric to avoid damage to base material, coating, and surface

treatment.2. Ensure surfaces of fabric are smooth, uniform, and clean, with even curved edges and

interfaces, and with no cuts, scratches, abrasions, stains, marks, blemishes, or weldingirregularities.

I. Repair or replace defective or damaged materials, coatings, and finishes as directed byArchitect.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Make final adjustments to structure as required for structural integrity, geometric shape, andfree from objectionable wrinkles when viewed from the normally occupied space.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean structure in accordance with fabric manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION

ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS AND GATES


SECTION 13 3425


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General Requirements are part of this specification and shall apply as if repeated here.

B. Work includes:1. Prefabricated Sight Obscuring Enclosure Systems, complete, including structural framing,

panels, gates and hardware.2. Enclosure Gates and hardware.3. Enclosure System Anchorage.

1.02 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for enclosure systems and gates. Submit settingdrawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concreteinserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete.Deliver items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of enclosure systems and gates with adjacent construction to ensure thatadjacent construction is protected from damage by the work of this Section.

C. Where enclosures are used at electrical transformers, coordinate installation with owner of thetransformers for proper electrical grounding of enclosures and gates.

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperaturechanges by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure ofconnections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures ofmaterials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces

1.04 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples in accordance with Division 1 Section, Submittals.

B. Submit duplicate, minimum 3-inch x 5-inch samples of each color selected.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 Section, Submittals

B. Indicate elevations, profiles, dimensions and thickness of panels.

C. Indicate location and detail of joints including joints necessary to accommodate thermalmovement.

D. Show fastening and anchoring details.

E. Coordination Drawings: For enclosure systems and gates elements that house items specifiedin other Sections. Show dimensions of housed items, including locations of housingpenetrations and attachments, and necessary clearances

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Protect finish and edges using a plastic film adhered to prefinished components in accordancewith manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Store components and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer’s written warranty covering failure of factory-applied exterior finish withinthe warranty period. Warranty period for finish: One year after the date of SubstantialCompletion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER OF ENCLOSURES AND GATES

A. Basis of Design: Revamp Panels, LLC, www.revamppanels.com.


2.02 PROPERTIES OF ENCLOSURES AND GATES

A. Enclosure systems and Gate Panels:1. Panel thickness: 0.125-inches with 1 ½-inch return flange on all four sides2. Panel Material: Powder-coated steel.3. Pattern Design: As selected from Manufacturer’s standard patterns.

2.03 FRAMING

A. Gate Posts: 6 x 6 x 3/8” HSS.

B. Enclosure Posts: 4 x 4 x ¼-inch HSS.

C. Gate Frame: 2 x 2 x ¼-inch HSS at hinge side; 2 x 2 x ¼-inch angle at top, bottom and latchside; 2 x 2 x ¼-inch “T” section at center horizontal members.

2.04 HINGES:

A. Basis of Design: The Chamberlain Group, Inc.: www.chamberlain.com; Model Elite Heavy DutyBall-bearing Power Hinges. Hinges shall be welded to ½-inch steel mounting plates formechanical fastening to gate posts and welding to gate frames.

2.05 SLIDE BAR AND DROP RODS:

A. Slide Bars: Slide bars fabricated from 1-inch diameter solid steel rod. Slide bar mountingbrackets shall be fabricated from steel pipe welded to ¼-inch steel mounting plate formechanical fastening to gate frames.

B. Drop Rods: Drop rods shall be fabricated to 5/8-inch diameter steel rod. Drop Rod bracketsshall be steel pipe welded to ¼-inch steel mounting plates for mechanical fastening to gateframes.

C. Drop Rod Stops: Drop Rod Stops shall be fabricated from 2 x 2 x ¼-inch steel angles.

D. Drop Rod Receivers: Provide Steel Pipe embedded in concrete at gate closed and gate openlocations.

2.06 FABRICATION:

A. Gates shall be prefabricated, welded [finished] and ready for installation

B. Accessories (hinges, slide bars, drop rods) shall be fabricated and finished before beingmechanically fastened to gate posts and frames.

C. Gate Posts shall be sized for minimum 3’-0” embedment in concrete

D. Gate Posts and Enclosure Posts shall have welded caps.

E. Enclosure posts shall have 3/8-inch steel base plates for mechanical fastening to concrete.

F. Enclosure posts shall have continuous angle brackets welded flush to inside face of posts. Provide protective backboards.

G. Gate frame shall be continuously welded at all connections.

H. All welds shall be water tight and ground smooth.

I. Panels shall be mechanically fastened to posts.

J. Panels shall be welded to gate framing members.

K. Hinge assemblies shall be mounted to gate posts and gates so as to allow gates to open to 180degrees.

L. Drop rod receivers shall be provided at closed position, 100 degree open position and whereavailable, 180 degree gate open positions space.



2.07 FINISHES:

A. Finishes General: All components shall be factory finished before assembly.

B. Cardinal Powder Coat: www.cardinalpaint.com

C. Fasteners shall be galvanized for exterior use.

2.08 COLOR:

A. Color to be selected from the manufacturer’s standard color range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine work of other Sections upon which work of this Section depends.

B. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to Architect in writing. Do not start work until unsatisfactoryconditions are corrected.

3.02 GATE POSTS

A. Gate posts shall be pre-finished as indicated and embedded in concrete footings at time of orbefore slab is cast.

B. Gate posts shall be installed plumb and true, free of distortion and surface imperfections,uniform in color and gloss.

C. In gate replacement installations where existing round gate posts are deemed acceptable forre-use, provide gate manufacturer’s round post hinge adapters.

3.03 ENCLOSURE POSTS AND PANELS

A. Install enclosure posts and panels plumb, true, level and in alignment to established lines andelevations.

B. Where indicated on drawings or as required to complete work of this Section, furnish and installclosures, caps, fasteners and trims with finish matching panel finish.

3.04 CLEAN-UP

A. Remove protective film from components.

B. Clean exposed surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. For powder-coated surfaces, repair and touch up minor surface damage with Cardinal DC1color matching high grade enamel, only where permitted by the Architect and only whereappearance after touch-up is acceptable to Architect.

D. Replace damaged components that, in opinion of the Architect, cannot be satisfactorilyrepaired.

END OF SECTION

FABRICATED WELDING BOOTHS


SECTION 13 3500


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fabricated steel welding booths.


A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, project meetings,progress schedules and documentation, reports, coordination.

B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance(O&M) data, warranties and bonds.

C. Division 22 - Plumbing: Connections to gas lines.

D. Division 26 - Electrical: Connection to electrical power service systems.


A. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for each type of product.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plans, elevations, details and accessories.

1.05 WARRANTY


B. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for factory defects in material and workmanship fromdate of substantial completion..

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: GMI (Greene Manufacturing, Inc.): www.greenemfg.com.1. Provide Starter Model GB-74.04-DM at both ends, as indicated on drawings.

a. Observation windows on front and sides only.2. Provide Add-On units as indicated on drawings, Model GB-74.04A.

a. Observation windows on front only.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Description:1. Composition: Freestanding 16 gauge tubular steel with non-conductive, asbestos-free,

fire-resistant panels.2. Size: 48"W x 48"D x 76"H.3. Color: To be selected by Architect from standard range.4. Electrical Connection Requirements: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.

D. Assembly:1. Factory assemble.2. Provide left or right hand openings as indicated on drawings.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Booth Mounted Tables: Side to side mounting.1. 11 gauge steel frame.2. Grate top, including slag shield.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Set booths plumb and aligned.

C. Fasten welding booths securely to concrete base with anchorage per manufacturer'srecommendations.

D. Connect to electrical power service systems.

3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust all moving, adjustable parts for smooth operation.



END OF SECTION

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS


SECTION 14 2400

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Complete hydraulic elevator systems.1. Passenger type.

B. Elevator Maintenance Contract.


A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Includes elevator machine foundation and elevatorpit.

B. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Includes hoistway framing, divider beams, andoverhead hoist beams.

C. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Includes elevator pit ladder and sill supports.

D. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Fire rated sealant in hoistway.

E. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum shaft walls.

F. Section 09 6813 - Tile Carpeting: Floor finish in car.

G. Section 10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties: Fire extinguisher in elevator machine room.

H. Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in hoistway.

I. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems:

J. Section 26 0583 - Wiring Connections:



B. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2010.

C. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; 2013.

D. ASME A17.2 - Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks; 2014.

E. ASTM A276/A276M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2016a.

F. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless SteelSheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.

G. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015 (with March 2016 Errata).

H. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.

I. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2016.

J. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; 2016.

K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority HavingJurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

L. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.

M. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.


A. Coordination:1. Coordinate work with other installers to provide conduits necessary for installation of wiring

including but not limited to:a. Elevator pit for lighting and sump pump.b. Fire alarm panel from controller cabinet.

2. Coordinate work with other installers for equipment provisions necessary for properelevator operation, including but not limited to, the following:

Ryan Jones

Text Box

“Provide control system and door operator systems with on-board diagnostics with the capabilities for any future maintenance service provider to make door parameter adjustments and perform Cat 1 and Cat5 testing without the need of special tools. Installer must notify owner of final inspection date with L&I as owner or owner agent will witness that final turnover Cat1 and Cat5 tests are conducted without the use of special tools” B. Non-Proprietary Installations: Due to the increased complexity of elevator control systems, more detailed requirements are required for "non-proprietary" elevator installations. 1. Elevator control systems, including but not limited to the elevator operations controller, motordrive or soft-start system, selectors, door operators and car panels must be installed with all necessary software, tools, and on-board or remote devices necessary to maintain the elevator. 2. Any Service Tool available to the OEM’s (Original Equipment Manufacturer’s) installation/adjusting/service technicians, including but not limited to: handheld diagnostic tools, site-dedicated desktop or laptop computers, on-board diagnostic systems such as LCD screens with built-in keypads or remote access programs must be provided to the Owner as part of the installation contract. 3. Along with Service Tools, all Installation, Service, Adjustor, and Repair Manuals with engineering level documentation regarding usage of said tools must be provided to the Owner. 4. All levels of diagnostics and adjustment available to an OEM technician must remain accessible. No lockouts such as, but not limited to, software keys, software expiration, disabling of onboard keypad, removal of LCD screens, remote password blocks and/or changes, removal of SIM chips; usage, re-level, and/or fault counters, or date stamped shutdowns may be applied. 5. A Backup copy of the Job Software Program must be included with the installation, along with instructions and any tools necessary for its re-loading and programming. This may include, but is not limited to: EPROMs, EEPROMS, Floppy Discs, CD/DVD’s, Flash Memory, SIM chips, and/or Pre-Programmed Micro-Controllers. 6. All parts of the elevator system, including but not limited to: mechanical, electrical, motor, drive, pump, door and selector controls, and tools must be available for purchase by the Owner and/or its elevator service contractor. A published price list must be made available. Exchange-only provisions are not acceptable. LPW Architecture, PC SD-29 Somers Middle School Project Manual Addition and Remodel 7. A technical support hotline shall be provided by the original equipment manufacturer whereby anyone designated by the Owner shall be able to obtain assistance for installation, adjustment, maintenance or troubleshooting. 8. The original equipment manufacturer shall provide engineering support to any maintaining contractor so designated by the Owner. 9. Manuals, engineering drawings, circuit diagrams and prints shall be provided with the equipment at time of delivery. All documentation shall be available for replacement purchase, at reasonable cost, by any installing or maintaining elevator contractor or persons so designated by the Owner. 10. Factory and/or on-site training shall be available from the original equipment manufacturer for enrollment by anyone who wishes to learn about installation, adjustment, maintenance and troubleshooting the equipment. Training fees shall be reasonable and appropriate. 11. All software or hardware upgrades, such as, but not limited to: product improvement, reliability, or safety of the system, shall be made available to the Owner for installation and adjustment, either by the OEM or a service provider specified by the Owner, at no cost to either party. Provide fully non-proprietary operations and maintenance system, allowing any qualified vendor to provide future maintenance service contract to Owner.

Ryan Jones

Cloud+

Ryan Jones

Cloud+

Consider including some of this language to protect against proprietary equipment allowing for flexibility in maintenance agreements.

Ryan Jones

Arrow

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

heidi

Set to Completed

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS


a. Automatic transfer switches with auxiliary contacts for emergency power transferstatus indication.

b. Shunt trip devices for automatic disconnection of elevator power prior to firesuppression system activation.

c. Overcurrent protection devices selected to achieve required selective coordination.

B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene meeting at least one week prior to start of this work.1. Review schedule of installation, proper procedures and conditions, and coordination with

related work.

C. Construction Use of Elevator: Not permitted.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on following items:1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels, and indicators.2. Car design, dimensions, layout, and components.3. Car and hoistway door and frame details.4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Include appropriate plans, elevations, sections, diagrams, and details onfollowing items:1. Elevator Equipment and Machines: Size and location of driving machines, power units,

controllers, governors, and other components.2. Hoistway Components: Size and location of car guide rails, buffers, jack unit and other

components.3. Rail bracket spacing; maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to

building structural framing.4. Individual weight of principal components; load reaction at points of support.5. Clearances and over-travel of car.6. Locations in hoistway and machine room of traveling cables and connections for car

lighting and telephone.7. Location and sizes of hoistway and car doors and frames.8. Interface with building security system.9. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.10. Indicate arrangement of elevator equipment and allow for clear passage of equipment

through access openings.

D. Samples: Submit samples illustrating car interior finishes, car and hoistway door and framefinishes, and handrail material and finish in the form of cut sheets or finish color selectionbrochures.

E. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.

F. Installer's Qualification Statement.

G. Testing Agency's Qualification Statement.

H. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have beencompleted in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data:1. Parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify each entry with

equipment description and identifying code.2. Operation and maintenance manual.3. Schematic drawings of equipment and hydraulic piping, and wiring diagrams of installed

electrical equipment with list of corresponding symbols to identify markings on machineroom and hoistway apparatus.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS



A. Designer Qualifications: Design guide rails, brackets, anchors, and machine anchors underdirect supervision of a licensed Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of thistype of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum ten years documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section andapproved by elevator equipment manufacturer.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing andinspections of type specified in this section.

E. Products Requiring Fire Resistance Rating: Listed and classified by ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), ortesting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) or testing agencyacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated in constructiondocuments.

1.07 WARRANTY


B. Provide manufacturer's warranty for elevator operating equipment and devices for one yearfrom Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hydraulic Elevators:1. Otis Elevator Company: www.otis.com.2. Schindler Elevator Corporation: www.schindler.com.


C. Products other than Basis of Design are subject to compliance with specified requirements andprior approval of Architect. By using products other than Basis of Design, the Contractoraccepts responsibility for costs associated with any necessary modifications to related work,including any design fees.

2.02 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

A. Hydraulic Passenger Elevator:1. Hydraulic Elevator Equipment:

a. Holeless hydraulic with cylinder mounted within hoistway.2. Drive System:

a. Variable voltage variable frequency (VVVF) to modulate motor speed.3. Operation Control Type:

a. Selective Collective Automatic Operation Control.4. Service Control Type:

a. Standard service control.b. Restricted Access service control.

5. Interior Car Height: 96 inch.6. Electrical Power: 480 volts; alternating current (AC); three phase; 60 Hz.7. Rated Net Capacity: 3500 pounds.8. Rated Speed: 100 feet per minute.9. Hoistway Size: As indicated on drawings.10. Interior Car Platform Size: As indicated on drawings.11. Elevator Pit Depth: 48 inch.12. Overhead Clearance at Top Floor: 144 inch.13. Travel Distance: As indicated on drawings.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS


14. Number of Stops: As indicated on drawings.15. Number of Openings: 1 Front; 1 Rear.16. Hydraulic Equipment Location: As indicated on drawings

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Elevator Equipment:1. Motors, Hydraulic Equipment, Controllers, Controls, Buttons, Wiring, Devices, and

Indicators: Comply with NFPA 70. Refer to Section 26 2820.2. Guide Rails, Cables, Buffers, Attachment Brackets and Anchors: Design criteria for

components includes safety factors in accordance with applicable requirements of ElevatorCode, ASME A17.1.

3. Buffers:a. Spring type for elevators with speed less than or equal to 200 feet per minute.

B. Electrical Equipment:1. Motors: NEMA MG 1.2. Boxes, Conduit, Wiring, and Devices: As required by NFPA 70. Refer to Sections 26

0533.13 and 26 0583.3. Spare Conductors: Provide ten percent in extra conductors and two pairs of shielded

audio cables in traveling cables.4. Include wiring and connections to elevator devices remote from hoistway and between

elevator machine room. Provide additional components and wiring to suit machine roomlayout. Refer to Section 26 0583.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, applicable local codes, and authoritieshaving jurisdiction (AHJ).

B. Accessibility Requirements: Conform to ADA Standards.

C. Perform structural steel design, fabrication, and installation in accordance with AISC 360.

D. Perform welding of steel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

E. Fabricate and install door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80 and incompliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Perform electrical work in accordance with NFPA 70.

G. Conform to fire protection sprinkler system of hoistway design in accordance with NFPA 13requirements and authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to Section 21 1300.

2.05 OPERATION CONTROLS

A. Elevator Controls: Provide landing operating panels and landing indicator panels.1. Landing Operating Panels: Metallic type, one for originating "Up" and one for originating

"Down" calls, one button only at terminating landings; with illuminating indicators.2. Landing Indicator Panels: Illuminating.3. Conform to ADA Standards for elevator controls.

B. Interconnect elevator control system with building security, fire alarm, card access, smokealarm, and building management control systems.

C. Door Operation Controls:1. Program door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at floor landing.2. Render "Door Close" button inoperative when car is standing at dispatch landing with

doors open.3. Door Safety Devices: Moveable, retractable safety edges, quiet in operation; equipped

with photo-electric light rays.

D. Provide "Firefighter's Emergency Operation" in accordance with ASME A17.1, applicablebuilding codes, authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ), and _____.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS


2.06 OPERATION CONTROL TYPE

A. Single Automatic (Push Button) Operation Control: Applies to car in single elevator shaft.1. Refer to description provided in ASME A17.1.2. Set system operation so that momentary pressure of landing button dispatches car from

other landing to that landing.3. Allow call registered by momentary pressure of landing button at any time to remain

registered until car stops in response to that landing call.4. If elevator car door is not opened within predetermined period of time after car has

stopped at terminal landing allow car to respond to call registered from other landing.

B. Selective Collective Automatic Operation Control: Applies to car in single elevator shaft.1. Refer to description provided in ASME A17.1.2. Automatic operation by means of one button in the car for each landing served and by

"UP" and "DOWN" buttons at the landings.3. Stops are registered by momentary actuation of landing car buttons without consideration

of the number of buttons actuated or the sequence buttons are actuated, but the stops aremade in the order that landings are reached in each direction of travel.

4. All "UP" landing calls are made when car is traveling in the up direction.5. All "DOWN" landing calls are made when car is traveling in the down direction.6. Uppermost and lowermost calls are answered as soon as they are reached without

consideration of the car travel direction.

2.07 SERVICE CONTROL TYPE

A. Restricted Access Service Control:1. Car Call Security Lock-out: Provide a security card activated switch in car operating panel

that performs the following when activated:a. Restricts or permits registration of each landing button.b. Landing calls are answered in normal manner.

2. Allow "Firefighter's Emergency Operation" to take control priority over "Restricted AccessService Control".

2.08 EMERGENCY POWER

A. Set-up elevator operation to run with elevator emergency power supply when the normalbuilding power supply fails, and in compliance with ASME A17.1 requirements.

B. Elevator Emergency Power Supply: Supplied by battery backup; provide elevator systemcomponents as required for emergency power characteristics.

C. Emergency Lighting: Conform to ASME A17.1 elevator lighting requirements.

D. Provide operational control circuitry for adapting the change from normal to emergency power.

E. Upon transfer to emergency power, advance one elevator at a time to a pre-selected landing,stop car, open doors, disable operating circuits, and hold in standby condition.

2.09 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304; No. 4 Brushed finish unless otherwise indicated.

B. Stainless Steel Bars, Shapes and Moldings: ASTM A276/A276M, Type 304.

C. Tile Carpet Flooring: As specified in Section 09 6813.

2.10 CAR AND HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Elevator, No. 1:1. Car and Hoistway Entrances, Each Elevator Floor Lobby:

a. Hoistway Fire Rating: 1 Hour.b. Elevator Door Fire Rating: 1 Hour.c. Framed Opening Finish and Material: Brushed stainless steel.d. Car Door Material: Stainless steel, with rigid sandwich panel construction.e. Hoistway Door Material: Stainless steel, with rigid sandwich panel construction.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS


f. Door Type: Single leaf.g. Door Operation: Side opening, two speed.

B. Sills/Thresholds: Configure to align with frame return and coordinate with floor finish.

C. Gasketing: Provide acoustic type gasketing at hoistway doors and frames to eliminate audiblenoise due to car activities in the hoistway, and air pressure differential between hoistway andlanding floors.

2.11 CAR EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Elevator Car:1. Car Operating Panel: Provide main and auxiliary; flush-mounted applied face plate, with

illuminated call buttons corresponding to floors served with "Door Open/Door Close"buttons, "Door Open" button, "Door Close" button, and alarm button.a. Panel Material: Integral with front return; one per car.b. Car Floor Position Indicator: Above door with illuminating position indicators.c. Locate alarm button where it is unlikely to be accidentally actuated; not more than 54

inch above car finished floor.2. Flooring: Carpet tile.3. Front Return Panel: Match material of car door.4. Door Wall: Stainless steel.5. Side Walls: Stainless steel.6. Rear Wall: Stainless steel.7. Hand Rail: Stainless steel, at all three sides. Provide open clearance space 1-1/2 inch (38

mm) wide to face of wall.a. Round, Metal Tube: 1-1/2 inch diameter.b. Stainless Steel Finish: No. 4 Brushed.

8. Ceiling: a. Concealed Frame Suspended Ceiling: Stainless steel, mount 7 inch below car

canopy with 1-1/2 inch nominal space between edge of ceiling and wall.b. Panel Finish: No. 4 Brushed stainless steel.c. Lighting: LED downlights.

2.12 MACHINE ROOM FITTINGS

A. Wall-Mounted Frames: Glazed with clear plastic; sized as required. Provide one chart each formaster electric and hydraulic schematic and for lubrication chart. Install charts.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting this work.

B. Verify that hoistway, pit, and machine room are ready for work of this section.

C. Verify hoistway shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerance.

D. Verify location and size of machine foundation and position of machine foundation bolts.

E. Verify that electrical power is available and of correct characteristics.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Arrange for temporary electrical power for installation work and testing of elevator components,and conform to requirements of Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

B. Maintain elevator pit excavation free of water.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate this work with installation of hoistway wall construction.

B. Install system components, and connect equipment to building utilities.

C. Provide conduit, electrical boxes, wiring, and accessories. Refer to Sections 26 0533.13 and 260583.

Flavien

Cloud+

Flavien

Cloud+

WOM-1

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS


D. Install hydraulic piping between cylinder and pump unit.

E. Mount machines, motors, and pumps on vibration and acoustic isolators.1. Place on structural supports and bearing plates.2. Securely fasten to building supports.3. Prevent lateral displacement.

F. Install hoistway, elevator equipment, and components in accordance with approved shopdrawings.

G. Install guide rails to allow for thermal expansion and contraction movement of guide rails.

H. Accurately machine and align guide rails, forming smooth joints with machined splice plates.

I. Install hoistway door sills, frames, and headers in hoistway walls; grout sills in place, sethoistway floor entrances in alignment with car openings, and align plumb with hoistway.

J. Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent; primetwo coats.

K. Wood Surfaces not Exposed to Public View: Finish with one coat primer; one coat enamel.

L. Adjust equipment for smooth and quiet operation.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Guide Rail Alignment: Plumb and parallel to each other in accordance with ASME A17.1 andASME A17.2.

B. Car Movement on Aligned Guide Rails: Smooth movement, without any objectionable lateral oroscillating movement or vibration.


A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Testing and inspection by regulatory agencies will be performed at their discretion.1. Schedule tests with agencies and notify Owner and Architect.2. Obtain permits as required to perform tests.3. Document regulatory agency tests and inspections in accordance with requirements.4. Perform tests required by regulatory agencies.5. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car to minimize passenger discomfort.

B. Adjust with automatic floor leveling feature at each floor landing to reach 1/4 inch maximumfrom flush with sill.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces.

B. Clean surfaces and components in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.



B. Training: Train Owner's personnel on cleaning and operation and maintenance of system.1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with

additional training materials as required.2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.3. Location: At project site, unless noted otherwise.

3.09 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit construction traffic within car after cleaning.

B. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS


C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products and materials prior to Date of SubstantialCompletion.

3.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Refer to Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional requirementsrelating to initial maintenance service.

B. Examine system components periodically.

C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment.

D. Maintain and repair or replace parts, whenever required, using parts produced by originalequipment manufacturer.

E. Perform work without removing cars from use during peak traffic periods.

F. Maintain an adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes, and havepersonnel available to ensure the fulfillment of this maintenance contract without unreasonableloss of time.

END OF SECTION

Date post:	11-Aug-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	4 times
Download:	0 times